Garmin | Cirrus Perspective SR22T | Garmin Cirrus Perspective SR22T Cirrus Perspective Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T

Garmin Cirrus Perspective  SR22T Cirrus Perspective  Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503.581.8101
Fax 503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Tel: +44 (0) 238 052 4000
Fax: +44 (0) 238 052 4004
Aviation Support: +44 (0) 370 850 1243
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District,
New Taipei City, Taiwan
Tel: 34-93-357-2608
Fax: 34-93-429-4484
Cirrus SR2x
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913.397.8200
Fax: 913.397.8282
Aircraft On Ground (AOG)
Hotline: 913.397.0836
Aviation Dealer Technical
Support: 888.606.5482
www.garmin.com
190-02183-00
Revision A
CIRRUS PERSPECTIVE
+
Pilot’s Guide
Cirrus SR2x
CIRRUS SR2x
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Copyright © 2016 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software 2647.03 or later for the Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin Integrated Avionics System.
Where used, references to ‘SR2x’ are inclusive of the SR20, SR22, and SR22T. Some differences in operation may be observed when
comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions. Always refer to the FAA approved Airplane Flight Manual
for a description of systems, limitations and procedures. For a complete list of Garmin manuals with corresponding part numbers and
system software versions, refer to www.garmin.com.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913.397.8200
Fax: 913.397.8282
Aircraft On Ground (AOG) Hotline: 913.397.0836
Aviation Dealer Technical Support: 888.606.5482
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503.581.8101
Fax 503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Tel: +44 (0) 238 052 4000
Fax: +44 (0) 238 052 4004
Aviation Support: +44 (0) 370 850 1243
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
Tel: 34-93-357-2608
Fax: 34-93-429-4484
Website Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. Garmin SVT™,
SurfaceWatch™, Connext™, and Garmin ESP™ are trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be
used without the express permission of Garmin.
Perspective+® is a registered trademark of Cirrus Design Corporation; AC-U-KWIK® is a registered trademark of Penton Business Media
Inc. Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International, Inc. Becker® is a registered trademark of Becker
Flugfunkwerk GmbH. NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc. Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Sirius,
XM, and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio, Inc. and its subsidiaries. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Garmin is under license.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly disclaim all warranties with
respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant or
make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the
maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related
to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some jurisdictions
do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to licensee.
Printed in the U.S.A.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for maintaining separation
from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from third party sources and cannot
independently verify the accuracy of the information.
WARNING: Always refer to current aeronautical charts and NOTAMs for verification of displayed aeronautical
information. Displayed aeronautical data may not incorporate the latest NOTAM information.
WARNING: Do not use geometric altitude for compliance with air traffic control altitude requirements. The
primary barometric altimeter must be used for compliance with all air traffic control altitude regulations,
requirements, instructions, and clearances.
WARNING: Do not use basemap information (land and water data) as the sole means of navigation. Basemap
data is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered only
an aid to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitude (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be relied
upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical
charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: Always obtain qualified instruction prior to operational use of this equipment.
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QNH altimeter setting for height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a
system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.
iv
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: When using the autopilot to fly an approach with vertical guidance, the autopilot will not level
the aircraft at the MDA/DH even if the MDA/DH is set in the altitude preselect.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
Garmin SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or
reliability upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the Garmin SVT display or may
appear as a partial symbol.
WARNING: Do not use the Garmin SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of
the aircraft to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain or obstacle avoidance. TAWS is intended only
to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, do not rely on the accuracy of attitude and
heading indications in the following geographic areas: North of 72° North latitude at all longitudes; South
of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between longitude 75° W and 120° W.
(Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W. (Northern Canada);
North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia); South of 55° South
latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New Zealand).
WARNING: Do not use SurfaceWatch™ information as the primary method of flight guidance during airborne
or ground operations. SurfaceWatch does not have NOTAM or ATIS information regarding the current active
runway, condition, or information about the position of hold lines.
CAUTION: Do not clean display surfaces with abrasive cloths or cleaners containing ammonia. They will
harm the anti-reflective coating.
CAUTION: Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or
modifications could void both the warranty and affect the airworthiness of the aircraft.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
v
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the system panel
and displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current system and aviation databases.
Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible for
its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the system utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation
AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the system can be misused or
misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
NOTE: Operating the system in the vicinity of metal buildings, metal structures, or electromagnetic fields
can cause sensor differences that may result in nuisance miscompare annunciations during start up, shut
down, or while taxiing. If one or more of the sensed values are unavailable, the annunciation indicates no
comparison is possible.
NOTE: The system responds to a terminal procedure based on data coded within that procedure in the
Navigation Database. Differences in system operation may be observed among similar types of procedures
due to differences in the Navigation Database coding specific to each procedure.
vi
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the
following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen that have a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA are assured
compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs). A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each applicable
database and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Aviation Database Declarations.’
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with
established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established
AFM(S) and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed in
SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at
www.flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and consider their
impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by
selecting ‘Aviation Database Alerts.’
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support.
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.
These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go
to FlyGarmin.com and select ‘Aviation Data Error Report’.
NOTE: Operate Perspective+ system power through at least one cycle in a period of four days of continuous
operation to avoid an autonomous system reboot.
NOTE: The system supports approval of AC 120-76C Hardware Class 3, Software Type B Electronic Flight Bag
(EFB) electronic aeronautical chart applications. Possible additional requirements may make a secondary
source (traditional paper or additional electronic display) necessary onboard the aircraft. If the secondary
source is a Portable Electronic Device (PED), its use must be consistent with guidance in AC 120-76C.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
vii
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
Part Number
190-02183-00
viii
Revision
A
Date
12/21/16
Page Range
Description
i – I-6
Initial Release for GDU 20.04
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Garmin Line Replaceable Units (LRU)...................... 2
System Controls......................................................... 5
PFD/MFD Controls......................................................... 5
Display Controller.......................................................... 7
Secure Digital Cards....................................................... 9
Softkey Function.......................................................... 10
System Power-up...................................................... 18
System Operation.................................................... 19
Display Operation........................................................ 19
System Annunciations.................................................. 21
System Status.............................................................. 22
ADAHRS Operation...................................................... 23
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 24
Accessing System Functionality............................. 29
Menus........................................................................ 29
Page Groups............................................................... 30
System Settings........................................................... 32
System Utilities............................................................ 40
Display Backlighting................................................ 46
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Flight Instruments.................................................... 50
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 50
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 52
Altimeter.................................................................... 53
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)........................................ 56
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 57
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 58
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 63
Angle of Attack (AOA) Indicator.................................... 70
Garmin SVT (Synthetic Vision Technology)............ 71
SVT Operation............................................................. 72
SVT Features............................................................... 74
Field of View............................................................... 82
Supplemental Flight Data....................................... 83
Temperature Display.................................................... 83
Wind Data.................................................................. 83
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications............................ 84
PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions........... 85
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 85
Altitude Alerting.......................................................... 85
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 86
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 86
2.5 Abnormal Operations.............................................. 88
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 88
SVT Troubleshooting.................................................... 89
Reversionary Mode...................................................... 89
Unusual Attitudes........................................................ 89
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
EIS Display................................................................ 92
Engine Page.............................................................. 95
Fuel Calculations......................................................... 98
TKS Flight Into Known Icing (FIKI) Anti-Ice System.......... 99
Leaning Assist Mode.............................................. 102
EIS Display in Reversionary Mode....................... 103
System Display.......................................................... 104
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Overview................................................................. 107
MFD/PFD Controls and Frequency Display.................... 108
GMA 350/350c Audio Panel Controls........................... 110
Control Unit.............................................................. 112
COM Operation...................................................... 115
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation.................... 115
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................. 116
Quick-tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz................... 117
Auto-tuning the COM Frequency................................. 118
Frequency Spacing..................................................... 122
Automatic Squelch..................................................... 123
Volume..................................................................... 123
NAV Operation....................................................... 124
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 124
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning...................................... 125
Auto-tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD................ 127
Auto-tuning NAV Frequencies on Approach Activation.. 130
Marker Beacon Receiver............................................. 130
DME Tuning.............................................................. 132
GTX 335/345 Mode S Transponder....................... 133
Transponder Controls................................................. 133
Transponder Mode Selection....................................... 134
Selecting a transponder mode:.................................... 134
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 136
IDENT Function......................................................... 138
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.5 Additional Audio Panel Functions........................ 139
Power-Up.................................................................. 139
Mono/Stereo Headsets............................................... 139
Speaker.................................................................... 139
Passenger Address Mode (PA Mode)............................ 139
Clearance Recorder and Player.................................... 139
Intercom System (ICS) with the GMA 350/350c............ 140
Split COM Mode with the GMA 350/350c.................... 145
3D Audio (GMA 350/350c Only).................................. 146
Entertainment Inputs with the GMA 350..................... 148
Bluetooth® (GMA 350c Only)...................................... 149
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure.......................... 150
GMA 350/350c Preflight............................................. 150
4.7 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 151
Audio Panel Fail-safe Operation.................................. 151
Stuck Microphone...................................................... 151
COM Tuning Failure.................................................... 151
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.1 Introduction ........................................................... 153
Navigation Status Box................................................ 155
5.2 Using Map Displays............................................... 157
Map Orientation........................................................ 157
Map Range............................................................... 159
Map Panning............................................................. 161
Measuring Bearing and Distance................................. 165
Topography............................................................... 166
Map Symbols............................................................ 169
Airways.................................................................... 175
Track Vector.............................................................. 177
Wind Vector.............................................................. 178
Fuel Range Ring........................................................ 179
Field of View (SVT)..................................................... 180
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc.................................... 181
IFR/VFR Charts.......................................................... 182
Destination Airport Information.................................. 185
5.3 Waypoints............................................................... 186
Airports.................................................................... 188
Intersections............................................................. 194
NDBs........................................................................ 196
VORs........................................................................ 198
VRPs........................................................................ 200
User Waypoints......................................................... 202
x
5.4 Airspaces................................................................. 208
5.5 Direct-to-Navigation ............................................ 212
5.6 Flight Planning....................................................... 218
Flight Plan Creation................................................... 219
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan................. 228
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan.................................. 230
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan................... 233
Flight Plan Storage.................................................... 240
Flight Plan Editing..................................................... 242
Along Track Offsets.................................................... 246
Parallel Track............................................................. 247
Activating a Flight Plan Leg........................................ 250
Inverting a Flight Plan................................................ 251
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 252
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 254
User-Defined Holding Patterns.................................... 254
5.7 Vertical Navigation................................................ 260
Altitude Constraints................................................... 262
5.8 Procedures.............................................................. 266
Departures................................................................ 267
Arrivals .................................................................... 270
Approaches .............................................................. 273
5.9 Trip Planning........................................................... 281
Trip Planning............................................................. 281
Weight and Balance................................................... 285
Weight and Balance Caution And Warning Conditions... 287
5.10 RAIM Prediction..................................................... 288
5.11 Navigating a Flight Plan........................................ 291
5.12 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 317
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 SiriusXM Weather................................................... 320
Activating Services..................................................... 320
Using SiriusXM Weather Products............................... 321
6.2 FIS-B Weather......................................................... 356
Using FIS-B Weather Products..................................... 356
FIS-B Weather Status................................................. 379
6.3 Garmin Connext Weather...................................... 380
Registering the system for Garmin Flight Data Services.380
Accessing Garmin Connext Weather Products............... 381
Connext Data Requests.............................................. 389
Garmin Connext Weather Products.............................. 393
Abnormal Operations................................................. 409
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.4 Stormscope............................................................. 411
Setting Up Stormscope on the Navigation Map............ 412
Using the Stormscope Page........................................ 415
6.5 Terrain Proximity.................................................... 417
Displaying Terrain Proximity Data................................ 418
Terrain Proximity Page................................................ 421
6.6 Terrain-SVT.............................................................. 422
Displaying Terrain-SVT Data........................................ 423
Terrain-SVT Page....................................................... 426
Terrain-SVT Alerts...................................................... 427
System Status............................................................ 430
6.7 TAWS-B.................................................................... 431
Relative Terrain Symbology......................................... 432
TAWS-B Page............................................................ 436
TAWS-B Alerts........................................................... 437
System Status............................................................ 443
6.8 Vertical Situation Display (VSD) Terrain.............. 445
VSD Display.............................................................. 445
Track Mode Boundary................................................ 447
6.9 Garmin GTS 800 Traffic.......................................... 448
Theory of operation................................................... 448
TAS Alerts................................................................. 451
System Test............................................................... 452
Operation................................................................. 453
6.10 ADS-B Traffic........................................................... 460
ADS-B System Overview............................................. 460
ADS-B with TAS......................................................... 462
Conflict Situational Awareness & Alerting.................... 462
Airborne and Surface Applications............................... 464
Traffic Description...................................................... 465
Operation................................................................. 465
ADS-B System Status................................................. 470
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 Garmin AFCS........................................................... 473
AFCS Controls........................................................... 474
Flight Director Operation............................................ 475
AFCS Status Box........................................................ 476
Flight Director Modes................................................. 477
Command Bars.......................................................... 477
190-02183-00 Rev. A
7.2 AFCS MODES........................................................... 478
Vertical Modes.......................................................... 478
Lateral Modes........................................................... 484
Combination modes (VNV, APR, NAV, BC, GA).............. 488
7.3 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation................ 500
Flight Control............................................................ 500
Engagement.............................................................. 501
Disengagement......................................................... 501
Underspeed Protection............................................... 502
Overspeed Protection................................................. 504
7.4 Example Flight Plan............................................... 505
Departure................................................................. 505
Intercepting a VOR Radial........................................... 507
Flying a Flight Plan/GPS Course.................................. 508
Descent.................................................................... 509
Approach.................................................................. 512
Go Around/Missed Approach...................................... 516
7.5 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts............................ 518
7.6 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 519
Suspected Autopilot malfunction................................. 519
Overpowering Autopilot Servos................................... 519
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 519
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SafeTaxi................................................................... 522
SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision........................... 525
Charts...................................................................... 528
FliteCharts................................................................ 529
ChartView (optional).................................................. 537
Airport Directory.................................................... 547
Airport Directory Database Cycle Number and Revision.547
WIFI Connections................................................... 550
SiriusXM Radio Entertainment............................. 553
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services................. 553
Using SiriusXM Radio................................................. 554
Scheduler................................................................ 558
Flight Data Logging............................................... 560
Connext Setup........................................................ 562
SurfaceWatch.......................................................... 564
Information Box........................................................ 564
Alerts....................................................................... 565
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.10 Satellite Telephone................................................ 568
®
Registering with Garmin Connext ............................. 568
Disable/Enable Iridium Transceiver.............................. 568
Telephone Communication......................................... 569
Text Messaging (SMS)................................................ 573
8.11 Electronic Stability & Protection (ESP™)............. 584
Roll Engagement....................................................... 585
Pitch Engagement..................................................... 586
Low Speed Protection (Optional)................................. 587
High Airspeed Protection............................................ 587
8.12 Hypoxia Recognition with Auto Descent Mode. 588
Determining Pilot Alertness........................................ 588
Automatic Descent Mode........................................... 589
8.13 Electronic Checklists.............................................. 590
8.14 Enhanced Vision System (EVS) & Aux Video....... 592
EVS Image Quality and Interpretation.......................... 592
Video Softkeys........................................................... 592
Zoom/Range............................................................. 594
8.15 Position Reporting................................................. 595
8.16 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 597
GDL 59/69 SXM/69A SXM Troubleshooting.................. 597
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts................................................ 599
Alert Level Definitions................................................ 601
Comparator Annunciations......................................... 602
Reversionary Sensor Annunciations............................. 603
Aircraft Alerts............................................................ 604
xii
Message Advisory Alerts............................................. 607
Voice Alerts............................................................... 608
System Annunciations................................................ 610
System Message Advisories........................................ 613
Flight Plan Import/Export Messages............................ 625
Pilot Profile Import/Export Messages........................... 625
ADS-B Status Page Messages...................................... 626
Connext Weather Messages........................................ 627
Garmin AFCS Alerts.................................................... 628
Garmin AFCS Condition/Stall Alert............................... 629
Terrain-SVT Alerts and Annunciations.......................... 630
TAWS-B System Status Annunciations.......................... 632
TAS System Annunciations.......................................... 633
ADS-B Traffic Annunciations........................................ 634
GDL 69A SXM........................................................... 635
SurfaceWatch Annunciations...................................... 635
Database Management................................................... 637
Loading Updated Databases....................................... 637
Magnetic Field Variation Database Update................... 646
Garmin Aviation Glossary............................................... 649
Frequently Asked Questions........................................... 659
Map Symbols.................................................................... 663
Terrain Avoidance Colors and Symbols......................... 666
INDEX
Index ................................................................................... I-1
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GDU 1250A Multi Function Display (MFD)
• GTX 335/345 Mode S Transponder
• GCU 479 Display Controller
• GMC 707 AFCS Control Unit
• GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit
• GSA 81 AFCS Pitch and Roll Servos
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit
• GSM 86 Servo Gearboxes
• GMA 350/350c Audio Panel with Integrated
Marker Beacon Receiver
• GTA 82 Pitch Trim Adapter
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GTP 59 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Probe
EIS
• GDU 1250A Primary Flight Display (PFD)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cirrus Perspective® Integrated Avionics by Garmin presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation,
communication, and identification information to the pilot through large-format displays. The system consists of
the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GSU 75 Air Data/Attitude and Heading Reference
System (ADAHRS)
The Garmin Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides the flight director (FD), autopilot (AP), yaw
damper (YD - optional), and manual electric trim (MET) functions. Refer to the AFCS section for more information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-1 shows interactions between the LRUs. Additional/optional equipment are also shown in Figure 1-1.
The system is capable of interfacing with the following optional equipment:
• GDU 1050A Primary Flight Display (optional)
• GDU 1050A Multi Function Display (optional)
• GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver (optional)
AFCS
• Flight Stream 510 Bluetooth® Wireless Gateway
(optional)
• GDL 69A SXM Satellite Data Link Receiver
(optional)
• GSA 80 AFCS Yaw Servo (optional)
• GDL 59 Data Link (optional)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
The optional Flight Stream 510 device provides a Bluetooth® connection between the system and a mobile
device. GPS, ADAHRS, ADS-B, traffic, Sirius XM audio, and FIS-B weather data can then be shared with the
mobile device, and flight plans can be transferred to or from the mobile device. Also, database updates may also
be performed using the Flight Stream 510 WiFi link.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 GARMIN LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS (LRU)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GDU 1250A/1050A (1) – This unit is configured as a PFD that features a 12 or 10.4-inch LCD with 1024 x
768 resolution. The unit installed on the left/pilot side is designated as the PFD. This unit communicates with
the GDU 1250A/1050A (MFD), and with the on-side GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit through a High-Speed
Data Bus (HSDB) connection.
EIS
• GDU 1250A/1050A (1) – This unit is configured as a MFD that features a 12 or 10.4-inch LCD with 1024 x
768 resolution. The unit installed on the right/copilot side is designated as MFD. This unit communicates with
the GDU 1250A/1050A (PFD), and with the on-side GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit through a High-Speed
Data Bus (HSDB) connection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GIA 63W (2) – The Integrated Avionics Units (IAU) function as the main communication hub, linking all LRUs
with the PFD. Each GIA 63W contains a GPS Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS) receiver, VHF COM/
NAV/GS receivers, a flight director and system integration microprocessors. Each GIA 63W is paired with the
on-side display via an HSDB connection. The GIA 63Ws are not paired and do not communicate with each
other directly.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GEA 71 (1) – Receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This unit communicates
with both GIA 63Ws using an RS-485 digital interface.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GSU 75 (1 or 2) – Processes data from the pitot/static system as well as the OAT probe to provide pressure
altitude, airspeed, vertical speed and OAT information to the system. This unit also provides aircraft attitude
and heading information via ARINC 429 to the PFD, MFD, and GIA 63W. The GSU 75 contains advanced
sensors (including accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the GMU 44 to obtain magnetic field
information, and with the GIA 63W to obtain GPS information. ADAHRS modes of operation are discussed
later in this document.
AFCS
• GMU 44 (1 or 2) – The Magnetometer measures local magnetic field and sends the data to the GRS 77 for
processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the GRS 77 and
communicates with the GRS 77, using an RS-485 digital interface.
• GMA 350 or GMA 350c (1) – The Audio Panel integrates NAV/COM audio, intercom, telephone, and marker
beacon controls (refer to the Audio Panel & CNS Section). This unit communicates with both GIA 63Ws, using
an RS-232 digital interface.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GTX 335R/345R (1) – Solid-state transponders that provide Modes A, C, S and ADS-B capability. The optional
GTX 345R also provides ADS-B In/Out. The transponder can be controlled from the PFD. The transponder
communicates with the both GIA 63Ws through an RS-232 digital interface.
APPENDICES
• GTS 800 (1) (optional) – The GTS 800 provides real-time traffic information to the MFD (and, indirectly, to the
inset map of the PFD). The GTS 800 communicates with the MFD with an HSDB connection. The GTS 800
also has an analog audio connection to the Audio Panel.
INDEX
• GDL 69A SXM (1) (optional) – The Data Link Satellite Radio Receiver provides weather information to the MFD
(and, indirectly, to the inset map of the PFD) as well as digital audio entertainment. The unit communicates
with the MFD via an HSDB connection. A subscription to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio and/or SiriusXM Weather
service is required to enable the GDL 69A SXM capabilities.
2
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GDL 59 (1) (optional) – The GDL 59 is a Wi-Fi data link transceiver. Operation is performed on the MFD. The
GDL 59 is connected to the GDL 69 (if installed) or to the MFD using HSDB. The GDL 59 also includes analog
connections to the audio panel.
• GSR 56 (1) (optional) – The Iridium Transceiver provides telephone voice communication by means of pilot
and copilot headsets. The unit can also send and receive data over the Iridium satellite network. The GSR 56 is
connected to the optional GDL 59 with an RS-232 digital interface and analog audio connections. Otherwise,
the GSR 56 is connected the #1 GIA 63W with an RS-232 digital interface, with analog connections to the audio
panel.
EIS
• GCU 479 (1) – Provides the Flight Management System (FMS), navigation radio (NAV), communication radio
(COM), transponder (XPDR), and course (CRS) controls for the system through an RS-232 digital interface.
• GMC 707 (1) – Provides the controls for the Garmin AFCS through an RS-232 digital interface allowing
communication with the PFD and MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GTP 59 (1 or 2) – The Temperature Probe provides Outside Air Temperature (OAT) data to the primary GDC
74A.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GSA 80 (1), GSA 81 (2), and GSM 86 (3) (optional) – The GSA 80 servo is used for the automatic control of
yaw, while the GSA 81 servos are used for the automatic control of pitch and roll. These units interface with
each GIA 63W. The GSM 86 servo gearbox is responsible for transferring the output torque of the GSA 80/81
servo actuator to the mechanical flight-control surface linkage.
• GTA 82 (1) – The Pitch Trim Adapter takes input from the trim switches, GIA 63W and GSA 81 to control the
DC motor to drive the aircraft trim system.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Flight Stream 510 (1) (optional) – Provides wireless Bluetooth connectivity between a compatible tablet/mobile
device and the avionics system. It is inserted into an MFD Secure Digital (SD) card slot.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GMC 707
(AFCS
Controller)
#1
GDU 1250A
or
GDU 1050A
(PFD)
GSR 56
(Iridium
Transceiver)
GDL 69A SXM
(XM Weather/
Audio Datalink)
GDL 59
(Data Link)
GTS 800
(TAS)
EIS
GCU 479
(Display
Controller)
#2
GDU 1250A
or
GDU 1050A
(MFD)
FS 510
Enhanced
Vision System
(SD Card
Bluetooth
Link)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GMA 350/350c
(Audio Panel)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
#1 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
#1 GMA 44
(Magnetometer)
#2 GMA 44
(Magnetometer)
#1 GSU 75
(ADAHRS)
#2 GSU 75
(ADAHRS)
GTX 335R
Or
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VHF COM
GPS/SBAS
VOR/LOC
G/S
AFCS
Flight
Director
AFCS Mode
Logic
Servo Logic
#2 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
VHF COM
GTX 345R
(Transponder)
GPS/SBAS
GEA 71 (Engine &
Airframe I/F)
G/S
VOR/LOC
Flight
Director
#1 GSA 81 (Pitch)
AFCS Mode
Logic
#2 GSA 81 (Roll)
Servo Logic
#3 GSA 80 (Yaw)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
#4 GTA 82 (PTrim)
RDM
(Data Logger)
KN-63
(DME)
KR-87
(ADF)
APPENDICES
Standby Flight
Instruments
CO Guardian
Stormscope
INDEX
Garmin Equipment
Non-Garmin Equipment
Optional
Garmin Equipment
Optional
Non-Garmin Equipment
Figure 1-1 Perspective System
4
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.2 SYSTEM CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Audio Panel (GMA 350) and AFCS controls (GMC 707) are described in the Audio Panel & CNS
and AFCS sections respectively.
The system controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels, Display Controller, AFCS Control Unit and audio
panel. The controls for the PFD and MFD are discussed within the following pages of this section.
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
EIS
PFD
1
2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4
13
MFD
15
16
5
AFCS
6
11
7
10
8
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
14
12
APPENDICES
9
13
Figure 1-2 PFD & MFD Controls
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
5
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Toggles the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this
key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
2
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency
field as a percentage. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch On/Off in COM mode.
3
Dual COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small
knob for kHz). Press to switch the cyan tuning arrow
between COM1 and COM2.
4
BARO Knob – Sets the altimeter barometric pressure. Press to enter standard pressure (29.92).
5
Joystick – Changes the map range when rotated. Activates the map pointer when pressed. Moves the
Quick Select Box or cursor on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD when joystick is moved left, right,
up, or down.
6
MENU Key – Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access additional
features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
PROC Key – Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs) and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan. If a flight plan is used, available procedures for the departure and/or
arrival airport are automatically suggested. These procedures can then be loaded into the active flight plan.
If a flight plan is not used, both the desired airport and the desired procedure may be selected.
8
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
9
Dual FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor
ON and OFF. When the cursor is ON, data may be entered in the applicable window by turning the small
and large knobs. The large knob moves the cursor on the page, while the small knob selects individual
characters for the highlighted cursor location.
10
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus.
11
FPL Key – Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan.
12
Direct-to Key ( ) – Allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the
selected destination (the destination is either specified by the identifier, chosen from the active route, or
taken from the map pointer position).
13
Bezel Keys – Used to select the appropriate softkey to access additional functionality.
14
Dual NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to switch the cyan tuning arrow
between NAV1 and NAV2.
15
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to toggle the Morse code identifier audio ON
and OFF. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
16
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Toggles the standby and active NAV frequencies.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following list provides an overview of the controls located on the PFD and MFD bezel (see Figure 1-2).
6
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DISPLAY CONTROLLER
The additional controls for the PFD and MFD are located on the Display Controller (GCU 479). The following
list provides an overview of the controls located on the Display Controller:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
11
12
23
EIS
13
14
15
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
22
16
21
17
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
18
20
19
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-3 Display Controller (GCU 479)
3
FPL Key – Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan, or for
accessing stored flight plans.
4
MENU Key – Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access additional
features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
5
PROC Key – Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs) and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan. If a flight plan is used, available procedures for the departure and/or
arrival airport are automatically suggested. Theses procedures can then be loaded into the active flight
plan. If a flight plan is not used, both the desired airport and the desired procedure may be selected.
6
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
7
Dual FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob for the MFD. Press the FMS Knob to turn the
selection cursor ON and OFF. When the cursor is ON, data may be entered in the applicable window by
turning the small and large knobs. The large knob moves the cursor on the page, while the small knob
selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Direct-to Key ( ) – Allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the
selected destination (the destination is either specified by the identifier, chosen from the active route, or
taken from the map pointer position).
APPENDICES
2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus.
AFCS
1
7
8
COM Key – Selects/deselects COM tuning mode for the COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob. When pressed, a
blue annunciator above the key illuminates indicating COM tuning mode is active.
9
NAV Key – Selects/deselects NAV tuning mode for the COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob. When pressed, a blue
annunciator above the key illuminates indicating NAV tuning mode is active.
10
CRS Key – Selects/deselects CRS mode for the COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob. When pressed, a blue
annunciator above the key illuminates indicating CRS mode is active.
11
XPDR Key – Selects/deselects XPDR mode for the COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob. When pressed, a blue
annunciator above the key illuminates indicating XPDR mode is active.
12
COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob – Acts as follows:
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM Tuning Mode: Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob
for kHz). Press to switch the cyan tuning arrow
between COM1 and COM2.
NAV Tuning Mode: Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to switch the cyan tuning arrow
between NAV1 and NAV2.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CRS Mode: Sets the selected course on the HSI when the VOR1, VOR2, or OBS/SUSP mode is selected.
Pressing this knob centers the CDI on the currently selected VOR. The selected course provides course
reference to the flight director when operating in Navigation and Approach modes.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
XPDR Mode: Selects the transponder code.
13
Frequency Transfer Key (EMERG) – Transfers between active and standby COM or NAV tuning frequencies.
Selects/deselects NAV tuning mode. Press and hold 2 seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5
MHz) automatically into the active frequency field.
14
IDENT Key – Activates transponder IDENT function. Annunciator light above the key is lit while Ident is
active.
15
VOL Knob – Controls COM/NAV audio volume level. Volume level is shown in the COM/NAV frequency
field as a percentage. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch On/Off in COM mode, or NAV ID On/Off
in NAV mode.
16
Plus (+) Minus (-) Key – Toggles a (+) or (-) character.
17
BKSP Key – Moves the cursor back one character space.
18
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus.
19
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
20
Alphabetic Keys – Allow the user to enter data quickly, without having to select individual characters
with the FMS Knob. When the Quick Select Box is shown on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD,
alphanumeric keys can be used to enter data into the Quick Select Box area.
21
Numeric Keys – Blue Mode: Allow the user to enter numeric data quickly in COM, NAV, and XPDR fields.
White Mode: Allow the user to enter numeric data quickly in FMS fields, without having to select individual
numbers with the FMS Knob.
8
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
White mode is enabled for the following conditions:
FMS cursor is active on any MFD page
•
Map pointer is active on any MFD map
•
Flight Plan page, Weight and Balance page, Fuel Initialization page, or Checklist page are displayed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
•
Blue mode is enabled for the following conditions:
•
COM, NAV, or XPDR tuning mode is selected, and no white mode conditions are active
Home Key – Displays the Navigation Map Page.
23
Joystick – Changes the map range when rotated. Activates the map pointer when pressed. Moves the
Quick Select Box or cursor on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD when joystick is moved left, right,
up, or down.
EIS
22
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SECURE DIGITAL CARDS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating the aviation databases.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Ensure that the system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top right portion of the display bezels.
Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for aviation database and system
software updates as well as terrain database storage. Also, flight plans may be imported or exported from an
SD card in the MFD.
Installing and Removing an SD card
PFD
AFCS
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel. To remove, gently press on the SD card to release the
spring latch and eject the card.
MFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
SD Card Slots
INDEX
Figure 1-4 Display Bezel SD Card Slots
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
9
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selection softkeys are located along the bottom of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey
level previously selected. The bezel keys below the softkey labels can be used to select the appropriate softkey.
There are three types of softkeys. One selects a simple on/off state, indicated by an annunciator on the softkey
label displayed as green (on) or gray (off). The next type of softkey selects among several options, indicated by
the softkey label changing (with the exception of the Map Range keys) to reflect the name of the chosen option.
The last type of softkey, when pressed displays another set of softkeys available for the selected function. Also,
these softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity. When a softkey function is disabled,
the softkey label is subdued (dimmed)
Softkey On Softkey Subdued
Softkey Names
(displayed)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (press)
Figure 1-5 Softkeys (First-Level PFD Configuration)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PFD SOFTKEYS
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PFD softkeys provide control over the PFD display and some flight management functions, including
GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic, and weather (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a Back Softkey which can be
pressed to return to the previous level. If messages remain after acknowledgement, the Alerts Softkey is black
on white. The Alerts Softkey is visible in all softkey levels. For the top level softkeys and the transponder
(XPDR) levels, the Ident Softkey remains visible.
Figure 1-6 PFD Map/HSI Softkeys
10
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 1-7 PFD Opt Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 1-8 XPDR Softkeys
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
11
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Description
Map/HSI
Layout
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Off
Inset Map
HSI Map
TFC Map
Wx LGND
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Detail
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic
Topo
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Rel Ter
NEXRAD
METAR
Lightning
AFCS
LTNG Off
Datalink
STRMSCP
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TFC Map
PFD Opt
SVT
Displays XM NEXRAD weather and coverage on PFD Map (subscription
optional)
Displays METAR information on Inset Map (subscription optional)
Adds/removes the display of SiriusXM or Connext lightning information
(based on data link weather source selection) on the PFD Map.
Disables lightning function on PFD Map. The softkey annunciator is green
when the lightning function is off.
Selects the data link weather source for the PFD Map
Adds or removes the display of Stormscope information on the PFD Map.
The softkey annunciator is green when the function is on.
Replaces the PFD Map with a dedicated traffic display.
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD options.
Displays additional SVT overlay softkeys
Displays Pathway Boxes on the Synthetic Vision Display.
Enables synthetic terrain depiction.
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line.
Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the
current aircraft position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport
is within approximately 9 nm.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Pathways
Terrain
HDG LBL
APT Sign
Displays the PFD Map display settings softkeys.
Displays the PFD Map selection softkeys.
Removes the PFD map from display (Inset, HSI, or Traffic)
Displays the Inset Map
Displays the HSI Map
Replaces the PFD Map with a dedicated traffic display.
Displays/removes the name of the selected data link weather provider
(SiriusXM, Connext) and the weather product icon and age box (for
enabled weather products).
Selects desired amount of map detail:
All (No Declutter): All map features visible
Detail 3: Declutters land data
Detail 2: Declutters land and SUA data
Detail 1: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
Displays traffic information on PFD Map.
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and
elevation scale on PFD Map
Displays relative terrain information on the PFD Map
12
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Description
AOA
Wind
DME
Bearing 1
ADC
AHRS
AHRS 1
AHRS 2
Bearing 2
Meters
IN
HPA
OBS
Standby
On
ALT
Activates transponder (transponder replies to identification interrogations).
Altitude Reporting Mode (transponder replies to identification and altitude
interrogations).
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Displays the transponder selection softkeys.
Selects transponder Standby Mode (transponder does not reply to any
interrogations).
APPENDICES
XPDR
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
CDI
DME
AFCS
STD Baro
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ALT Units
Displays ADC selection softkeys.
Selects the #1 ADC.
Selects the #2 ADC. (optional)
Displays the AHRS selection softkeys.
Selects the #1 AHRS.
Selects the #2 AHRS. (optional)
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through NAV1, NAV2, GPS/
waypoint ID and GPS-derived distance, and Off. (optional)
Displays softkeys to select altitude unit parameters.
When enabled, displays altimeter in meters.
Press to display the BARO setting as inches of mercury
Press to display the BARO setting as hectopacals.
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric units are
selected)
Selects OBS mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with
active leg). When OBS is on, the softkey annunciator is green.
Cycles through FMS, NAV1, and NAV2 navigation modes on the CDI.
Displays the DME Tuning Window, allowing tuning and selection of the
DME (optional).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ADC 1
ADC 2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Sensors
EIS
Off
Option 1
Option 2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selects the display mode of the AOA Indicator (optional)
Off: Disables the display of the AOA Indicator on the PFD.
Auto: Enables automatic display of the AOA Indicator on the PFD.
On: Enables the display of the AOA Indicator on the PFD.
Displays the wind option softkeys
Wind information not displayed.
Wind direction arrow with direction and speed.
Wind direction arrows with headwind and crosswind components
Displays DME Information Window
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through NAV1, NAV2, GPS/
waypoint ID and GPS-derived distance, and Off.
Displays the sensor selection softkeys.
13
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Description
VFR
Code
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
0-7
Ident
BKSP
EIS
Ident
Tmr/Ref
Nearest
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in the U.S.A. only)
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7.
Use numbers to enter code.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen.
Removes numbers entered, one at a time.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen.
Displays Timer/References Window.
Displays Nearest Airports Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MFD softkeys vary depending on the page selected. EIS and Navigation Map Page (default MFD page)
softkeys are described here. Each softkey sublevel has a Back Softkey which can be pressed to return to the
previous level.
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
limitations. This option is only available on SR22 or SR22T models.
14
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
(Optional)
(Optional)
Or
(Optional)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(Optional)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-9 MFD Navigation Map Page Softkeys
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
15
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3 Description
Engine
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Anti-Ice
Left
Auto
Right
EIS
DCLTR
Assist
Fuel-W&B
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Full
Tabs
Undo
W&B
Displays EIS - Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; select again to exit page
(see the EIS Section for more information)
Displays Anti-Ice Softkeys
Selects manual mode and opens the left tank valve and closes the right tank valve.
Selects Auto Tank Mode.
Selects manual mode and opens the right tank valve and closes the left tank valve.
Declutters the Engine Temperatures Box removing bars and temperatures readouts.
Identifies temperature peaks
Displays Initial Usable Fuel Page and softkewys.
Resets initial usable fuel to full.
Resets initial usable fuel to tabs.
Rejects the last entry and resets to the previous entry.
Saves the usable fuel amount shown on the Initial Usable Fuel Page and displays the
Weight and Balance Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Opt
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic
Inset
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TER
INDEX
APPENDICES
AWY
Displays traffic information on Navigation Map Page.
Displays inset window second level softkeys.
Removes the inset window from Navigation Map Page.
Off
FPL PROG Displays Flight Plan Progress window.
Displays VSD inset on Navigation Map Page. The softkey annunciator is green when
VSD
the VSD is displayed.
Selects VSD profile information to display:
VSD
Auto: Automatically displays either VSD profile information for active flight plan
information or along current track with no active flight plan.
FPL: Displays VSD profile information for active flight plan.
TRK: Displays VSD profile information along current track.
Displays terrain on the map; cycles through the following:
Off: No terrain information shown on MFD Map.
Topo: Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and elevation
scale on MFD Map.
REL: Displays relative terrain information on the MFD Map.
Displays airways on the map; cycles through the following:
Off: No airways are displayed.
On: All airways are displayed.
LO: Only low altitude airways are displayed.
HI: Only high altitude airways are displayed.
16
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 2
XM LTNG
or
DL LTNG
DONE
EXIT
EMERGCY
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Checklist
AFCS
DP
STAR
APR
WX
NOTAM
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CHRT Opt
Show Map
Info
Displays Connext Weather lightning information on the Navigation Map Page
(optional)
Displays METAR information on Inset Map (subscription optional).
Displays legends for the displayed XM Weather products (optional).
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through the following levels:
Detail All: All map features visible.
Detail-3: Declutters land data.
Detail-2: Declutters land and SUA data.
Detail-1: Removes everything except for the active flight plan.
When available, displays optional airport and terminal procedure charts.
Displays chart display settings softkeys.
Displays the WPT–Airport Information page.
Displays airport information:
Info 1: Displays Airport Information Page
Info 2: Displays Airport Directory Page
Displays departure procedure chart.
Displays standard terminal arrival procedure chart.
Displays approach procedure chart.
Displays airport weather information chart.
Displays NOTAM information for selected airport, when available.
When available, displays optional checklists.
Selects the highlighted checklist item.
Returns to the top-level softkeys.
Immediately accesses the emergency procedures.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Charts
Displays Garmin Connext radar precipitation and radar coverage information
(optional)
Displays XM lightning information on Navigation Map Page (optional).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Detail
Displays Stormscope information on Navigation Map Page (optional).
Displays XM NEXRAD weather and coverage on Navigation Map Page (optional).
EIS
METAR
Legend
Level 3 Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
STRMSCP
NEXRAD
or
PRECIP
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
17
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.3 SYSTEM POWER-UP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for AHRS initialization bank angle limitations.
NOTE: See the Appendices for additional information regarding system-specific annunciations and alerts.
NOTE: See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for specific procedures concerning avionics power
EIS
application and emergency power supply operation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical busses.
The PFD, MFD and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features that
exercise the processor, system memory, external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation.
During system initialization, test annunciations appear, as shown in Figure 1-14. All system annunciations
should disappear typically within one minute of power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also become
momentarily illuminated on the audio panels, the control units and the display bezels.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
On the PFD, the AHRS initializes and displays ‘AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level’. The AHRS should display
valid attitude and heading fields typically within one minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself both while
taxiing and during level flight.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the MFD powers up (Figure 1-15), the MFD Power-up Page shows the following information:
• System version
• Navigation database name and expiration date
• Copyright
• Airport Directory name and expiration date
• Land database name and version
• ChartView name and expiration date
• Safe Taxi database and expiration date
• FliteCharts name and expiration date
• Terrain database name and version
• IFR/VFR Charts name and expiration date
• Obstacle database name and expiration date
• Selected Crew Profile
Current database information includes the valid operating dates, cycle number and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue. Pressing the ENT Key acknowledges this information and the Navigation Map Page is displayed upon
pressing the key a second time. When the system has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to determine a
position, the aircraft’s current position is shown on the Navigation Map Page.
Figure 1-10 PFD Initialization
18
Figure 1-11 MFD Power-up Page
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.4 SYSTEM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The displays are connected together via a single Ethernet bus, thus allowing for high-speed communication.
As shown in Figure 1-1, each IAU is connected to the on-side display. This section discusses the normal and
reversionary modes of operation as well as the various AHRS modes of the system.
DISPLAY OPERATION
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD, or from any display
EIS
operating in reversionary mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see
the Flight Management Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
(EIS; see the EIS Section). The PFD offers control for COM frequency selection and the MFD offers control for
NAV frequency selection. The Display Controller offers control for both COM and NAV frequency selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-12 Normal Operation
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
19
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the event of a display failure, the system automatically switches to reversionary (backup) mode. In
Reversionary Mode, all essential flight information from the PFD is combined with the EIS and presented on
the display operating in Reversionary Mode. EIS operation while in Reversionary Mode is discussed in the EIS
Section. As when the PFD is operating normally, windows for flight planning, nearest airports, and procedures
are available. The Inset Map is moved to the right side of the display.
EIS
If a display fails, the appropriate IAU-display Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the NAV and COM functions provided to
the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup
paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is
completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
If the system fails to detect a display problem, Reversionary Mode may be manually activated by pressing the
red DISPLAY BACKUP Button. Pressing this button again deactivates Reversionary Mode.
NAV1 and COM1 (provided by the
failed PFD) Flagged Invalid
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DISPLAY BACKUP Button
Manually Activates/Deactivates
Reversionary Mode on Both Displays
APPENDICES
Figure 1-13 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)
NOTE: The system alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to the Appendices for
INDEX
further information regarding system-specific alerts.
20
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red or amber ‘X’ is typically displayed over the instrument
experiencing failed data (Figure 1-14 displays failure annunciations with responsible LRUs). The system alerts
the pilot when the LRUs are using backup paths. Upon power-up, certain instruments remain invalid as
equipment begins to initialize. All instruments should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any
instrument remains flagged, the system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
NOTE: For a detailed description of all annunciations and alerts, refer to Appendix A. Refer to the Pilot’s
Operating Handbook (POH) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
EIS
GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GSU 75
ADAHRS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
or
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Unit
GSU 75 ADAHRS
or
GMU 44
Magnetometer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
GTX 335/345 Transponder or
GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units
AFCS
GSU 75
ADAHRS
Figure 1-14 System Failure Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
21
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The System Status Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs.
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green check marks
and failed LRUs are indicated by red “X”s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a Cirrus service center or Garmin
dealer informed.
AFCS
Figure 1-15 Example AUX - System Status Page
The LRU and ARFRM softkeys on the System Status Page select the applicable list (LRU Info or Airframe
window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information within the selected window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the MFD1 DB Softkey (label background changes to grey indicting the softkey is selected) places
the cursor in the Database window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information for the MFD.
Pressing the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD 1 database information is now
displayed in the Database window.
APPENDICES
The STBY DB Softkey, when available on the System Status Page, makes the standby navigation database
become the active navigation database on the next power cycle. Refer to the Database Management section in
the Appendices for more information.
INDEX
The ANN TEST Softkey, when enabled, causes the system to issue a continuous double chime audio alert.
In addition, the annunciator lights on the GMC 707 and GCU 479 controllers illuminate. To silence the audio
alert and extinguish the annunciator lights, press the ANN TEST Softkey again.
22
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADAHRS OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In addition to using internal sensors, the GSU 75 ADAHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and
air data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the ADAHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic
field measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the ADAHRS uses air
data information for attitude determination. Eight ADAHRS modes of operation are available (see Table 1-1)
and depend upon the combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor
inputs is communicated to the pilot by system messages.
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering in reversionary mode can degrade AHRS accuracy.
Air Data
Available
ADAHRS Normal
Yes
Yes
Yes
ADAHRS no-Air Data
Yes
Yes
No
ADAHRS no-GPS
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
ADAHRS no-Mag Data
Yes
No
Yes
ADAHRS no-Mag/no-Air Data
Yes
No
No
ADAHRS coast-on-gyros until
invalid
No
Yes
No
ADAHRS no-Mag/coast-on-gyros
until invalid
No
Valid Pitch/Roll/Heading.
Valid Pitch/Roll.
Heading will coast-on-gyros
until it becomes invalid.
Valid Pitch/Roll.
Heading Invalid.
AFCS
No
Attitude
Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ADAHRS no-GPS/no-Mag
Condition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Mag Data
Available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS Data
Available
EIS
ADAHRS Mode
No
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Invalid Pitch/Roll/Heading.
No
Table 1-1 ADAHRS Operation
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
APPENDICES
The ADAHRS corrects for shifts and variations in the Earth’s magnetic field by applying the Magnetic Field
Variation Database. The Magnetic Field Variation Database is derived from the International Geomagnetic
Reference Field (IGRF). The IGRF is a mathematical model that describes the Earth’s main magnetic field and
its annual rate of change. The database is updated approximately every five years. See the Appendices for
information on updating the Magnetic Field Variation Database. The system will prompt the pilot on startup
when an update is available. Failure to update this database could lead to erroneous heading information being
displayed to the pilot.
23
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Internal system checking is performed to ensure both GPS receivers are providing accurate data to the PFD.
In some circumstances, both GPS receivers may be providing accurate data, but one receiver may be providing
a better GPS solution than the other receiver. In this case the GPS receiver producing the better solution
is automatically coupled to the PFD. “BOTH ON GPS 1” or “BOTH ON GPS 2” are then displayed in the
Reversionary Sensor Window (see Appendix A) indicating which GPS receiver is being used. Both GPS receivers
are still functioning properly, but one receiver is performing better than the other at that particular time.
EIS
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has
acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired an SBAS (Satellite Based
Augmentation System) signal. While the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by
obstructions causing one GPS receiver to have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning
the aircraft may result in one of the GPS receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Each GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the specified
receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the AUX - GPS Status Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the sensor annunciation persists, check for a system failure message in the Messages Window on the PFD.
If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2.
Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the Display Controller to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.6 for
information on navigating MFD page groups).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select AUX - GPS Status Page.
3) Press the desired GPS Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
24
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Satellite Signal
Information
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
GPS Receiver
Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Satellite
Signal
Strength
Bars
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-16 GPS Status Page
AFCS
The GPS Status Page provides the following information:
• Satellite constellation diagram
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a sky view diagram. The sky view is
always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle representing
45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.
APPENDICES
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
• Satellite signal information status
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is calculated using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution
of Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a
circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of laying.
EPU is a statistical error indication and not an actual error measurement.
25
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to
each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM,
measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and
vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are displayed
below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
• GPS receiver status
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active
GPS receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is
in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data
(collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be
in view. ACQUIRING is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired
for computing a solution.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. SBAS (Satellite-Based Augmentation System)
indicates INACTIVE. When acquisition is complete, the solution status indicates 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS
indicates ACTIVE.
• RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) Prediction (RAIM Softkey is pressed)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected approach
may be outside the SBAS coverage area and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for the intended
approach.
AFCS
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
system automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the messages “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP”. If RAIM is not available
when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
APPENDICES
Predicting RAIM availability
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ field is highlighted.
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window.
26
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Enter the desired waypoint:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key.
Refer to Section 1.6 for instructions on entering alphanumeric data into the system.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
a) Use the FMS Knob to scroll to the Most Recent Waypoints List.
b) Use the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint in the list and press the ENT Key. The system
automatically fills in the identifier, facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
EIS
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one of
the following is displayed:
• ‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• ‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM Not Available’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
Predicting RAIM availability at present position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ field is highlighted.
4) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
5) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
9) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one of
the following is displayed:
• ‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
APPENDICES
• ‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM Not Available’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
27
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• SBAS Selection (SBAS Softkey is pressed)
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the WAAS, EGNOS, or MSAS
coverage area, it may be desirable to disable the reception of the applicable SBAS signal (although it is not
recommended). When disabled, the SBAS field in the GPS Status box indicates Disabled. There may be a
small delay for the GPS Status box to be updated upon WAAS, EGNOS, and MSAS enabling/disabling.
Disabling WAAS, EGNOS or MSAS
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.
EIS
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired SBAS system.
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-17 Enable/Disable SBAS
AFCS
• GPS Satellite Signal Strengths
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed
for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for WAAS) below each
bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar appearance:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Cyan bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
INDEX
APPENDICES
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
28
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.5 ACCESSING SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY
MENUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system has a dedicated MENU Key that when pressed displays a context-sensitive list of options. This
options list allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to
the currently displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to
additional submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘No Options’ when
there are no additional features or settings for the window/page selected.
EIS
Navigating a menu:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar always appears to the right of the
window/box when the option list is longer than the window/box).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
4) Press the CLR Key or FMS Knob to remove the menu and cancel the operation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Options for FPL Window
No Options for Nearest Intersections
Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-18 Page Menu Examples
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
29
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PAGE GROUPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Information on the MFD is presented on pages which are grouped according to function. The page group and
active page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen, below the Navigation Status Box. In the bottom
right corner of the screen, the page group tabs are displayed along the bottom. The titles of pages available in
the group are displayed in a list above the page groups. The current page group and current page within the
group are shown in cyan. For some of these pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information, XM, Procedure
Loading), the active title of the page changes while the page name in the list remains the same.
EIS
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
Page Group
Active Page Title
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pages in
Current
Group
Page Groups
Figure 1-19 Page Title and Page Groups
AFCS
The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary depending
on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of page groups; continue turning the large FMS Knob until the
desired page group is selected
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired page within a specific page group.
INDEX
APPENDICES
There are also several pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information and XM pages) selected first from
within a main page group with the FMS Knob, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page (or
from the page menu). In this case, the page remains set to the selected page until a different page softkey is
selected, even if a different page group is selected.
30
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Page Group
MAP (Map Page Group)
Pages within Page Group
• Navigation Map
• Traffic Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Stormscope (optional)
• Weather Data Link (service optional)
WPT (Waypoint Page Group)
• Terrain Proximity/Terrain-SVT (optional)/ TAWS-B (optional)
• Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages
- Airport Information (Info 1 Softkey)
EIS
- Airport Directory Information (Info 2 Softkey)
- Departure Information (DP Softkey)
- Arrival Information (STAR Softkey)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Approach Information (APR Softkey)
- Weather Information (optional) (WX Softkey)
• Intersection Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• NDB Information
• VOR Information
• VRP Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUX (Auxiliary Page Group)
• User Waypoint Information
• Weight and Balance
• Trip Planning
• Utility
• GPS Status
• System Setup 1/2
AFCS
• SiriusXM Pages (optional)
- XM Radio (Radio Softkey)
- XM Information (Info Softkey)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Satellite Phone Pages (optional)
- Telephone (TEL Softkey)
- Text Messaging (SMS Softkey)
APPENDICES
• Maintenance WiFi Setup
• Connext Page (optional)
• System Status
• Video (optional)
INDEX
• ADS-B Status
• Connext Setup
• Databases
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
31
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Page Group
FPL (Flight Plan Page Group)
NRST (Nearest Page Group)
Pages within Page Group
• Active Flight Plan
- Wide View, Narrow View (View Softkey)
• Flight Plan Catalog
- Stored Flight Plan (via New Softkey)
• Nearest Airports
• Nearest Intersections
• Nearest NDB
EIS
• Nearest VOR
• Nearest VRP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Nearest User WPTS
• Nearest Frequencies
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EIS (Engine Instruments Page Group)
• Nearest Airspaces
• Engine
- Initial Usable Fuel (Fuel-W&B Softkey)
Table 1-2 Page Groups and Pages
PROCEDURE PAGES (PROC)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Procedure Pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key on the Display
Controller. A menu is initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate
Procedure Loading Page is opened. Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure pages
• Departure Loading
• Arrival Loading
AFCS
• Approach Loading
SYSTEM SETTINGS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
System settings are managed from the System Setup Pages. The following settings can be changed:
• Display Units
• CDI scaling for GPS navigation source
(see Flight Instruments Section)
• Baro Transition Alerts
(see Flight Instruments Section)
• COM channel spacing
(see Audio Panel and CNS Section)
• Airspace Alerts
(see Flight Management Section)
• Criteria for displaying nearest airports
(see Flight Management Section)
• SurfaceWatch Alerts
(see Additional Features Section)
• Electronic Stability & Protection enable/disable
(see Additional Features Section) (optional)
• MFD Navigation Data Bar Fields
(see Flight Management Section)
• Page Navigation Settings
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Time Format and Offset
32
• Audio Alert Voice
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Restoring system setup defaults:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the Defaults Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Highlight ‘Restore Defaults’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-20 AUX - System Setup Pages
DATE/TIME
AFCS
The system obtains the current Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) date and time directly from the GPS
satellite signals (shown on the AUX - GPS Status Page). System time (displayed in the lower right corner of
the PFD) can be displayed in three formats: local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC. Local time is set by adding/
subtracting an offset (hours:minutes) to/from UTC.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 1-21 System Time (Local 24-hr Format)
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
33
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Configuring the system time:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page using the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. The ‘Time
Offset’ field is highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-22 Date/Time Settings (AUX - System Setup 1 Page)
CREW PROFILES
AFCS
System settings may be saved under a crew profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected crew
profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Splash Screen. The system can store up to 25 profiles; the currently
active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown at the top of
the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Crew Profile’. From here, crew profiles may be created, selected,
renamed, or deleted. Crew profiles may also be exported from the system to an SD card, or imported from
an SD card into the system.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Creating a profile:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup 1 or 2 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Create’ in the Crew Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Crew profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
INDEX
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or other previously created profile settings.
34
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘Create’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Create & Activate’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
9) To cancel the process, select ‘Cancel’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
Selecting an active profile:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Crew Profile Box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the crew profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The system loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
Renaming a profile:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Rename’ in the Crew Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘Rename’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting a profile:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete’ in the Crew Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) With ‘Delete’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
35
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Importing a profile from an SD card:
1) Insert an SD card containing the crew profile(s) into the top card slot on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
3) Select the Import Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Import Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) The system displays the Crew Profile Importing window with ‘Import’ highlighted. Turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight the ‘Profile Name’ field, then scroll to the desired profile name with the large and small FMS Knobs,
then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with ‘Import’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) If the imported profile name is the same as an existing profile on the system, the system displays an ‘Overwrite
existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace profile on the system with the profile
imported from the SD card, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the
Crew Profile Importing window.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) If successful, the system displays ‘Crew profile import succeeded.’ in the window below. With ‘OK’ highlighted,
press the ENT or CLR Keys or press the FMS Knob to return to the AUX - System Setup Page. The imported
profile becomes the active profile.
Crew Profile Importing and Import
Results Window
Crew Profiles Available for Import
from SD Card
Import Successful
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-23 Pilot Profile Import (AUX - System Setup Page)
Exporting a profile to an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card for storing the Crew Profile into the top card slot on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
3) Select the Export Softkey. The system displays the Crew Profile Exporting window.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Export Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
36
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) To export the crew profile using the current selected profile, press the ENT Key with ‘Export’ highlighted. To
change the selected profile, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Profile Name’ field, then scroll to the
desired profile name with the large and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with
‘Export’ highlighted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) If the selected profile to be exported is the same as an existing profile file name on the SD card, the system
displays an ‘Overwrite existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace the profile on
the SD card with the profile to be exported, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key
to return to the Pilot Profile Exporting window without exporting the profile.
EIS
6) If successful, the window displays ‘Crew profile export succeeded.’ With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT or CLR
Keys, or press the FMS Knob to return to the AUX - System Setup Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Crew Profile Exporting Window, Enter
a Name to Use for Exported Profile
Export Successful
Figure 1-24 Pilot Profile Export on the AUX - System Setup Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
37
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
DISPLAY UNITS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the system screens are listed on the System Setup 1 Page.
The Navigation Angle reference can be set from here (refer to the Flight Instruments Section).
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-25 Display Unit Settings (AUX - System Setup 1 Page)
Category
Settings
Affected Quantities
Navigation Angle Magnetic (North) Heading
True (North)
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Distance and
Metric
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Speed
Nautical
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK fields (Navigation Status Box)
All distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
Exceptions
Altitude and
Vertical Speed
Feet
Meters
All altitudes on MFD
All elevations on MFD
Temperature
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Gallons
Liters
Pounds
Kilograms
HDDD°MM.MM’
HDDD°MM’SS.S”
All temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)
Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
INDEX
Fuel and
Fuel Flow
Weight
Position
Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed (PFD)
Ground Speed (PFD)
Wind speed vector
Map range (Traffic Page, Terrain
Proximity/TAWS-B Page)
CDI scaling (System Setup)
Fuel range calculation (EIS)
N/A
Engine Indication System (EIS)
FOD in DEST Data Block
N/A
All positions
N/A
Table 1-1 Display Units Settings (AUX - System Setup 1 Page)
38
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PAGE NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The large FMS Knob displays the Page Group Tabs and navigates through the tabs. The small FMS Knob
navigates through the pages within a specific group. The number of clicks it takes to display the Page Group
Tabs and change to the next tab can be controlled from the Page Navigation box on the AUX - System Setup
2 Page.
Off – Displays the Page Group Tabs with one click of the large FMS Knob.
On – Displays the Page Group Tabs and navigates to the next tab with one click of the large FMS Knob.
EIS
The pilot can select, from the AUX - System Setup 2 Page, the amount of time the Page Group Tabs are
displayed (in the lower right corner of the MFD). The timeout can range from two to ten seconds.
Selecting page navigation settings:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the Setup 2 Softkey, if necessary.
3) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Change On 1st Click’ field in the Page Navigation Box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Off’ or ‘On’.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Timeout Seconds’ field in the Page Navigation Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired number of seconds
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-26 Page Navigation Settings (AUX - System Setup 2 Page)
INDEX
AUDIO ALERTS
The Audio Box on the System Setup 2 Page allows the audio alert voice setting (Male or Female).
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
39
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM UTILITIES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the AUX - Utility
Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and a record of the
time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and maximum groundspeeds—
are displayed from the time of the last reset. Refer to the Additional Features section for a discussion on the
Scheduler feature.
EIS
Set System Timers
Generic Flight Time Departure Time -
Enter/Delete
Scheduler
Messages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reset Trip Statistics
Figure 1-27 Utility Page
AFCS
TIMERS
The system timers available include:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Stopwatch-like generic timers (available from the PFD References Window and on the MFD AUX - Utility
Page)
• Total-time-in-flight timer (MFD AUX - Utility Page, and also shown in the lower right corner of the PFD)
• Time since departure (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
APPENDICES
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown
on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero
on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits are
zeroed.
Setting the generic timer (PFD):
INDEX
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the timer field (hh/mm/ss).
40
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
4) With the Up/Dn field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction.
5) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) With ‘Start?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘Stop?’.
7) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘Reset?’.
8) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘Start?’ and the digits
are reset.
9) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-28 Generic Timer (References Window)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
Setting the generic timer (MFD AUX - Utility Page):
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (Up/Dn) and press the ENT Key.
4) If a specific starting time is desired:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Start?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘Stop?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘Reset?’.
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘Start’ and the digits
are reset.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
41
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Figure 1-29 Timers (AUX - Utility Page)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the flight timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
The system records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the time
to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be reset
to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled from
the System Setup Page.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the departure time:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
42
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these odometers can
be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip groundspeed. Maximum
groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.
Resetting trip statistics readouts
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:
EIS
• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer
• Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only
• Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key. The selected parameters are reset
to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SCHEDULER
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system’s Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., “Change oil”,
“Switch fuel tanks”, “Overhaul”) in the Alerts Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on a
specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically
reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, messages are retained
until deleted, and message timer countdown is restarted.
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Alerts Window and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to ‘Type’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type:
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
APPENDICES
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
43
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YYY) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Scheduler messages appear in the Alerts Window on the PFD and cause the Alerts Softkey label to change
to ‘Advisory’. Pressing the Advisory Softkey opens the Alerts Window and acknowledges the scheduler
message. The softkey reverts to the ‘Alerts’ label and when pressed, the Alerts Window is removed from the
display and the scheduler message is deleted from the message queue.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-30 PFD Alerts Window
44
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS POSITION
The References Window on the PFD shows the current GPS position at the bottom of the window using the
selected display format (HHDDºMM.MM’ or HDDDºMM’SS.S”).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-31 GPS Position (References Window)
Viewing the GPS Position in the References Window:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob until the ‘Position’ field appears.
3) To remove the References Window, press the Tmr/Ref Softkey or press the CLR Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Changing the GPS Position display format:
1) On the MFD, turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup 1 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Position’ field in the Display Units Window.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired selection (HHDDºMM.MM’ or HDDDºMM’SS.S”) and press the
ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
45
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.6 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The dimming bus is the primary source for backlighting adjustments of the PFD and MFD displays, bezel,
Audio Panel keys, AFCS Controller keys, and Display Controller keys. The automatic backlighting adjustment
for the AFCS Controller annunciators and Display Controller annunciators uses photocell technology to
automatically adjust for ambient lighting conditions. Photocell calibration curves are pre-configured to optimize
display appearance through a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions. Manual backlighting adjustment can
be accomplished using the existing instrument panel dimming bus or the following procedures. In normal
operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In Reversionary Mode, it can be adjusted from
the remaining display.
Adjusting display backlighting:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD Display’. If
desired, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Auto’ next to ‘MFD Display’.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
Adjusting key backlighting:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD Display’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD Display’ or ‘MFD Display’, as desired.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD Key’ or ‘MFD Key’.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
7) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
INDEX
Figure 1-32 PFD Setup Menu
46
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and bugs on selected flight
instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these bugs and readouts, as they appear on the display
during certain AFCS flight director modes.
The Primary Flight Display (PFD) features a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and
course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic,
and weather information are also presented on the PFD and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
EIS
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
– Turn Rate Indicator
– Reference flags
• Vertical Navigation indications
– Airspeed awareness ranges
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
– Bearing pointers and
information windows
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid
indication
• DME Tuning Window
– DME Information Window
• Wind data
– Navigation source
• Altimeter, showing
• System time
– Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
– Barometric setting
• Inset Map
• Angle of Attack (AOA) Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– Selected Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– True Airspeed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
• Horizontal Situation Indicator,
and Glidepath Indicators
showing
– Indicated Airspeed
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
47
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
23
22
21
20
19
1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
18
17
2
3
16
15
EIS
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
14
5
13
6
12
7
11
8
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9
1
Percent Power Box
13
Turn Rate Indicator
2
Airspeed Indicator
14
Barometric Altimeter Setting
3
True Airspeed
15
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
4
Ground Speed
16
Selected Altitude Bug
5
Current Heading
17
Altimeter
6
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
18
Selected Altitude
7
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
19
COM Frequency Box
8
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
20
Navigation Status Box
9
Softkeys
21
AFCS Status Box
10
System Time
22
Slip/Skid Indicator
11
Transponder Status Box
23
Attitude Indicator
12
Selected Heading Bug
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
48
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
17
16
15
14
2
13
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
12
EIS
11
3
10
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9
4
6
7
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
8
Selected Course
2
Selected Heading
11
Annunciation Window
3
Wind Data
12
Current Vertical Speed
4
Inset Map
13
Required Vertical Speed Indicator
5
DME Information Window
14
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
6
Bearing 1 Information Window
15
VNV Target Altitude
7
Bearing 2 Information Window (Optional)
16
Terrain Annunciation
8
Barometric Minimums Box
17
AFCS Status Annunciation
9
Flight Plan Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
10
AFCS
Traffic Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
Figure 2-2 Primary Flight Display (Additional Information)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
49
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for speed criteria and Vspeed values.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The true airspeed is
displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving
tape are shown at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving tape are shown at intervals of
five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60 knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The indicated
airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching the never-exceed speed
(VNE), at which point it turns red.
Operating Ranges
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspeed
Trend
Vector
Indicated
Airspeed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
True
Airspeed
Ground
Speed
Low Speed Range
Red and White
Barber Pole at VNE
Vspeed
References
Speed
Ranges
AFCS
Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator Ranges
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Color coded stripes appear on the Airspeed Indicator to show the operating ranges. The low speed range
stripe is red. Normal operating range is green, caution range is amber, and the never exceed speed (VNE) begins
with a red and white barber pole. The flap operating range is indicated by a white stripe.
A red low speed awareness band extends up to the low speed awareness velocity, VLSA.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to the
tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate of
acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the line
shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. If the trend vector crosses VNE,
the indicated airspeed number changes to amber. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if
any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
Vspeeds (Glide, VR, VX, and VY) flags can be turned on/off from the Timer/References Window. VR is categorized
as a takeoff Vspeed. When active (on), the Vspeeds are displayed at their respective locations to the right of the
airspeed scale. All Vspeed flags changes are restored to their default values when power is cycled.
50
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing Vspeeds and turning Vspeed flags on/off:
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the On/Off field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to On or counterclockwise to Off.
4) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-4 Timer/References Window and Menus
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vspeed flags can be turned on or off all at once or by category (takeoff).
Turning all Vspeed flags on/off:
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) To activate all Vspeed flags, press the ENT Key with All References On highlighted.
4) To remove all Vspeed flags, turn the FMS Knob to highlight All References Off and press the ENT Key.
Restoring all Vspeed defaults:
AFCS
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight Restore Takeoff Defaults and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
51
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
GENERIC TIMER
The generic timer can be accessed via softkeys on the PFD and allows for quick access for timing functions
(either counting up or down) for the pilot.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the timer field (HH:MM:SS).
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time.
4) Press the ENT Key. The UP/DN field is now highlighted.
EIS
5) urn the small FMS Knob to display the UP/DOWN window.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Up’ or ‘Dn’.
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘Start?’ is now highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘Stop?’. If the timer is counting DOWN, it will start
counting UP after reaching zero.
9) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘Reset?’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘Start?’ and the digits
are reset.
11) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
AFCS
9
1
2
8
7
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6
3
APPENDICES
4
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
Figure 2-5 Attitude Indicator
INDEX
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚. Refer to Additional Features section for details regarding attitude indicator operation when
the optional Garmin ESP™ is installed.
52
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is shown by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer and
moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid (outside
the turn) is indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer.
When the optional Garmin Electronic Stability and Protection (Garmin ESP) system is available, additional
indications may appear on the pitch and roll scales; refer to the Additional Features and AFCS Sections for more
information about Garmin ESP.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-6 Slip/Skid Indication
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ALTIMETER
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling number gauge.
Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The indicated altitude is displayed inside the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. When the metric value is selected it is displayed
in a separate box above the Selected Altitude.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When a Selected Altitude is set, a cyan Selected Altitude Intercept Arc (if enabled) is displayed on the
navigation maps when the aircraft is climbing or descending. This arc appears at the estimated position the
aircraft will intercept the Selected Altitude; refer to the Flight Management Section for additional information
about the Selected Altitude Intercept Arc.
Setting the Selected Altitude:
T urn the ALT SEL Knob to set the Selected Altitude in 100-ft increments (up to the aircraft’s service ceiling.
When meters are displayed, Selected Altitude is adjusted in 50 meter increments.
APPENDICES
If set, the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value is also available for the Selected Altitude.
If desired, press the ALT SEL Knob to synchronize the selected altitude to the displayed altitude to the nearest
10 ft.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
53
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Altitude
Trend
Vector
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
EIS
Indicated
Altitude
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Barometric
Setting
Figure 2-7 Altimeter Settings, In Hg and Metric
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitudes can also be displayed in meters (Figure 2-7). Note that the altitude tape does not change scale.
Displaying altitude in meters:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
3) Press the Meters Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
AFCS
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown
if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric pressure setting creates discontinuities
in VNV vertical navigation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target
Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
NOTE: Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNAV vertical deviation, moving
APPENDICES
the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft to re-establish on the
descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNAV Target Altitude, the aircraft may
not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
INDEX
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QHN altimeter setting for the height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
54
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting standard barometric pressure:
Press the BARO Knob to select standard pressure; STD BARO is displayed in the Barometric Setting box.
Or:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the STD Baro Softkey; STD BARO is displayed in the Barometric Setting box.
EIS
Figure 2-8 Standard Barometric Altimeter Setting
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
Or, press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa).
4) Press the BACK Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
A Baro Transition Alert is provided to alert the pilot to change the barometric pressure setting when crossing
the transition altitude (in either direction). Two alerts are available. The altitude Baro Transition Alert occurs
when climbing through the transition altitude beginning at 200 feet below this altitude. The flight level Baro
Transition Alert occurs when descending through the transition flight level beginning at 200 feet above this
flight level. The barometric pressure setting stops flashing after the pilot changes the barometric pressure
setting. The pilot can enable/disable either Baro Transition Alert, and choose the altitude or flight level used to
trigger the alerts.
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the Aux - System Setup 1 Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
APPENDICES
3) To enable/disable the Baro Transition Alert based on altitude, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘On’ or
‘Off’ field for the BARO Transition Alert Altitude in the BARO Transition Alert Box.
4) If desired, turn the small FMS Knob to set the BARO Transition Alert Altitude On or Off.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Altitude field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to change the altitude and press the ENT Key to accept or press the CLR Key to return to
the previous altitude selection.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘On’ or ‘Off’ field for the BARO Transition Alert Level.
55
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
8) If desired, turn the small FMS Knob to set the BARO Transition Alert Flight Level On or Off.
9) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Flight Level field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
10) Use the FMS Knobs to change the Flight Level for the alert and press the ENT Key to accept or press the CLR
Key to return to the previous altitude selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
11) Push the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
Figure 2-9 Baro Transition Alert (AUX - System Setup Page)
AFCS
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed with numeric labels and tick marks at
1000 and 2000 fpm in each direction on the non-moving tape. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 500 fpm.
The current vertical speed is displayed in the pointer, which also points to that speed on the non-moving tape.
Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent
exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of the tape and the rate appears inside the
pointer.
INDEX
APPENDICES
A magenta chevron bug is displayed as the Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI; Figure 2-10) for reaching
a VNV Target Altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has been generated. See the
Flight Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental
Flight Data, for more information about VNV indications on the PFD.
56
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL DEVIATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When Vertical Navigation (VNAV) is being used, the Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) (Figure 2-10) appears
to the left of the altimeter and is displayed with a magenta ‘V’ at the top of the scale and a magenta chevron
indicating the vertical deviation. The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” alert. The
VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight Management Section for
details on VNAV features, and refer to Section 2.3, Supplemental Flight Data, for more information about VNAV
indications on the PFD.
Glideslope Preview when
GPS is NAV source
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Glideslope
Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-11 Glideslope Indicator
AFCS
Figure 2-10 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicators (VSI and VDI)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Vertical
Speed
Pointer
EIS
The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-11) appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is
tuned in the active NAV field and the aircraft heading and selected course are within 107°. A green diamond
acts as the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional indicator. The Glideslope Preview, a
hollow gray diamond, is displayed when the navigation source is set to GPS, in addition to a localizer frequency
being tuned on the navigation receiver and receiving glideslope information. When the system auto-switches
the active navigation source to the localizer frequency the Glideslope Indicator is displayed as a solid green
diamond. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in place of the
diamond.
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator appears on the display as soon as the Final Approach Fix (FAF) becomes the
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
active waypoint. Depending on procedure design, pilot action, and/or ATC clearance, the aircraft may be
centered on or above the glidepath when the Glidepath Indicator appears.
•
LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V, and LP+V, is +/- 148 feet (45 meters).
•
LPV is +/- 49 feet (15 meters).
APPENDICES
The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for RNAV approach service levels supporting SBAS vertical
guidance (LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LPV, LP+V). When one of these RNAV approaches is loaded into the flight
plan, GPS is the selected navigation source, and SBAS is used for vertical approach guidance, the Glidepath
Indicator appears as a magenta diamond (Figure 2-12). Full-scale deflection (two dots), is angular with upper
and lower limits. The upper limit is +/-492 feet (150 meters) and lower limits depend on approach service level.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
If the approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the
diamond.
57
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While executing an LNAV/VNAV approach, and between the FAF and MAP, the Vertical Deviation Limit
Indicators appear as vertical white lines (Figure 2-13) indicating the area where deviation exceeds allowable
limits for the glidepath. The Vertical Deviation Limit Indicator provides a scaled representation of +/- 75 feet
of the calculated glidepath. The “window” between the lines represents the area of acceptable deviation. The
length of the lines will change while progressing through the final approach. When the Glidepath Indicator
enters an excessive deviation area, the Glidepath and Vertical Deviation Limit Indicators are amber (Figure
2-13).
Vertical
Deviation
Limit
Indicator
EIS
Glidepath
Preview
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Glidepath
Indicator
Figure 2-12 Glidepath Indicator
Vertical
Deviation
Limit
Indicator
(excessive
deviation)
Figure 2-13 Glidepath Indicator (Baro-VNAV)
and Vertical Deviation Limit Indicators
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
While executing an LNAV/VNAV approach and SBAS is unavailable, baro-VNAV (barometric vertical
navigation) is used for vertical guidance. This occurs due to any of the following conditions:
•
SBAS fails or becomes unavailable prior to the FAF
•
The aircraft is outside of SBAS coverage
•
SBAS is manually disabled on the GPS Status page
Baro-VNAV is also the source of vertical approach guidance if the LNAV/VNAV procedure does not support
SBAS vertical guidance.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
While baro-VNAV is being utilized, the Glidepath Indicator appears as a magenta pentagon (Figure 2-13). If
the approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the pentagon.
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
APPENDICES
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels occur every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI, and the current
ground track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond indicator. The HSI also presents turn rate, course
deviation, bearing, and navigation source information.
INDEX
The 360˚ HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a
sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double
line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with
the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
58
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
14
12
13
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
11
1
2
3
10
4
9
5
EIS
6
8
7
8
Lateral Deviation Scale
2
Current Track Indicator
9
Aircraft Symbol
3
Course Deviation Indicator
10
Flight Phase
4
Navigation Source
11
Selected Heading Bug
5
Course Pointer
12
Lubber Line
6
To/From Indicator
13
Current Heading
7
Rotating Compass Rose
14
Turn Rate Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn Rate/Heading Trend Vector
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-14 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
NOTE: When OBS mode is active to a VOR waypoint, the course pointer and current track indicator are
AFCS
relative to the published magnetic variation of the VOR which can be outdated with respect to the current
magnetic variation. Consequently, in OBS mode a slight offset may exist between indicated heading and
selected course and track indicator even when there is no crosswind.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Selected Heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted The cyan bug
on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading.
Adjusting the Selected Heading:
Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading.
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
APPENDICES
The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted.
Adjusting the Selected Course:
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station (see OBS Mode for adjusting a GPS course).
59
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Current Track
Indicator
Current
Heading
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Heading
Selected
Course
Heading Bug
EIS
Figure 2-15 Heading and Course Indications (Magnetic)
The Current Track Indicator, represented by a magenta diamond on the HSI, is the current over the ground
track the aircraft is flying.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag
Var) or referenced to true north (T), set on the AUX - System Setup Page. When an approach referenced to
true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the navigation angle
setting to True at the appropriate time.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-16 Heading and Course Indications (True)
Changing the navigation angle setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Nav Angle in the Display Units box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• True - References angles to true north (T)
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Magnetic - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag Var)
60
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-17 Navigation Angle Settings (AUX - System Setup Page)
TURN RATE INDICATOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than 4
deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
Standard
Turn Rate
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 deg/sec
AFCS
Half-standard
Turn Rate
Figure 2-18 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
APPENDICES
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Two bearing pointers (the second of which is an optional feature) and associated information can be
displayed on the HSI for the NAV, GPS and ADF sources. The bearing pointers are cyan and are singleline (BRG1) or double-line (BRG2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information window to indicate the
navigation source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from the CDI by a
white ring. Bearing pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible due to data unavailability.
61
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Tuning Mode
Bearing 1
Pointer
Bearing 2
Pointer
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Frequency
Distance
DME Information Window
Station
Identifier
Bearing
Source
EIS
Distance to
Bearing Source
Station
Pointer
Identifier
Icon
Bearing 2 Information Window
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Bearing
Pointer
Source
Icon
Bearing 1 Information Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-19 HSI with Bearing and DME Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information Windows are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following information:
• Bearing source (NAV or GPS)
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV or GPS)
• Pointer icon (BRG = single line, BRG2 = double line)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
• Frequency (NAV, ADF)
AFCS
If the NAV radio is the bearing source and is tuned to an ILS frequency (refer to the Audio Panel and CNS
Section for information on tuning the radios), the bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and the frequency
is replaced with “ILS”. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the
station identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier
is displayed in lieu of a frequency.
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and “NO DATA” is displayed in the information window if:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR station
• GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not selected
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
APPENDICES
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window
with NAV1 source.
3) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey again to change the bearing source to NAV2.
4) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey a third time to change the bearing source to GPS.
INDEX
5) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey a fourth time to change the bearing source to ADF (ADF Radio
installation is optional).
6) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey again.
62
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
NOTE: DME radio installation is optional.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window on the 360˚ HSI and in
a box above and along side the Arc HSI. It shows the DME label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD),
frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance is replaced by –.– – NM Refer to the Audio
Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the DMEs.
Displaying the DME Information Window:
EIS
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window above the BRG1 Information Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
360˚ HSI
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation
Source
Flight
Phase
Crosstrack
Error
AFCS
CDI
Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-20 Course Deviation Indicator
APPENDICES
The CDI can display two sources of navigation: GPS or NAV (VOR, localizer). Color indicates the current
navigation source: magenta (for GPS) or green (for VOR and LOC); the Selected Course readout also follows
these color indications. When coupled to GPS, the full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPS-derived
distance. When coupled to a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI has the same angular limits as a mechanical CDI.
If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots) while coupled to GPS, the crosstrack error
(XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
When navigating with GPS and an ILS or localizer approach is activated, a preview of the approach course is
indicated by the dashed gray pointer and CDI on the HSI as shown on the left of Figure 2-21. As the aircraft
approaches the final approach course, the two course pointers converge. When the system auto-switches to the
localizer NAV source, the pointer and CDI will change to green.
63
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Preview CRS
Pointer and CDI
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Localizer Approach
Course Preview
Figure 2-21 Navigation Sources
Changing navigation sources:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. The NAV1 standby frequency in the upper left
corner of the MFD is cyan.
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. The NAV2 standby frequency in
the upper left corner of the MFD is cyan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
AFCS
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS
Selected
LOC1
Selected
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
VOR2
Selected
Pressing the CDI
Softkey Cycles through
Navigation Sources
APPENDICES
Figure 2-22 Selecting a Navigation Source
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling
accordingly when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
INDEX
• The Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
64
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (see the Flight Management Section) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source;
GPS steering guidance is not provided after this switch.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On some ILS approaches where the glideslope intercept point is at or in close proximity to the fix prior to
the FAF (see Figure 2-23), it is possible to be above the glideslope when the navigation source automatically
switches from FMS to LOC. The probability of this occurring varies based on air temperature.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Fix Prior to the FAF
Glideslope Intercept Point
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-23 ILS Approach with Glideslope Intercept Point at Fix Prior to the FAF
GPS CDI SCALING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to amber. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, ‘HDG LEG’ is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
AFCS
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as ‘System CDI’ on the AUX - System Setup Page and the fullscale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If the selected
scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled accordingly and
the selected setting is be displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation. Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring (RAIM) protection limits follow the selected CDI scale and corresponding flight phases.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Selected in the GPS CDI box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
65
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-24 GPS CDI Settings (AUX - System Setup Page)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
Terminal
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
1.0 nm
0.3 nm
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CDI Full-scale Deflection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When set to ‘Auto’ (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-25, Table 2-1).
Missed
Approach
Figure 2-25 Automatic CDI Scaling
• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
APPENDICES
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF leg
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA leg
INDEX
• At 30 nm from the departure airport the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
66
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm
over a distance of 1.0 nm.
EIS
• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (see Figures 2-26 and 2-27). This transition
normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the Final Approach Fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling
automatically once the approach procedure is active or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2 nm
Landing
Threshold
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-27 Typical LNAV/VNAV and LPV Approach CDI Scaling
AFCS
Figure 2-26 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach CDI Scaling
FAF
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2 nm
FAF
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
angle based
on database
information
course width
350 ft
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
angle set
by system
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
CDI Full-scale Deflection
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF leg
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA leg
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
67
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
Approach
(Non-precision)
LNAV
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Approach
(Non-precision with
Advisory Vertical
Guidance)
Approach
(Non-precision with
Advisory Vertical
Guidance)
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV)
Approach
(LPV)
Approach
(Non-precision with
Advisory Vertical
Guidance)
Approach
(LP)
Missed Approach
LNAV + V
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
2.0 nm
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (see Figure 2-26)
VISUAL
L/VNAV
LPV
LP+V
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (see Figure 2-27)
LP
MAPR
0.3 nm
AFCS
* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to amber.
Table 2-1 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
OBS MODE
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
APPENDICES
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current “active-to” waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. ‘OBS’ is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
INDEX
While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the “active-to” waypoint on the moving map.
If desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight path on the moving map retains the modified course line.
68
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS
Selected
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Extended
Course
Line
OBS Mode
Enabled
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
EIS
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
Figure 2-28 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn a CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press a CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label
changes to indicate the suspension is active as shown in Figure 2-29. Pressing the SUSP Softkey, deactivates
the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
SUSP
SUSP
Annunciation
Softkey
Figure 2-29 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
69
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ANGLE OF ATTACK (AOA) INDICATOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The optional Angle of Attack (AOA) Indicator (Figure 2-30) appears on the PFD below the airspeed indicator
and is shown when the Inset Map is not displayed. The AOA Indicator displays the normalized angle of attack.
White, amber, and red arcs indicate AOA ranges. A normalized AOA value of 1.0 corresponds to a stall, and
will cause the stick pusher to activate if this condition is reached. The system dynamically calculates the red
and amber arc ranges based on parameters such as bank angle, and flaps position. The red arc begins at the
Stall Warning threshold and ends at 1.0 (Stall threshold). The amber arc represents maneuvering margin to a
35 degree bank angle. At bank angles of 35 degrees or greater, the amber band has zero thickness. The pointer
color matches the color of the arc associated with the current AOA value.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The pilot can enable/disable the display of the AOA Indicator on the PFD, or select the auto mode. In auto
mode, the AOA Indicator appears when the landing gear is down and locked, or the flaps position is three
degrees or greater. Otherwise, the AOA Indicator is removed. Refer to Additional Features section for details
regarding the optional Garmin ESP™.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-30 Angle of Attack (AOA) Indicator
Selecting the AOA Indicator display mode:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the AOA Softkey.
AFCS
3) Press the On, Off, or Auto Softkey. Selecting Auto has the same function as selecting On.
NOTE: The display of the Angle Of Attack indicator is mutually exclusive with the Inset Map. Only one can
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
be displayed at a time.
70
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.2 GARMIN SVT (SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
NOTE: Do not use the flight path marker as a flight director.
EIS
NOTE: Terrain alerting is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of 89º South latitude. This is due
to limitations present within the Terrain database and the system’s ability to process the data representing
the affected areas.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Garmin SVT™ (Synthetic Vision Technology) is a visual enhancement to the system. SVT depicts a forwardlooking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of view is 29 degrees to
the left and 35.5 degrees to the right. During reversionary mode, field of view is 21.5 degrees to the left and 35.5
degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary Flight Display (PFD), or on the Multifunction
Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. The depicted imagery is derived from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS
three-dimensional position, and a 4.9 arc-second database of terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features. The
terrain data resolution of 4.9 arc-seconds, meaning that the terrain elevation contours are stored in squares
measuring 4.9 arc-seconds on each side, is required for the operation of SVT. Loss of any of the required data,
including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to be disabled (although the softkeys will still appear
functional) until the required data is restored.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed even
if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid with
lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS-B) or standard Terrain-SVT is integrated within
Garmin-SVT to provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant
to the projected flight path. Terrain alerts are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
Garmin-SVT can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If SVT is enabled
when switching to Reversionary Mode, it will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVT PFD
display will be shown in the interim.
APPENDICES
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the Garmin-SVT or TAWS-B terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVT.
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
• Terrain Alerting
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Obstacle Alerting
• Airport Signs
• Pathways
• Runway Display
• Traffic Display
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
• Flight Path Marker
71
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-31 Synthetic Vision Imagery
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT OPERATION
SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch attitude scale is reduced from 20
degrees up and down to 10 degrees up to 7.5 degrees down.
AFCS
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Opt Softkey leads into the PFD function
Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the SVT Softkey displays the SVT feature softkeys. The softkeys
are labeled Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, and APT Sign. The Back Softkey returns to the previous level of
softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT feature may be activated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pathways, HDG LBL, and APT Sign Softkeys are only available when the Terrain Softkey is activated (gray
with black characters). After activating the Terrain Softkey, the Pathways, HDG LBL, and APT Sign softkeys
may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power is cycled, the last selected
state (on or off) of the Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, and APT Sign softkeys is remembered by the system.
• Pathways Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
APPENDICES
• Terrain Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• HDG LBL Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
INDEX
• APT Sign Softkey enables airport signposts.
72
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 2-32 SVT Softkeys
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Activating and deactivating SVT:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the Terrain Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with the Terrain Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the Pathways Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the Pathways Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
AFCS
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the HDG LBL Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HDG LBL Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the APT Sign Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APT Sign Softkey.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
73
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SVT FEATURES
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport
Runway
EIS
Flight
Path
Marker
Airplane
Symbol
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Synthetic
Terrain
SVT
Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-32 SVT on the Primary Flight Display
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
AFCS
PATHWAYS
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored
rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box
size represents 700 feet wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During
an approach, the box width is 700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The
height is 200 feet or one half full scale deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the
pathway boxes are displayed is determined by the higher of either the selected altitude or the VNAV altitude
programmed for the active leg in the flight plan.
INDEX
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and
navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes
that correspond to the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a
green CDI. An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line
drawn on the Inset map or MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
74
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Programmed
Altitudes
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-33 Programmed and Selected Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and
some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used
independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the
display when the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the
active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that
would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
DEPARTURE AND ENROUTE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg of
the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the first
active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVT field of
view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching the center
of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum of four.
APPENDICES
Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance. Flight plan
legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft at the altitude selected
or programmed.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
75
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
DESCENT AND APPROACH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent. When the flight plan includes programmed
descent segments, pathways are displayed along the descent path provided that the selected altitude is lower
than the programmed altitude.
EIS
VOR, LOC BC approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in magenta
boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final approach
courses are not displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes if
GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC selected
as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide slope.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated, Pathways are shown level at the selected altitude
up to the point along the final approach course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical descent
path, glidepath, or glideslope. From the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept point, the
pathways are shown inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral and vertical
descent path, or at the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
TOD
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
APPENDICES
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
INDEX
Figure 2-34 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent
76
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MISSED APPROACH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned in
the direction of that leg.
EIS
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FAF
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Descent displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
by pathway
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
MAHP
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-35 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
77
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
EIS
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or
obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Wind
Vector
Figure 2-36 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
APPENDICES
ZERO PITCH LINE
INDEX
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
78
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HORIZON HEADING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HDG LBL Softkey.
TRAFFIC
EIS
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or may appear as a
partial symbol.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVT
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in the Inset map or
MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVT display. For
more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRPORT SIGNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
AFCS
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 2-37 Airport Signs
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
79
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not
displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Other
Runway
on Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Airport
Runway
APPENDICES
Figure 2-38 Airport Runways
TAWS ALERTING
INDEX
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts, and corresponds to the yellow terrain shading for a caution alert and the red shading for a warning alert
on the Inset Map and MFD Map displays. For more detailed information regarding Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B,
refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVT field of view to the left or right of the aircraft.
80
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERRAIN
Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Potential
Impact
Point
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-39 Terrain Alert
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols
found on the Inset map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with
relative height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. When employing a TAWS-B system, unlike the
Inset map and MFD moving map display, obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to
warn of potential conflict with the aircraft’s flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA
alert. Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind
the airspeed and altitude displays.
AFCS
PULL UP
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Potential
Impact
Point
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 2-40 Obstacle
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
81
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FIELD OF VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Configuring field of view:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Map Settings and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Field of
View
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Map Setup Menu, Map Group, Field of View Option
Figure 2-41 Option Menus
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Map Group options to Field of View.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and Field of View
turned on.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
SVT View on the PFD
Field of View on the MFD
Figure 2-42 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
82
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.3 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) by default in the lower left of the
PFD under normal display conditions
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-43 Outside Air Temperature
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WIND DATA
Wind direction and speed in knots can be displayed relative to the aircraft in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
displays NO WIND DATA. Wind data can be displayed in two different ways.
AFCS
Option 1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Option 2
APPENDICES
No Data
INDEX
Figure 2-44 Wind Data
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
83
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Displaying wind data:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the Wind Softkey to display wind data.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press one of the Option softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
• Option 1: Wind direction arrow with numeric True direction and speed
• Option 2: Headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
4) To remove the window, press the Off Softkey.
EIS
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD
according to the criteria listed in Table 2-2.
Top of Descent Message
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
AFCS
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
Figure 2-45 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VNV Indication Removed
Criteria
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RVSI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude*
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey pressed on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
X
X
X
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
* If the flight director has been engaged to fly a VNV flight plan, the VNV Target Altitude being held remains displayed
while on level flight plan legs.
Table 2-2 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
84
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.4 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for more
information on alerts and annunciations.
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in amber, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Middle Marker
EIS
Outer Marker
Inner Marker
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altimeter
Figure 2-46 Marker Beacon Annunciations
ALTITUDE ALERTING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural alerts when approaching the Selected
Altitude. Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The Altitude Alerter is
independent of the Garmin AFCS. The following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude:
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter)
changes to black text on a cyan background and flashes for 5 seconds.
AFCS
• When the aircraft passes within 200 ft of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to cyan text on
a black background and flashes for 5 seconds and a single chime is heard.
Within 1000 ft
Within 200 ft
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude), the Selected Altitude changes to amber text on a black background, flashes for 5 seconds, and the
word “Altitude” is heard.
Deviation of ±200 ft
APPENDICES
Figure 2-47 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
85
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: The Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when an SBAS signal (such as WAAS, EGNOS, or
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MSAS) is available and the pilot has inhibited TAWS alerts.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS Inhibited
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EIS
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-amber ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation appears to the top right of the Altimeter,
flashing for several seconds then remaining displayed until the condition is resolved.
Glidepath
Indicator
Low Altitude
Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-48 Low Altitude on GPS SBAS Approach
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
AFCS
For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH), based on
barometric altitude can be set. When active, the altitude setting is displayed to the lower left of the Altimeter
and with a bug at the corresponding altitude along the Altimeter (once the altitude is within the range of the
tape).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following visual annunciations alert the pilot when approaching the MDA or DH:
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, the ‘BARO MIN’ box appears
with the altitude in cyan text. The bug appears on the altitude tape in cyan once in range.
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn white.
APPENDICES
• Once the aircraft reaches the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn amber and the aural alert, “Minimums
Minimums”, is generated.
INDEX
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the setting
for the alert. If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA/DH, once it reaches 50 feet above
the MDA/DH, alerting is disabled.
86
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Within 100 feet
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Within 2500 feet
Altitude Reached
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MDA/DH
Bug
MDA/DH
Setting
Figure 2-49 Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting Visual Annunciations
EIS
Setting the Minimums Descent Altitude/Decision Height:
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO or TEMP COMP. OFF is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn
the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (from zero to 16,000 feet).
5) If TEMP COMP was selected, press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field and then
enter the temperature (-59˚C to 59˚C)
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 2-50 BARO and TEMP COMP MDA/DH
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
87
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.5 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
The annunciations listed in Table 2-3 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur; see the
figure for examples. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
GPS LOI
Right of HSI
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
GPS INTEG OK Right of HSI
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Lower left of Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS position
DR
aircraft symbol to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan waypoints
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Annunciation
Location
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 2-3 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
AFCS
Figure 2-51 Example HSI Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed in amber on the display to denote degraded navigation source information. This data includes the
following:
• Navigation Status Box fields except Active Leg, TAS, and DTK
• Course Deviation Indicator (removed after 20 minutes)
APPENDICES
• GPS Bearing Pointer
• Wind data and pointers in the Wind Data Box on the PFD
• Track Indicator
• All Bearing Pointer Distances
INDEX
• Active Flight Plan distances, bearings, and ETE values
Also, while the system is in DR Mode, the autopilot will not couple to GPS, and terrain alerting (if installed)
is disabled. Additionally, the accuracy of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is
questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to function, but with degraded accuracy.
88
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SVT TROUBLESHOOTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SVT is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVT is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVT data, the
PFD display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVT becomes disabled without the following data resources:
• Attitude data
• Heading data
• GPS position data
EIS
• 4.9 Arc-second Terrain data
• Obstacle data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• TAWS function is not available, in test mode, or failed
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
REVERSIONARY MODE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SVT can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled when switching
to Reversionary Mode, SVT will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVT PFD display will
be shown in the interim.
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red extreme pitch warning chevrons pointing toward the
horizon are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon line.
The red chevrons are overlaid on the display indicating the direction to fly to correct the unusual attitude
condition. The display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or bottom of the screen to represent
earth or sky. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during extreme pitch attitudes.
AFCS
The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great enough to completely fill the display.
Nose High
Nose Low
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Figure 2-52 Pitch Attitude Warnings
89
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from the PFD (and corresponding softkeys are disabled) when the aircraft
experiences unusual attitudes:
• Traffic Annunciations
• System Time
• AFCS Annunciations
• PFD Setup Menu
• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout
• Flight director Command Bars
• Windows displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD:
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
• Outside Air Temperature
– Timer/References
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
• DME Information Window
– Nearest Airports
• Selected Altitude
• Wind data
– Flight Plan
• VNV Target Altitude
• Selected Heading Box
– Alerts
• Selected Course Box
– Procedures
• Transponder Status Box
– DME Tuning
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Inset Map
90
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Engine Indication System (EIS) displays critical engine, electrical, fuel, optional ice protection, and other
system parameters on the left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD) during normal operations (Figure 3-1).
EIS information can be fully expanded to an entire page (EIS - Engine Page) using the Engine Softkey. In
Reversionary Mode, the display-combines Primary Flight Display (PFD) symbology with the EIS.
EIS Display
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-1 MFD (SR20)
AFCS
Green bands on the instruments indicate normal ranges of operation; amber and red bands indicate caution
and warning, respectively. White or uncolored bands indicate areas outside of normal operation. When unsafe
operating conditions occur, the corresponding displays, pointers and labels change color corresponding to the
level of the condition; warnings also flash (except fuel at destination). If sensory data to an instrument becomes
invalid or unavailable, an amber 'X' is displayed across the instrument. However, the numeric displays in the
Fuel Calculation Box, TKS FIKI Anti Ice Box (optional), and the density altitude in the Air Data Box are replaced
with dashes instead of 'X's when the data is invalid or out of range.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
91
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 EIS DISPLAY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for engine operating limitations.
NOTE: Depictions of equipment may differ from the installed equipment. Examples shown may differ from
actual aircraft configurations.
1 Percent Power Indicator
Displays engine power as a percentage
EIS
(% Pwr)
2 Tachometer (RPM)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute
3 Engine Manifold Pressure
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury to indicate engine power
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Indicator (Man "Hg)
4 Fuel Quantity Indicator
Displays fuel quantities, in gallons, for the left (L) and right (R) fuel tanks.
(GAL)
&
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFlow GPH)
5 Gallons Used Indicator
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (Displays a cyan target fuel flow
indicator to the right of the fuel flow indicator strip. Optional for SR22 normally
aspirated)
Displays the fuel used in gallons
(Gal Used)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6 Oil Temperature Indicator
Displays engine oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit
(Oil ºF)
7 Oil Pressure Indicator
AFCS
(Oil PSI)
8 Ammeter (Batt1 A)
Displays the battery 1 load in amperes
9
Displays the essential bus voltage in volts
Voltmeter (ESS Bus V)
10 Cylinder Head Temperature
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Indicator (CHT ºF)
11 Exhaust Gas Temperature
Indicator (EGT ºF)
Exhaust Gas Temperature/
Turbine Inlet Temperature
Indicator (EGT/TIT ºF)
APPENDICES
Displays pressure of oil supplied to the engine in pounds per square inch
(psi)
12 Left and Right Turbine Inlet
Displays the exhaust gas temperature (cylinder number is shown below
bar) (normally aspirated models only)
Displays the exhaust gas temperature and turbine inlet temperature
(cylinder number or turbine inlet side is shown below bar) (Turbo models
only, shown in Figure 3-3)
Displays the temperature at the left (L) and right (R) turbine inlet (Turbo
models only, shown in Figure 3-3)
INDEX
Temperature
Displays the head temperature of the hottest cylinder (CHT; cylinder
number is shown below bar)
92
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
2
EIS
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4
Target
Fuel
Flow
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
6
7
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
9
AFCS
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
11
APPENDICES
SR20
Figure 3-2 EIS Display
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
93
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Target
Fuel Flow
(Optional)
Target
Fuel
Flow
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
12
11
11
APPENDICES
SR22
(Nornally Aspirated)
SR22T
INDEX
Figure 3-3 EIS Display
94
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.2 ENGINE PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the Engine Softkey accesses the EIS - Engine Page, which displays all engine, fuel, fuel calculation,
electrical, air data, and optional ice protection information. Pressing the optional Anti-Ice Softkey accesses the
second-level softkeys. Pressing the Fuel-W&B Softkey accesses the second-level softkeys.
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available on SR22 and SR22T models.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
(Optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-4 Engine Page Softkeys
Level 2
Selects manual mode and opens the left tank valve and closes the right tank valve
Auto
Right
Back
Selects auto tank selection mode
Selects manual mode and opens the right tank valve and closes the left tank valve
Returns to the EIS Display and top-level softkeys
Removes bars and temperature displays from the Engine Temperature Box
Identifies temperature peaks
Full
Tabs
Undo
W&B
Accesses the Initial Usable Fuel Page
Resets fuel totalizer to tabs (usable fuel)
Resets to the initial usable fuel amount shown on the Initial Usable Fuel Page
Displays the Aux - W&B Page
DCLTR
Assist
Fuel-W&B
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Left
Anti-Ice
(Optional)
APPENDICES
Description
Displays full Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to return to
the EIS Display and top-level softkeys (see the EIS Section for more information)
Displays Anti-Ice softkeys (optional -TKS FIKI only; See Operational Note above)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Level 3
AFCS
Level 1
Engine
95
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Percent Power Indicator
(% Pwr)
Displays engine power as a percentage
2
Tachometer (RPM x100)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute
3
Engine Manifold Pressure Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury to indicate engine power
Indicator (Man "Hg)
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFlow GPH)
5 Oil Temperature and
Pressure Indicators
(Oil °F PSI)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (Displays a cyan target fuel flow indicator
shown on top of the fuel flow gauge. Optional for SR22 normally aspirated)
6
Electrical Group
(Electrical)
Displays the alternator and battery current in amperes and the essential and
main bus voltage
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
7
Fuel Calculation Group
(Fuel Calculation)
Displays calculated fuel at destination, fuel used, fuel remaining, time
remaining, range (in nautical miles) and economy (in nautical miles per gallon)
based on the displayed fuel remaining and the fuel flow totalizer
8
Fuel Quantity Indicator
Displays fuel quantities, in gallons, for the left (L) and right (R) fuel tanks
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for engine operating limitations.
9
Air Data
Displays density altitude, outside air temperature (OAT) in °F and °C, and
international standard atmosphere (ISA) temperature deviation
10
Oxygen Pressure Indicator Displays oxygen pressure in tank in pounds per square inch (optional)
11
Anti-Ice Fluid Quantity
Indicator (TKS FIKI)
12
Engine Temperature Group Displays head (CHT) and exhaust gas temperatures (EGT) of all cylinders in °F
(all models) and turbine inlet temperatures (turbo models only)
(Engine Temperatures)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4
Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) and pressure in pounds per
square inch (psi)
TKS FIKI – Displays the quantity of anti-ice fluid remaining in the left (L) and
right (R) tanks in gallons (optional – See Operational Note below)
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
APPENDICES
limitations. This option is only available on SR22 and SR22T models.
NOTE: Depictions of equipment may differ from the installed equipment. Examples shown may not represent
INDEX
all possible aircraft configurations.
96
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Target Fuel
Flow Indicator
1
2
3
4
5
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
6
12
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
9
Figure 3-5 Engine Page (SR20)
1
2
3
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Target Fuel
Flow Indicator
(Optional)
5
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6
12
APPENDICES
7
8
11
9
INDEX
10
Figure 3-6 Engine Page (SR22) with TKS FIKI and Oxygen
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
97
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
2
3
Target Fuel
Flow Indicator
5
4
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
EIS
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
12
7
11
8
9
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10
Figure 3-7 Engine Page (SR22T) with TKS FIKI and Oxygen
FUEL CALCULATIONS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
the fuel was reset.
AFCS
Fuel used (Used), time remaining (Time Rem), range (in nautical miles), and economy (Econ) are calculated
based on the displayed fuel remaining (Rem) and the fuel flow totalizer. The calculated range is based upon
ground speed, distance, economy and fuel remaining. See the Flight Management Section for information
regarding the map feature related to the EIS Fuel Calculations.
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the Engine Softkey to display the Engine Page.
2) Press the Fuel Softkey to access the Initial Usable Fuel Page.
3) Turn the FMS Knob (small knob adjusts in 1 gallon increments and large knob in 10 gallon increments) to
increase or decrease the initial usable fuel displayed.
APPENDICES
Calculated
Fuel Used
Fuel
Remaining
Calculated
Time
Remaining
Calculated
Range
INDEX
Calculated
Economy
Figure 3-8 Fuel Calculations Group
98
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Change in
Fuel Level
Computed
Fuel Remaining
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 3-9 Full Fuel (SR22 shown as example)
Initial Usable Fuel Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TKS FLIGHT INTO KNOWN ICING (FIKI) ANTI-ICE SYSTEM
The system interfaces with the optional TKS Flight Into Known Icing (FIKI) anti-ice system. Refer to the
applicable Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for a detailed system description of the installed ice protection
system.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available on SR22 and SR22T models.
AFCS
The FIKI system offers five pilot-selectable (external to the system) modes of operation and a more sophisticated
quantity indicator located on the full Engine Page. To accommodate the additional modes, the TKS FIKI system
employs several additional sensors. The system receives inputs from these sensors and provides indications as
to the status of the TKS FIKI system.
AUTO TANK SELECTION MODE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In the default tank selection mode (Auto), the system assures that the fluid levels of the two tanks are kept
relatively even by periodically closing the tank with the lowest level. The system uses the anti-ice fluid tank
quantities to control the tank shut-off valves. When the system is on and operating in Auto mode, the shut-off
valves close under the following conditions:
• The fluid quantity is empty (indicated from the fluid level sensor and level switch)
APPENDICES
• The left and right tank level imbalance is greater than 0.25 gallons (low tank will be closed until level
balance is within 0.15 gallons)
• The fluid quantity is unreliable (a miscompare between the level sensor and level switch or an out of
range level sensor value)
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
99
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While operating in Auto mode a white box is displayed around the ‘L’ and ‘R’, located on top of each fluid
quantity indicator, when both tanks are open (Figure 3-10). During normal operation, the white box will
highlight the left or right tanks as the fluid levels change.
Figure 3-10 Auto Tank Mode (Normal)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If a fluid level comparison fault is detected (the fluid level sender disagrees with the fluid level switch for a
particular tank) the corresponding fluid quantity indicator is grayed out (Figure 3-11) and that quantity is not
used in the endurance and range calculations. When the fluid level sender is out of range, the fluid quantity
indicator is marked with an amber ‘X’ (Figure 3-12).
Figure 3-11 Fluid Level Unreliable
Figure 3-12 Fluid Level Out Of Range
AFCS
MANUAL TANK MODE
Manual tank mode allows the pilot to control either tank’s shut-off valve. Manual may be selected by
pressing the Anti-Ice Softkey to access the second-level softkeys Left, Auto, and Right. A cyan box is
displayed around the selected tank, gallons remaining in the selected tank, and pump operating mode.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Left Softkey – opens left tank valve and closes right tank valve
• Auto Softkey – returns to Auto tank mode
• Right Softkey – opens right tank valve and closes left tank valve
INDEX
APPENDICES
While operating in manual tank mode, only the selected/open tank’s quantity is used for the range and
endurance calculations.
Figure 3-13 Manual Tank Mode (Right tank selected)
100
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PUMP OPERATING MODES
The Ice Protection systems consists of various pump operating modes listed below.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available on SR22 and SR22T models.
Operating Mode
OFF
Norm
Comments
No modes selected
Provides 50% flow rate for light/moderate icing 
EIS
Provides 100% flow rate for moderate icing 
Provides 200% flow rate for severe icing or to
expedite the removal of previous ice buildup 
This mode is used in the event of a timer box
failure or when Backup mode is selected. Pump #2
provides 100% flow rate, bypassing the timer box

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
High
Max
(momentary)
Pump Bkup
System Operation
System Off
Both pumps operate on a timed, repeating cycle
– 30 seconds ON and 90 seconds OFF
A single pump (#1) operates continuously
Both pumps operate continuously for 120
seconds
A single pump (#2) operates continuously
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
 Refer to the POH for pilot recommended actions
Table 3-1 FIKI System Operating Modes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-16 Max Operating Mode
Figure 3-17 Pump Backup Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-15 High Operating Mode
AFCS
Figure 3-14 Normal Operating Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
101
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.3 LEANING ASSIST MODE
NOTE: The pilot should follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended leaning procedures in the Pilot’s
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Operating Handbook (POH).
A leaning assist function is available on the Engine Page to assist in the leaning process.
Accessing Leaning Assist Mode:
1) Press the Engine Softkey to display the Engine Page.
EIS
2) Press the Assist Softkey to identify peaks.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the Assist Softkey is pressed, the system initially highlights the number and places a cyan box around
the EGT display of the cylinder with the hottest EGT. The ∆ Peak temperature is the difference between the
peak temperature and the present temperature for the peaked cylinder. When the first peak is detected, “1st” is
annunciated below that cylinder’s EGT bar and the temperature is enclosed in a cyan box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system continues to detect peak EGTs for each cylinder lean of peak as the fuel flow is decreased, and the
peak of each cylinder’s EGT is indicated by a cyan marker on the graph. Once all cylinders are lean of peak, the
last cylinder to peak is denoted by the “Last” annunciation below its bar on the graph.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Cyan Box
Represents Peak
AFCS
Temperature
Deviation
from Peak
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-18 Leaning Assist Mode
102
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.4 EIS DISPLAY IN REVERSIONARY MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In reversionary mode, the display combines PFD symbology with the EIS Display (refer to the System Overview
for information about display Reversionary Mode).
In reversionary mode, the EIS is separated into two displays: Engine (identical to the normal EIS Display on the
MFD) and System. For a description of the EIS Display, refer to Section 3.1. The System Display shows various
system parameters and fuel calculations.
EIS
EIS Display
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-19 Reversionary Mode (SR22)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 3-20 Engine Softkeys (Reversionary Mode)
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
103
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM DISPLAY
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated anytime the initial
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
usable fuel is changed.
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for limitations.
In Reversionary Mode, the EIS System Display shows the engine, fuel calculations, electrical, and various
system parameters. Fuel calculations are based on the displayed fuel remaining and the fuel flow totalizer.
EIS
Accessing the EIS System Display:
1) Press the Engine Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the System Softkey.
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the Engine or Back Softkey.
1 Percent Power Indicator
Displays engine power as a percentage
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
(% Pwr)
2 Tachometer (RPM)
Shows propeller speed in revolutions per minute
3 Engine Manifold Pressure
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury to indicate engine
power
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Indicator (Man "Hg)
4 Fuel Calculation Group
(Fuel Calc)
5 Electrical Group
AFCS
(Electrical)
Displays engine hours, anti-ice gallons (optional) and oxygen pressure
(optional)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6 Miscellaneous (Misc)
Displays calculated fuel at destination, fuel used, fuel remaining, time
remaining, range (in nautical miles) and economy (in nautical miles
per gallon) based on the displayed fuel remaining and the fuel flow
totalizer
Displays the alternator and battery current in amperes and the
essential and main bus voltage
104
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SR20
SR22 Models with optional
Anti-Ice and Oxygen
Figure 3-21 System Display
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
105
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
106
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode A/C or Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram
description of the Audio Panels and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in the avionics system is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Multifunction Display (MFD)
• Mode S Transponder
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
• Control Unit
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Audio Panel
EIS
• Primary Flight Display (PFD)
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
system, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Mode S transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD) and also the Control Unit. The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The
data box displays the active four-digit code, mode, and a reply status (Figures 4-1 and 4-2).
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
107
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MFD/PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
2
3
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
5
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6
7
8
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-1 PFD Controls, COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, Transponder Code, and DME Tuning Window
108
1
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected and
decoded COM transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
2
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the tuning box (cyan box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and COM2.
3
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold
this key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active
frequency field.
4
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
5
DME Tuning Window – Displays DME frequency pairing mode. Display by pressing the DME Softkey.
6
ENT Key – Validates or confirms DME pairing mode and Auto-tune selection.
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
10
11
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9
12
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-2 MFD Controls and NAV Frequency Tuning Boxes
9
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
10
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
11
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the tuning box (cyan box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.
12
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the applicable transponder.
APPENDICES
8
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes, select DME modes, and
Auto-tune entries when DME Tuning Window or NRST Window is present. Press the FMS Knob to turn
the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in the window. The small knob selects
individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
AFCS
7
109
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
GMA 350/350C AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
24
25
10
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
11
20
21
GMA 350 Controls
23
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
22
26
GMA 350c (Bluetooth) Controls
AFCS
Figure 4-3 GMA 350/350c Audio Panel Controls
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
110
1
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Deactivates automatically and marker beacon audio is heard when the next marker beacon signal
is received. Also, stops play of recorded COM audio.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to enable/disable
monitored COM muting during primary COM reception.
3
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to enable/disable
monitored COM muting during primary COM reception.
4
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
5
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6
– Selects and deselects audio from a telephone or entertainment device connected to the Front Panel
Jack. Audio from a telephone connected to the rear of the audio panel is used if a device is not connected
to the Front Panel Jack. Press and hold to enable/disable
muting during reception.
Front Panel Jack – Used for an entertainment or telephone input.
12
MIC1 – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when this key
is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be added by
pressing the COM2 Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode. When in Split-COM
mode, the pilot is using COM1, the copilot is using the COM2.
13
MIC2 – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when this key
is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be added by
pressing the COM1 Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode. When in Split-COM
mode, the pilot is using COM1, the copilot is using the COM2.
14
PLAY – Press once to play the latest recorded memory block. Press while audio is playing begins playing
the previously recorded memory block. Each subsequent press thereafter plays the previous block of
memory.
15
AUX – When selected, audio from the DME (if equipped) can be heard.
16
PILOT – Controls the pilot intercom system. Press and hold to toggle 3D Audio on/off for all headset
positions.
17
COPLT – Controls the copilot intercom system. Press and hold to toggle copilot configuration between
crew and passenger.
18
PASS – Controls the passenger intercom system. Press and hold to enable/disable passenger muting
during reception.
19
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM, NAV, AUX, and MKR receiver audio can be heard
on the speaker. Press and hold for 2 seconds for Passenger Address (PA). The SPKR key flashes during
PA.
20
Cursor (CRSR) Control Knob – Turn to move the cursor (flashing white or blue annunciator) to the
desired source.
21
Volume (VOL) Control Knob – Turn the smaller knob to control volume or squelch of the selected source
(indicated by the flashing white or blue annunciator). When the volume control cursor is not active press
to switch to Blue-Select mode. If the volume control cursor is active, press twice (once to cancel the cursor,
twice to activate Blue-Select mode).
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
11
APPENDICES
Volume Indicator – Indicates volume/squelch setting relative to full scale.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
10
AFCS
MAN SQ – Manual Squelch annunciator. When lit, squelch is controlled manually.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MUS2 – Selects and deselects music entertainment audio. Press and hold to enable/disable MUS2 muting
during reception.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8
EIS
MUS1 – Selects and deselects music entertainment audio. Press and hold to enable/disable MUS1 muting
during reception.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7
111
22
Bluetooth® Connection Annunciator – (GMA 350c only) A flashing blue annunciator indicates the unit is
discoverable. A solid blue annunciator indicates an active Bluetooth connection.
23
 Key Annunciator – (GMA 350c only) Assigns the Bluetooth device to the  audio source. Press
the  key until the annunciator turns blue. The key annunciator will cycle from OFF to WHITE to
BLUE. WHITE selects the wired audio source and BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. NOTE: The
Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is assigned to an
audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and WHITE.
24
MUS1 Key Annunciator – (GMA 350c only) Assigns the Bluetooth device to the MUS1 audio source.
Press the MUS1 key until the annunciator turns blue. The key annunciator will cycle from OFF to WHITE
to BLUE. WHITE selects the wired audio source and BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. NOTE:
The Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is assigned to
an audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and WHITE.
25
MUS2 Key Annunciator – (GMA 350c only) Assigns the Bluetooth device to the MUS2 audio source.
Press the MUS2 key until the annunciator turns blue. The key annunciator will cycle from OFF to WHITE
to BLUE. WHITE selects the wired audio source and BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. NOTE:
The Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is assigned to
an audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and WHITE.
26
Control Knob Press and Hold – (GMA 350c only) Press and hold for two seconds to enable the GMA 350c
as discoverable for pairing. The Bluetooth Annunciator with flash to indicate that the unit is discoverable.
The unit will remain discoverable for 90 seconds or until a successful pair is established. Once a successful
pair is established, the audio “Bluetooth paired” is played.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
CONTROL UNIT
AFCS
The Control Unit is a pedestal-mounted interface allowing data entry, COM and NAV tuning, and transponder
control. Many procedures can be performed using the Control Unit rather than the MFD/PFD display bezel
controls. Annunciators above the CRS, XPDR, NAV, and COM keys are illuminated when their respective
control modes are selected.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
COM and NAV radio tuning can be accomplished from the control unit. The appropriate frequency box on
the selected display is outlined by a cyan selection box, which flashes for a few seconds to indicate control unit
activity. Selection of a different display control or radio tuning mode results in cancelation of the previous radio
tuning mode.
112
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
2
6
5
4
9
8
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
3
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
15
10
EIS
11
7
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
12
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
14
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
13
Figure 4-5 Control Unit
Tuning Selection
Box
AFCS
Figure 4-6 Frequency Tuning with the Control Unit
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
3
COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob – Dual concentric knob used for data entry in one of four modes. NAV/
COM Tuning Modes: Acts as the NAV or COM Knob. XPDR Mode: Acts as the XPDR Softkey.
4
BLUE Indicators – Indicates one of four modes is always active. Pressing the COM, NAV, CRS or XPDR
key selects that mode.
5
COM Key – Selects COM radio tuning mode on the Control Unit. The COM tuning box is outlined with
a cyan selection line when the COM frequency is active on the control unit (Figure 4‑5).
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
2
APPENDICES
MENU Key – Displays a list of options for accessing additional features or making setting changes.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1
113
6
FMS Knob – Activates the Control Unit cursor on pages that allow flight crew data input. It is used to
select DME modes, and Auto-tune entries when a NRST or WPT Window is present. Press the FMS Knob
to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in the window. The small knob
selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
7
HOME Key – Defaults to Navigation Map on the MFD.
8
XPDR Key – Places Control Unit in Transponder Mode. Transponder code entry can be performed with
either the number keypad or COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob.
9
NAV Key – Selects NAV radio tuning mode on the Control Unit. The NAV tuning box is outlined with a
cyan selection line when the NAV frequency is active on the control unit.
10
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus.
11
Frequency Transfer Key (EMERG) – Transfers the standby and active COM or NAV frequencies. Press
and hold for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the COM
active frequency field.
12
Alphanumeric Keys – Allows data entry (rather than using the COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob to select
characters/numbers). The numeric keys are white when entering data on the MFD and blue when entering
radio frequencies and transponder codes.
13
Decimal Key – Enters a decimal point.
14
BKSP Key – Moves cursor back one character space and removes last character entered.
15
IDENT Key – Pressing the IDENT key sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). A
green IDENT indication is displayed in the PFD mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of
18 seconds. A white IDENT indicator is displayed on the Control Unit.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
114
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.2 COM OPERATION
COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: When turning on the avionics for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
EIS
The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields displayed on the PFD; the two active frequencies are on
the left side and the two standby frequencies are on the right. The COM transceiver is selected for transmitting
by pressing the MIC Keys on the Audio Panel. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected for
transmission, audio from the other COM radio is muted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
An active COM frequency displayed in green indicates that the COM transceiver is selected on the Audio
Panel (MIC1 or MIC2 Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white indicate that no COM radio is
selected for transmitting (SPKR Key is selected and flashing on the Audio Panel).
Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in cyan and white. The standby frequency in the tuning field
is cyan. The other standby frequency is white.
Active
Fields
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GMA 350/350c
Standby
Fields
Tuning Field
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-7 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
115
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. On the Audio Panel, when the active COM is transmitting, the active transceiver MIC Key
Annunciator flashes approximately once per second.
During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow.
EIS
Receive Indicator
Transmit Indicator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GMA 350/350c
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Annunciator
Flashes During
Transmission
Figure 4-8 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of the MFD and PFD.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
AFCS
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
APPENDICES
Turn the VOL/SQ Knob to adjust
volume. Press the Knob to Turn
Automatic Squelch On or Off
Press the Frequency Transfer
Key to Transfer COM
Frequencies Between Active
and Standby Frequency Boxes
INDEX
Turn the COM Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
Figure 4-9 COM Frequency Tuning
116
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Manual frequency tuning from the Control Unit
1) Press the COM Key to select the COM frequency box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the COM/NAV CRS/XPDR Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for
MHz; small knob for kHz).
3) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
EIS
First, Press the COM Key to
Place the Tuning Selection Box
on the COM frequencies and
Activate COM tuning from the
COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Second, Turn the COM/NAV/CRS/
XPDR Knob or use Numeric Keys
to Enter a Frequency into the
COM Standby Frequency Field
(Blue Mode Only)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Third, Press the Frequency Transfer Key to
Move the Frequency to the Active Field.
Figure 4-10 Frequency Tuning from the Control Unit
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the small COM Knob to transfer the cyan frequency tuning field and Frequency Transfer Arrow
between the upper and lower radio frequency fields.
AFCS
Press the COM Knob to
Switch the Tuning Field From
One COM Radio to the Other
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-11 Switching COM Tuning Fields
QUICK-TUNING AND ACTIVATING 121.500 MHZ
APPENDICES
Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the COM radio selected for tuning (the one with the
transfer arrow). In the example shown, pressing the Audio Panel MIC2 Key (COM2 MIC Key on optional
GMA 347) activates the transceiver.
INDEX
Press for Two Seconds
to Load 121.500 MHz
Figure 4-12 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
117
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS,
WX)
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
• NRST – Nearest Airports Page
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
EIS
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers
and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Press the NRST Softkey to Open
the Nearest Airports Window
INDEX
Figure 4-13 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
118
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency field from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-13, 4-14, and 4-15).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency (Figure 4-15).
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the ENT Key to
Load a Highlighted
Frequency into
the COM Standby
Frequency Field
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-14 Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) On the Nearest Airports, Frequencies, or Airspaces page, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
AFCS
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest VOR Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Figure 4-15 Nearest Pages Menus
119
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On the WPT - Airport Information Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.
EIS
Selected
Airport
Identifier and
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Runway
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press ENT
Key to load
frequency into
COM Standby
Field. Cursor
then advances
to the next
frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press INFO-1
Softkey for
AIRPORT,
RUNWAYS, and
FREQUENCIES
Windows
AFCS
COM Frequency Loads into
PFD Standby Frequency Field
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-16 Airport Information Page and PFD Frequency Display
120
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Frequencies,
and NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-17 NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Airports, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
121
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FREQUENCY SPACING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing (118.000
to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected,
all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group.
EIS
8.33-kHz Channel
Spacing
25-kHz Channel
Spacing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-18 COM Channel Spacing
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
1) Select the AUX – System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
While the COM CONFIG Window is selected, the softkeys are blank.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
Figure 4-19 AUX – System Setup Page
122
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC SQUELCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch, press the VOL/SQ Knob. When Automatic
Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and
speaker, if selected. Pressing the VOL/SQ Knob again enables Automatic Squelch.
When Automatic Squelch is disabled, a white SQ appears next to the COM frequency.
EIS
Squelch
Indication
Press the COM VOL/
SQ Knob to turn off
Automatic Squelch.
Press again to restore
Automatic Squelch.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-20 Overriding Automatic Squelch
VOLUME
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knobs. Turning the knobs
clockwise increases volume, turning the knobs counterclockwise decreases volume. When adjusting volume,
the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after
the change.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
COM Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
Figure 4-21 COM Volume Level
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
123
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.3 NAV OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields displayed on the MFD; two standby fields and two active
fields. The active frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
EIS
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the cyan NAV tuning field and the Frequency Transfer
Arrow are placed by the active NAV Frequency. The active NAV frequency color changes to green.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Standby
Fields
Active
Fields
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Tuning Field
The NAV Radio is
Selected by Pressing
the CDI Softkey
Figure 4-22 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation
APPENDICES
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
as the source for the bearing pointer.
INDEX
The NAV Frequency Box displays the decoded Morse Code station identifier that is received from the
navigation source. Audio verification of the selected station identifier is still required, and can be accomplished
by selecting the corresponding NAV radio on the audio panel and pressing the NAV VOL/ID Knob. NAV radios
are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the NAV1, NAV2, or
124
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUX Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selection of the AUX Key selects and deselects the DME
(if equipped). Selected audio can be heard over the headset and the speakers (if selected).
GMA 350/350c
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 4-23 Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the PFDs.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
AFCS
Turn VOL/ID Knob to adjust
volume. Press Knob to Turn
Morse Code On or Off.
Press the Frequency Transfer Key to
Transfer NAV Frequencies Between
Active and Standby Frequency Fields
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the NAV Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Field
Figure 4-24 NAV Frequency Tuning
APPENDICES
Manual frequency tuning from the Control Unit
1) Press the NAV Key to select the NAV frequency box.
INDEX
2) Turn the COM/NAV CRS/XPDR Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box (large knob for MHz;
small knob for kHz).
3) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
125
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
First, Press the NAV Key to
Place the Tuning Selection Box
on the NAV frequencies and
Activate NAV tuning from the
COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob
EIS
Second, Turn the COM/NAV/CRS/
XPDR Knob or use Numeric Keys
to Enter a Frequency into the NAV
Standby Frequency Field
(Blue Mode Only)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Third, Press the Frequency
Transfer Key to Move the
Frequency to the Active Field.
Figure 4-25 Frequency Tuning from the Control Unit
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the small NAV Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
Press the NAV Knob to
Switch the Tuning Field From
One NAV Radio to the Other
AFCS
Figure 4-26 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes
VOR/LOC ID
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ID appears to the left of the active
NAV frequency.
APPENDICES
In the example shown, in order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV
Tuning Box. To turn off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 by pressing
the small NAV Knob and pressing the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
The Morse Code Identifier
for the VORs is On
Station
Identifiers
INDEX
Figure 4-27 NAV Radio ID Indication
126
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VOLUME
NAV Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/ID Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains
for two seconds after the change.
EIS
NAV Volume Level
Remains for Two Seconds
Figure 4-28 NAV Volume Levels
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• WPT – Airport Information
• NRST – Nearest VOR
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• WPT – VOR Information
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-27, 4-28, and 4-29).
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
AFCS
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) On the Nearest VOR, Nearest Airspaces, and Nearest Airports pages, press the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor
on the NAV frequency (Figure 4-29).
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
APPENDICES
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List of
Frequencies
INDEX
Press the ENT
Key to Load
a Highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Field
Figure 4-29 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
Or:
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
127
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest VOR Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-30 Nearest Pages Menus
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
INDEX
Press the ENT
Key to Load
the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
Press the VOR Softkey to Place the
Cursor on the VOR Identifier
Press the FREQ Softkey to Place
the Cursor on the VOR Frequency
Figure 4-31 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
128
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airports,
WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-32 NRST – Nearest Frequencies, WPT – VOR Information, WPT – Airport Information, and
NRST – Nearest Airports Pages
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
129
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode
as the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the GPS Navigation Section for
details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
EIS
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 or NAV2
active frequency fields. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 or NAV2 active frequency fields are
transferred to standby.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
or NAV2 standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located on the Audio Panel and to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD. Operation of the two
marker beacon indications may not be synchronized.
130
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Middle Marker
Indication
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Outer Marker
Indication
Inner Marker
Indication
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-33 Marker Beacon Annunciations on the PFD
GMA 350/350c
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-34 Marker Beacon Keys and Annunciator Lights
AFCS
The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected. Marker beacon audio is not heard when the annunciator is off or when the
annunciator is on with the marker beacon audio muted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turning Marker Beacon Audio On
With the MKR/MUTE annunciator off, press the MKR/MUTE Key to enable marker beacon audio.
Muting Marker Beacon Audio
APPENDICES
During marker beacon audio reception, press the MKR/MUTE Key to mute the audio. The MKR/MUTE
annunciator remains lit, but the current marker tone is silenced. Audio muting deactivates automatically and
marker beacon audio is heard when the next marker beacon signal is received.
Deselecting Marker Beacon Audio
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
To deselect marker beacon audio, press the MKR/MUTE Key twice during marker beacon reception (once to
mute, once more to deselect) or once if a marker beacon signal is not detected.
131
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
DME TUNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.
NOTE: When turning on the Avionics for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning
and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
The PFD tunes the optional DME transceiver. The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV
frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The DME Tuning Window is located to the right of the HSI in the lower right corner of the PFD. The DME
transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the DME Tuning Window. Pressing the DME
Softkey switches the DME Tuning Window on and off.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DME
Modes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-35 DME Tuning Window
The following DME transceiver pairings can be selected:
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
AFCS
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
APPENDICES
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the tuning entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the DME Tuning Window.
INDEX
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME information window.
132
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.4 GTX 335/345 MODE S TRANSPONDER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GTX 335 and GTX 345 Mode S Transponders provide Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and
reply capabilities. Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
EIS
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
• Transponder capability reporting
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
• Extended squitter – The extended squitter is transmitted periodically and contains information such as altitude
(barometric and GPS), GPS position, and aircraft identification. The purpose of extended squitter is to provide
aircraft position and identification to ADS-B Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) and other aircraft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
AFCS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is selected, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: STBY, ON,
ALT, VFR, CODE, IDENT, BACK.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the CODE Softkey is selected, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,
BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Selecting the numbered softkeys in sequence enters
the transponder code. If an error is made, selecting the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the
previous digit. Selecting the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.
Selecting the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Selecting the BACK
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
APPENDICES
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on either PFD. Code entry must be completed with either
the softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Selecting the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
133
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-36 XPDR Softkeys (PFD)
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes).
The STBY, ON, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by selecting the XPDR Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Select the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Select the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
AFCS
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the transponder
is powered and new codes can be entered, but no replies or squitters are transmitted.. When Standby is
selected, a white STBY indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data
Box.
APPENDICES
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
INDEX
Figure 4-37 Standby Mode
134
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MANUAL ON MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ON Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ON Softkey. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies as well as transmission of acquisition and extended squitters, including ADS-B out. Mode S replies
will not include altitude information. Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited.
The ON indication and transponder code in the Transponder Data Box will appear green while airborne
and white while on the ground.
ON Mode
(No Altitude Reporting)
EIS
Airborne (Green Indication)
On-Ground (White Indication)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-38 ON Mode
ALTITUDE MODE (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The white Altitude Reporting Mode is normally selected automatically when the aircraft is on the ground.
White Altitude Mode may also be selected manually by pressing the ALT Softkey while on the ground. White
Altitude Mode generates Mode S replies to discrete interrogations as well as transmission of acquisition and
extended squitters, including ADS-B out. Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S all-call replies are inhibited.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If Altitude Mode is selected while on the ground, a white ALT indication and transponder code appear in
the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
On-Ground ALT
Mode (Mode C
Altitude Reporting
Inhibited)
AFCS
Figure 4-39 Altitude Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The green Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Green Altitude
Mode may also be selected manually by pressing the ALT Softkey while airborne. Green Altitude Mode
generates Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S replies as well as transmissions of acquisition and extended squitters
including ADS-B out.
APPENDICES
If Altitude Mode is selected while airborne, a green ALT indication and transponder code appear in the
mode field of the Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are
provided with pressure altitude information.
Airborne ALT Mode
(Mode C Altitude
Reporting)
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Figure 4-40 Altitude Mode
135
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
REPLY STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
Reply to
Interrogation
EIS
Figure 4-41 Reply Indication
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
1) Select the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Select the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Select the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be selected within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Selecting the
BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entering
a Code
Figure 4-42 Entering a Code
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
AFCS
1) Select the XPDR and the CODE Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the first two code digits.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
APPENDICES
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
INDEX
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Two Code
Digits at a Time
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete
Code Entry
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Code Field
Figure 4-43 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob
136
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Entering a transponder code with the Control Unit
1) Press the XPDR Key to select the transponder function.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Enter a Code with the Numeric Keypad. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been entered, the transponder
code becomes active. (Blue Mode Only)
Or:
1) Press the XPDR Key to select the transponder function on the COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob.
2) Turn the small COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob to enter the first two code digits.
EIS
3) Turn the large COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
First, Press the XPDR Key to
Select Transponder Code
Entry from the COM/NAV/
CRS/XPDR Knob
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Second, Turn the COM/NAV/
CRS/XPDR Knob to Enter a
Code, Small Knob Enters Code
Digits, Large Knob Moves
Cursor to the Next Code Field.
AFCS
Third, Press the ENT Key
to Complete Code Entry
Or Enter a Code with
the Numeric Keypad
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-44 Entering a Code with the Control Unit
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
137
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
VFR CODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey or XPDR key on the GCU is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically
displayed in the code field of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous
identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
EIS
VFR Code
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-45 VFR Code
IDENT FUNCTION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the PFD IDENT Softkey or Control Unit IDENT key sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic
Control (ATC). The indication distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic
controller’s screen. The PFD IDENT Softkey appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT
Softkey is pressed, a green IDENT indication is displayed in the PFD mode field of the Transponder Data Box
for a duration of 18 seconds. A white IDENT indicator is displayed on the Control Unit.
After the Ident Softkey is pressed, the system reverts to the top-level softkeys.
IDNT
Indication
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Press the
IDENT Softkey
to Initiate the
ID Function
IDNT
Indication
APPENDICES
Press the
IDENT key to
Initiate the ID
Function
INDEX
Figure 4-46 IDENT Softkey and Indication
138
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
POWER-UP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
EIS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use. Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset
channel output to ground. While this does not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural
headset hears only the left channel in both ears. If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions,
any other passenger using a stereo headset hears audio in the left ear only.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SPEAKER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects the cabin
speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot, traffic,
altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for
volume adjustment.
GMA 350/350c
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-47 Speaker Key
AFCS
PASSENGER ADDRESS MODE (PA MODE)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press and hold the SPKR Key for 2 seconds to initiate Passenger Address Mode (if configured). PA Mode is
annunciated by a rapid blinking of the SPKR annunciator. When in PA Mode the crew can use the PTT “Pushto-Talk” button to deliver announcements over the speaker, to the passenger headsets, or both depending on
configuration.
APPENDICES
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest block.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
139
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
The PLAY Key controls the play function. Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory
block. Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block.
Each subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
EIS
GMA 350/350c
Figure 4-48 Play Key
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
INTERCOM SYSTEM (ICS) WITH THE GMA 350/350C
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The GMA 350/350c includes a six-position intercom system (ICS), two MUSIC inputs, and one telephone/
entertainment input for the pilot, copilot and passengers. The intercom provides Pilot, Copilot, and Passenger
audio isolation.
Figure 4-49 Intercom Controls
AFCS
Press the PILOT, COPLT, and/or PASS Keys to enable intercom audio for the selected position. If the
annunciators are lit, those positions will share intercom audio. If an annunciator is NOT lit that position is
isolated from the others.
COPILOT CONFIGURED AS CREW OR PASSENGER
NOTE: When the copilot position is configured as a passenger, the COPLT Key is disabled and the copilot
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
headset is treated as a ‘passenger’ for intercom and entertainment audio distribution.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The copilot position can be configured as crew (COPLT Key enabled) or as a passenger (COPLT Key
disabled). Pressing and holding the COPLT Key toggles the copilot position configuration between passenger
and crew. The aural message “Copilot Configured as Passenger” or “Copilot Configured as Crew” is
heard.
140
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERCOM MODES
NOTE: In the following modes the copilot position is configured as crew.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All Intercom Mode
In ‘All Intercom’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear each other and hear the aircraft audio.
Aircraft Audio
EIS
PILOT
COPLT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PASS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ICS Keys
Mode Operation
Pilot Isolate Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In ‘Pilot Isolate’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear the aircraft audio. The Copilot and
Passengers also hear each other.
Aircraft Audio
AFCS
PILOT
COPLT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PASS
APPENDICES
ICS Keys
Mode Operation
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
141
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Passenger/Crew Isolate Mode
In ‘Passenger/Crew Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio and each other. The
Passengers hear each other.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Aircraft Audio
EIS
PILOT
ICS Keys
PASS
COPLT
Mode Operation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Copilot Isolate Mode
In ‘Copilot Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Passengers hear the aircraft audio and each other. The Copilot has
the option to use Split-COM mode.
Split-COM Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft Audio
COPLT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PILOT
AFCS
PASS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ICS Keys
Mode Operation
All Isolate Mode
In ‘All Isolate’ mode the Pilot hears the aircraft audio. The Copilot has the option to use Split-COM
mode. The Passengers hear each other.
APPENDICES
Aircraft Audio Split-COM
INDEX
PILOT
ICS Keys
142
COPLT
PASS
Mode Operation
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pilot & Copilot Isolate Mode
In ‘Pilot & Copilot Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Passengers hear the aircraft audio. The Copilot has the
option to use Split-COM mode.
PILOT
COPLT
EIS
ICS Keys
PASS
Split-COM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Aircraft Audio
Mode Operation
Pilot & Passenger Isolate Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In ‘Pilot & Passenger Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio. The Passengers hear
each other.
Aircraft Audio
PASS
Mode Operation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ICS Keys
COPLT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PILOT
Copilot & Passenger Isolate Mode
In ‘Copilot & Passenger Isolate’ mode the Pilot can hear the aircraft audio. The Copilot has the option to
use Split-COM mode. The Passengers hear each other.
ICS Keys
COPLT
PASS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PILOT
AFCS
Aircraft Audio Split-COM
Mode Operation
APPENDICES
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
The VOL/CRSR Knob controls selection and volume or manual squelch adjustment for audio sources that
may not be adjustable anywhere else in the system. The small knob controls the volume or squelch. Turning
the large knob activates and/or moves the cursor (flashing white annunciator/or flashing blue annunciator in
Blue-Select Mode) to select the audio source to adjust. The cursor will time-out after a few seconds and the
position of the cursor will always default back to the PILOT Key. Pressing the small knob cancels the cursor.
143
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Blue-Select Mode (Telephone/Entertainment Distribution)
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The music (MUS1/MUS2) and telephone/entertainment (
) audio are distributed using the BlueSelect Mode. The following example indicates that the pilot, copilot, and passengers will all hear the
telephone/entertainment audio.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-50 Blue-Select Mode (Telephone/Entertainment Distribution)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The annunciator over the
Key will be flashing blue. Any combination of the annunciators over the
PILOT, COPLT, and PASS buttons may be blue. Select the desired button to turn the blue annunciator on
or off to distribute the telephone/entertainment audio to selected crew/passenger positions. Turn the large
knob to select MUS1 or MUS2 and select the crew positions to receive the music audio.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Blue-Select Mode is entered by pressing the small knob when the volume control cursor (flashing
white annunciator) is not active. If the volume control cursor is active, press the small knob twice. The first
press will cancel the volume control cursor, the second will activate Blue-Select Mode.
Selecting any key other than PILOT, COPLT, PASS, MUS1, MUS2, or
will cancel Blue-Select
Mode. Pressing the small knob will also cancel Blue-Select Mode. After approximately ten seconds with no
input, the Blue-Select Mode will automatically cancel.
Adjusting Intercom Volume
AFCS
When the cursor is on PILOT, COPLT, or PASS, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the intercom volume for
the listener.
Adjusting Speaker Volume
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the cursor is on SPKR, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the speaker volume of the selected
sources (COM, NAV, AUX, MKR). Alert volumes are not affected by the speaker volume control knob.
Adjusting MKR, AUX,
, and MUSIC Volume
, MUS1 or MUS2, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the individual
INDEX
APPENDICES
When the cursor is on MKR, AUX,
volume of the selected source.
144
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Adjusting Manual Squelch
When the cursor is on MAN SQ, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the ICS Squelch Threshold (the
volume level that must be exceeded to be heard over the intercom).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Manual Squelch Annunciator; Off for
Automatic Squelch, On for Manual Squelch
Relative Volume/
Squelch Scale
EIS
Volume or Manual Squelch
Cursor
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-51 Volume/Squelch Control
SPLIT COM MODE WITH THE GMA 350/350C
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation
of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM frequencies are too close together, interference may be heard
during transmission on the other radio.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate
radios. In Split COM mode, the pilot is uses COM1 and the copilot is uses COM2.
Pressing both MIC Keys simultaneously initiates Split COM Mode (i.e., COM1/COM2). The respective
COM1/MIC1 or COM2/MIC2 annunciators are illuminated indicating Split COM operation. Split COM
operation is cancelled by pressing one of the selected MIC Keys again.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-52 Split COM Selected
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
145
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3D AUDIO (GMA 350/350C ONLY)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Because this feature uses different signals for left and right channels, it requires wiring for stereo intercom
and stereo headsets. If 3D audio is activated when mono headsets are in use, the listener will still hear all audio
sources; however, there is no benefit from location separation.
3D Audio is useful when multiple audio sources are present. By using different responses in each ear, 3D
audio processing creates the illusion that each audio source is coming from a unique location or seat position.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
With a single COM selected and 3D Audio enabled, the listener hears the audio source at the 12 o’clock
position. If both COMs are selected, the listener hears COM1 at 11 o’clock and COM2 at the 1 o’clock position.
All other intercom positions are processed to sound like their relative seat location. By default, the GMA350
assumes the pilot sits in the left seat. A Garmin authorized service center can make changes to the default
configuration.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling 3D Audio
INDEX
APPENDICES
Press and hold the PILOT Key to toggle 3D audio processing on and off for all headset positions. When
3D Audio is enabled, the aural message “3D audio left” is heard in the left ear followed by “3D audio right”
in the right ear. If the aural messages are not heard in only the left and then the right ear respectively, the
cause may be aircraft wiring or headset settings. Refer to the following table if a headset or aircraft wiring
problem is suspected.
146
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Set mono/stereo switch on headset to ‘stereo’
Set mono/stereo switch on headset to ‘stereo’
3)
“3D audio right” message 1)
heard in both ears. “3D
audio left” not heard
“3D audio left” message 1)
heard in right ear only
followed by “3D audio
right” message heard in
left ear only
2)
Incorrect aircraft wiring (right 1)
channel used for mono instead
of left or left/right swapped)
Stereo headset is on backwards 1)
Incorrect aircraft wiring (left/
right channels swapped)
2)
If after checking solutions #1 and #2 see a service
center as soon as possible to inspect/correct wiring.
This wiring fault can cause fail-safe audio not to
function.
See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe
audio not to function.
Verify correct orientation from the left/right indication
on each side of the headset or the position of the
boom mic (usually attached on left side). If the
headset is backwards left/right position information
will be swapped.
See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe
audio not to function.
“3D audio left” message 1)
heard in left ear only, no
audio heard in right ear.
“3D audio right” message 1)
heard in right ear only, no
audio heard in left ear
Aircraft wired for mono
intercom
1)
AFCS
2)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Stereo headset in use with
mono/stereo switch set to
mono
Incorrect aircraft wiring (left/
right shorted together)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Mono headset in use
EIS
“3D audio left” message 1)
heard in both ears,
2)
followed by “3D audio
right” message heard in
both ears
3)
See a service center to wire the installation for stereo
headsets.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Incorrect aircraft wiring (right 1)
channel used for mono instead
of left, or left/right swapped)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Stereo headset in use with
2)
mono/stereo switch set to
‘mono’
Aircraft wiring has left audio 3)
wired to both left and right
channels of stereo headset jack
If after checking solutions #1 and #2 see a service
center as soon as possible to inspect/correct wiring.
This wiring fault can cause fail-safe audio not to
function.
Use a stereo headset
3)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Symptom(s)
“3D audio left” message 1)
heard in both ears.
“3D audio right” message 2)
not heard
3D Audio Troubleshooting
Cause(s)
Solution(s)
Mono headset in use
1) Use a stereo headset
See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe
audio not to function.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
147
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS WITH THE GMA 350
The GMA 350/350c provides three stereo telephone/entertainment inputs:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• The telephone/entertainment (
) Key controls a telephone or entertainment device connected to the
rear of the audio panel or to the Front Panel Jack. For GSR 56 equipped aircraft, the Iridium phone audio
is connected to the rear input of the audio panel. To use the Iridium phone, ensure there is no other audio
source plugged into the Front Panel Jack.
EIS
• The MUS1 and MUS2 Key controls the Entertainment Music audio input. External audio jacks can also be
used as an entertainment input. GDL 69 (SiriusXM Radio) audio, if equipped, is wired to the MUS1 and
MUS2 inputs. The Front Panel Jack does not disable audio connected to the MUS1 and MUS2 inputs.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Front Panel Jack can be used as an entertainment input or a telephone input. Plugging a device into the
Front Panel Jack will disable any audio source connected to the rear telephone/entertainment jack (i.e. GSR
56, if so equipped). The Front Panel Jack is a 3.5-mm stereo jack that is compatible with popular portable
entertainment devices such as MP3s, CD players, and cell phones. The headphone outputs of the entertainment
devices are plugged into the Front Panel Jack.
Distribution of the entertainment inputs are configured in Blue-Select Mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TELEPHONE AND ENTERTAINMENT MUTING
Telephone and entertainment muting can be enabled or disabled by the user, however it is always muted
during alerts.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling Muting
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Press and hold the MUS1, MUS2, or (
) Key for two seconds to toggle muting on and off. The
aural message “Mute Music on Reception Enabled/Disabled” or “Mute Tel and Jack on Reception
Enabled/Disabled” is heard.
148
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
BLUETOOTH® (GMA 350c ONLY)
NOTE: Pairing is only necessary during the first attempt to connect a Bluetooth device to the GMA 350c.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Once paired, the GMA 350c and the device will connect automatically.
PAIRING A BLUETOOTH DEVICE WITH THE GMA 350c
EIS
Press and hold the inner knob for two seconds. The Bluetooth Annunciator flashes to indicate the unit
is discoverable and the aural message “Bluetooth discoverable” is heard. The GMA 350c will remain
discoverable for 90 seconds or until a successful pair is established. Once paired, the Bluetooth Annunciator
turns steady blue and the aural message “Bluetooth connected/paired” is heard.
ASSIGNING AN AUDIO SOURCE TO THE BLUETOOTH DEVICE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the , MUS1, or MUS2 key until the annunciator turns blue (the audio from the Bluetooth source
will not be heard until this step is complete). The key annunciator cycles OFF-WHITE-BLUE. WHITE
selects the wired audio source. BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. The BLUE source assignment will
persist through Bluetooth audio connection disruptions.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is
assigned to an audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and
WHITE.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Bluetooth audio will maintain a separate volume level and Blue Select distribution from the wired audio
source. If the Bluetooth connection is supporting a phone call, all intercom positions listening to that source
can also speak on the call through the headset MICs.
ADDITIONAL BLUETOOTH CONTROL FUNCTIONS
•
Press and hold the inner knob for 10 seconds to clear the memory of paired devices (up to 10 are stored).
Once cleared, the aural message “Bluetooth list cleared” is heard. This function is used as a troubleshooting
method when a device is not pairing, or to remove a device that is no longer needed.
APPENDICES
Press and hold the inner knob for 5 seconds to turn off the Bluetooth radio. The aural message “Bluetooth
off” is heard. This function electrically turns off the radio, not just the audio source selection. In the event
that Bluetooth radio interference with communication or navigation equipment is suspected, the Bluetooth
radio can be powered off without powering off the entire audio panel. A subsequent 5 second press and
hold turns the radio back on.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
•
AFCS
In addition to the 2 second press and hold of the inner knob discussed above, the knob has two additional
functions that are intended to be seldom or never used. The following functions are available if needed for
troubleshooting:
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
149
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is pressed, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot.
EIS
If manual squelch is set to full open, background noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM
transmissions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GMA 350/350C PREFLIGHT
After powering up the system, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well as
prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a pilot
boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Manual Squelch Annunciator; Off for Automatic Squelch, Relative Volume/
Squelch Scale
On for Manual Squelch
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Volume or Manual
Squelch
Cursor
Intercom Annunciators
AFCS
Figure 4-53 Audio Panel Controls
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Verify that the PILOT , COPLT and PASS annunciators are lit.
2) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV) to a suitable level.
3) Use the Blue-Select Mode to distribute the telephone/entertainment (
), MUS1, and MUS2 appropriately.
APPENDICES
4) Use the VOL/CRSR Knobs to adjust the intercom volumes to the desired level.
INDEX
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
150
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Abnormal operation includes equipment failures of the avionics components and failure of associated equipment,
including switches and external devices.
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio is not available on the speaker during fail-safe operation.
EIS
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck microphone.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains stuck.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-54 Stuck Microphone Alert
COM TUNING FAILURE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a amber X may appear on the
frequency display.
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
AFCS
Figure 4-60 COM Tuning Failure
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
151
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
152
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
Perspective+ is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section of
the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the system.
EIS
The most prominent part of the system are the two full color displays: a Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
a Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors
is displayed on the PFD and the MFD. See examples in the Figure 5-1, Figure 5-2 and Figure 5-3. Detailed
descriptions of flight management functions are discussed later in this section.
A brief description of the flight management data on the PFD and MFD follows.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), RNAV Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V,
L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, or LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)). L/VNAV, LP, and LPV approach service levels are only
available with SBAS. L/VNAV will be flown as Baro VNAV when SBAS is not available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Inset Map is a small version of the Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of the PFD.
When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The Inset Map is
displayed by pressing the Map/HSI Softkey, pressing the Layout Softkey, then pressing the Inset Map Softkey.
Selecting the Map Off Softkey removes the Inset Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The HSI Map is also a small version of the Navigation Map and is displayed in the center of the HSI. The HSI
Map is displayed by pressing the Map/HSI Softkey, pressing the Layout Softkey, then pressing the HSI Map
Softkey. Selecting the Map Off Softkey removes the HSI Map.
AFCS
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data for the Inset Map or the HSI Map can be reduced by
pressing the Map/HSI Softkey on the PFD, then pressing the Detail Softkey. The amount of displayed data for the
Navigation Map can be reduced by pressing the Detail Softkey on the MFD. The Navigation Map can be oriented
three different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
APPENDICES
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. Range is indicated in the upper left
quadrant of the range ring shown around the aircraft icon. This indicated range is the range from the aircraft icon
to the range ring, and roughly half the range to the top edge of the displayed map. To change the map range on
any map, turn the corresponding Joystick counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the
range.
INDEX
The Direct-to Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
153
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Navigation Status Box
Current Track Indicator
EIS
Navigation Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Inset Map
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
- References Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD (Inset Map)
Navigation Status Box
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Mode
Current Track Indicator
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
- References Window
AFCS
HSI Map
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD (HSI Map)
154
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport Info
Navigation Status Box
Map Orientation
Navigation Map
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Estimated Time Enroute
- Fuel Over Destination
- Identifier
- Distance
- Bearing
Navigation Page Title
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
EIS
Flight Plan Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-3 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
Figure 5-4 PFD Navigation Status Box
AFCS
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD -> KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn right to
021˚ in 8 seconds’)
• Distance (DIS) and Estimate Time Enroute (ETE) to the next waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g.,
‘TOD within 1 minute’)
Symbol
Description
Active Leg
Symbol
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The symbols used in the PFD status bar are:
Description
Left Holding Pattern
Vector to Final
Right Procedure Turn
Right DME Arc/Radius to Fix Leg
Left Procedure Turn
Left DME Arc/Radius to Fix Leg
APPENDICES
Direct-to
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Right Holding Pattern
155
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of the
following items:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
BRG
DIS
DTK
END
ESA
ETA
ETE
FOB
GS
ISA
LDG
MSA
TAS
TKE
TRK
VSR
XTK
Bearing
Distance
Desired Track
Endurance
Enroute Safe Altitude
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time Enroute
Fuel on Board
Ground Speed
ISA Relative Temperature
ETA at Final Destination
Minimum Safe Altitude
True Air Speed
Track Angle Error
Track
Vertical Speed Required
Crosstrack Error
Figure 5-5 MFD Navigation Status Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box
on the Aux-System Setup 1 Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Status Box:
1) Select the System Setup 1 Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list to select the desired data.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the ENT Key. Selecting the Defaults Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.
156
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing
to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other
pertinent information)
• Fuel range ring
• Flight plan legs
• User waypoints
• Track vector
• Terrain
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.)
with names
• Map range
•Wind direction and speed
• Map orientation
• Icons for enabled map features
• Aircraft icon (representing present position)
• Obstacle data
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map displays are used extensively in the system to provide situational awareness in flight. Most system maps
can display the following information:
The information in this section applies to any displays that show the navigation map.
MAP ORIENTATION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Maps are shown in one of four different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up, desired track up, or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper
right corner of the map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-6 Map Orientation
APPENDICES
• North up (NORTH UP) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
• Track up (TRK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Heading up (HDG UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
157
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. All other displays (except the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD Inset Map) that show navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
PFD Inset Map is always Heading Up (if heading is invalid, then track up).
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Map Settings
Selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-7 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Map Settings Window.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘Orientation’ field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Group Selection
Orientation Field
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
North Up Above Field
Figure 5-8 Map Settings Menu Window - Map Group
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
INDEX
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
158
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The map can be configured to switch automatically to a north up orientation when the map range reaches a
minimum range.
Enabling/disabling Auto North Up and selecting the minimum switching range:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Highlight the ‘North Up Above’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MAP RANGE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in
the lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. When the
map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the system to accurately represent the map,
a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
AFCS
Auto Zoom On
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-9 Map Range
AUTO ZOOM
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Auto zoom allows the system to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on Map Setup Window). Auto zoom is suspended while the map pointer is active.
159
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, all navigation maps automatically adjust to the smallest map range
clearly showing the potential impact points If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any map page capable of
displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly showing the traffic
advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom range based on the
active waypoint.
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFDs and MFD. Control of the
ranges at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times
(set on the Map Setup Window for the Map Group). These settings determines the minimum and maximum
distance to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
EIS
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the Map Setup Page for the Map Group) determines how long auto
zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(2000 nm).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
Auto Zoom:
Off, MFD Only, PFD Only, All On
APPENDICES
Manual Range Override
Expiration Time
Maximum Look Forward Time
Minimum Look Forward Time
INDEX
Figure 5-10 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group, Auto Zoom
160
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Configuring automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Auto Zoom’ on/off field, and select ‘Off’ or ‘On’ using the small FMS Knob.
EIS
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘Auto Zoom’ display selection
field.
7) Select ‘MFD’, ‘PFD’, or ‘ALL’ using the small FMS Knob.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘Max Look FWD’ field. Times
are from zero to 999 minutes.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
10) Repeat step 9 for ‘Min Look FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘Time Out’ (zero to 99 minutes).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
11) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
MAP PANNING
Map panning allows the pilot to:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range by panning the map
(Joystick)
• Highlight and select locations on the map (Joystick)
• Display an information screen for a selected airport, NAVAID (VOR, Intersection, NDB), user waypoint, or
airspace (ENT Key)
AFCS
• Graphically create user waypoints (ENT Key)
• Measure the bearing and distance from the aircraft present position to any location on the navigation map, or
between any two points on the navigation map (MENU Key)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Review airspace, obstacle and airway information in a pop-up window on the navigation map (Joystick)
When the panning function is selected by pressing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
APPENDICES
Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
161
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Pointer Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Map Pointer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Information about Point
of Interest
Map Pointer on
POI
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
162
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown at the top of the display. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Information about
Airspace
Map Pointer on
Airspace
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airspace
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Waypoint Information Page for the selected waypoint.
3) Press the Go Back Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the Waypoint Information Page and return to
the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAVAID
Information
APPENDICES
INDEX
GO BACK Softkey
Figure 5-14 Navigation Map - Information Window - NAVAID
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
163
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Viewing airspace information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
3) ‘Review Airspaces’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace
Information Page for the selected airspace.
EIS
4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the Airspace Information Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airspace
Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map - Information Window - Airspace
164
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).
EIS
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
Measurement
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, press the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page
Menu and press the ENT Key.
Pointer Lat/Long
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Measurement Line
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-16 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
165
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TOPOGRAPHY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar to
aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following procedures.
Topographic data can also be displayed on the selectable profile map at the bottom of the navigation map.
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
EIS
Navigation Map
Black Background
TER Softkey 'Off'
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Topographic Data
on Profile Map
TER Softkey
'Topo'
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TOPO Off
TOPO On
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
Displaying/removing topographic data on all MFD pages displaying navigation maps:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the MAP Opt Softkey.
2) Select the TER Softkey until ‘Topo’ is shown on the softkey to display topographic data.
3) Select the TER Softkey until ‘Off’ is shown on the softkey to remove topographic data from the navigation map.
When topographic data is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
AFCS
Displaying/removing topographic data on the PFD Inset Map or the HSI Map:
1) Select the Map/HSI Softkey .
2) Select the Topo Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the Topo Softkey again to remove topographic data from the PFD Inset Map or the HSI Map. When
topographic data is removed from the PFD Map or HSI Map, all navigation data is presented on a black
background.
INDEX
Topo Data On
Topo Data Off
Figure 5-18 PFD Inset Map - Topographic Data
166
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Topo Data On
Topo Data Off
Figure 5-19 HSI Map - Topographic Data
EIS
Displaying/removing topographic data using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ field.
6) Select ‘Topo’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain Display
On/Topo/Off
Terrain Display
Range
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map Settings Menu - Terrain Display Setup
The terrain data range is the maximum map range on which terrain data is displayed.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
167
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
Selecting a topographical data range (Terrain Display):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
EIS
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ range field. Ranges are from 1 nm to 1000 nm.
6) To change the Terrain Display range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and current elevation values.
Maximum Displayed Elevation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Minimum Displayed Elevation
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - TOPO SCALE
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (Topo Scale):
APPENDICES
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group and select the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘Topo Scale’ field.
INDEX
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
168
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Topo Scale
On/Off
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-22 Navigation Map Settings Menu - Topo Scale Setup
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MAP SYMBOLS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the Detail Softkey is also discussed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LAND SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols
Symbol
User Waypoint
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
25
40
AFCS
Highways and Roads
400
International Highway (Freeway)
50
400
US Highway (National Highway)
15
150
State Highway (Local Highway)
2.5
100
4
25
7.5
25
Local Road (Local Road)
Railroads (RAILROAD)
N/A
APPENDICES
50
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Interstate Highway (Freeway)
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
169
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Land Symbols
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Large City (> 200,000)
100
1000
Medium City (> 50,000)
Small City (> 5,000)
50
25
400
100
State/Province
400
1000
River/Lake
75
100
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
1
1000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aviation Symbols
Symbol
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Large Airport (Longest Runway ≥ 8100 ft)
Medium Airport (8100 ft > Longest Runway ≥ 5000 ft)
Small Airport (Longest Runway < 5000 ft)
(Medium Airport if it has a tower frequency)
Taxiways (SafeTaxi)
25
150
1.5
5
7.5
150
N/A
N/A
Intersection (INT)
25
40
Non-directional Beacon (NDB)
25
50
VOR
50
250
N/A
N/A
25
1000
250
1000
1000
1000
See Additional Features
Runway Extension
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Missed Approach Preview On/Off (Missed APPR)
VOR Compass Rose On/Off
N/A
N/A
Visual Reporting Point (VRP)
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
APPENDICES
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
100
1000
50
400
See Hazard Avoidance
VNAV Constraints
INDEX
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
170
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRSPACE SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the airspace menu:
Symbol
Smart Airspace On/Off
Airspace Altitude Labels (Airspace ALT LBL) On/Off
N/A
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Class D Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling)
N/A
N/A
Class B Airspace/TMA (Class B/TMA)
50
150
Class C Airspace/TCA (Class C/TCA)
50
100
Class D Airspace (Class D)
10
100
Restricted Area (RESTRICTED)
50
100
Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]
50
250
Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ)
50
250
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Class C Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling/floor)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
N/A
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
N/A
EIS
Class B Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling/floor)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airspace Symbols
AFCS
Table 5-3 Airspcae Symbol Information
SYMBOL SETUP
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
All navigation maps can display land, aviation and airspace symbols. Symbol types (e.g. runway extensions,
railroads) can be removed individually. The range sets the maximum range at which items appear on the
display. For example, enabling “Runway Extension” displays a dashed line on the map extending from each
runway of an airport in the flight plan when the range is set at or below the value of the map settings option.
APPENDICES
Setting up the ‘Land’, ‘Aviation’ or ‘Airspace’ group items:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired group.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
171
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired option.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired setting (e.g. On/Off or maximum range).
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option and move the cursor to the next item.
8) Repeat steps 5-7 as necessary.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Item On or Off
Maximum Display Range
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-23 Navigation Map Settings Menu - Land Group Setup
Maximum Display Range
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Item On or Off
INDEX
Figure 5-24 Navigation Map Settings Menu - Aviation Group Setup
172
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Item On or Off
Maximum Display Range
EIS
Figure 5-25 Navigation Map Settings Menu - Airspace Group Setup
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MAP DECLUTTER
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Declutter Level
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DCLTR Softkey
Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 5-26 Navigation Map - Declutter Level Indications
Decluttering the MFD navigation map:
AFCS
Select the Detail Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown. With
each softkey selection, another level of map information is removed.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
3) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Decluttering the PFD Inset Map or HSI Map:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Select the Detail Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
173
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Table 5-3 lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents map items
decluttered for each level of detail.
Item
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Data Link Radar Precipitation
Data Link Lightning
Graphical METARs
Airports
Safe Taxi
Runway Labels
TFRs
Restricted
MOA (Military)
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
Obstacles
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries
Declutter-1 Declutter-2 Declutter-3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 5-3 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level
174
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRWAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways
(Victor Airways or T-Routes) start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up to 18,000 feet mean sea
level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” or a “T” before the airway number.
High Altitude Airways (Jet Routes or Q-Routes) start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL. High Altitude Airways are designated with a “J” or a “Q” before the airway number.
EIS
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Low Altitude
Airway
(T-Route)
High Altitude
Airway
(Q-Route)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-27 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
APPENDICES
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AWY Softkey
selections, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also
be programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Select the MAP Opt Softkey.
2) Select the AWY Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AWY On).
INDEX
3) Select the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (AWY LO).
4) Select the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (AWY HI).
5) Select the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed (AWY Off).
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
175
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ On/Off field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’ or ‘On’.
EIS
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Maximum Display Range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Item On or Off
Figure 5-28 Navigation Map Settings Menu - Airways Group Setup
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
Selecting an airway range (Low ALT Airways or High ALT Airways):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ or ‘High ALT Airways’ range field.
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
AFCS
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following range items are configurable on the airways menu:
APPENDICES
Airway Type
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Low Altitude Airways (V Routes and T Routes)
50
100
High Altitude Airways (J Routes and Q Routes)
50
100
INDEX
Table 5-4 Airway Range Information
176
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRACK VECTOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid cyan line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable (30
sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track
vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings. It is always a straight line for
the 2 min, 5 min, 10 min and 20 min settings.
EIS
Track Vector
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-29 Navigation Map -Track Vector
Displaying/removing the track vector:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setting’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Highlight the ‘Track Vector’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the look
ahead time field. Use the FMS Knob to select the desired time. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Wind Vector On/Off
SVT Field of View On/Off
APPENDICES
Selected Altitude Arc On/Off
Track Vector
- On/Off
- Look Ahead Time
INDEX
Fuel Range Ring
- On/Off
- Fuel Reserve Time
Figure 5-30 Navigation Map Settings Menu - Wind Vector On/Off, Field of View On/Off,
Select ALT Arc On/Off, Track Vector Setup, Fuel Range (RSV) Setup
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
177
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
WIND VECTOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater than
or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Direction
Wind Speed
EIS
Figure 5-31 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Information pages.
Displaying/removing the wind vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Wind Vector’ field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
178
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FUEL RANGE RING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid amber circle.
Time to Reserve Fuel
Total Endurance Range
Range to Reserve Fuel
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-32 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
Displaying/removing the fuel range ring and selecting a fuel range time:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
5) Highlight the ‘Fuel Range (RSV)’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Highlight the fuel reserve time field. This time should be set to the amount of flight time equal to the amount
of fuel reserve desired.
8) To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes.
9) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
179
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FIELD OF VIEW (SVT)
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) lateral field of view. The
field of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This is
only available if SVT is installed on the aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
Figure 5-33 Navigation Map - Field of View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying/removing the field of view:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Field of View’ field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
180
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) lateral field of view. The
field of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This is
only available if SVT is installed on the aircraft.
EIS
Range to
Altitude Arc
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-34 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
Displaying/removing the selected altitude intercept arc:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Highlight the ‘SEL ALT ARC’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
181
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
IFR/VFR CHARTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can display GPS navigation information on a VFR chart, a low altitude IFR chart, or a high altitude
IFR chart. The information overlaid on the IFR/VFR Charts is selected and setup on the Navigation Map, but
the IFR/VFR charts will not display some of the selected items. Only the following items will be overlaid on
the chart:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Map Pointer (distance and bearing to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other pertinent information)
• Map Range (17 range choices from 1 nm to 150 nm)
• Map Orientation (always North Up for IFR/VFR Charts)
• Aircraft Icon (representing present position)
• Wind Direction and Speed
• Icons for enabled map features (Traffic only)
• Flight Plan Legs
• Track Vector
• Runway Extension
• Missed Approach Preview
• Intersections (only as part of active flight plan)
• Visual Reporting Points
• VNAV Constraints
• Selected Altitude Intercept Arc
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Status Box
Navigation Page Title
Map Orientation
AFCS
VFR Chart
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
INDEX
Figure 5-35 GPS Navigation Information on the VFR Chart
182
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation Status Box
Navigation Page Title
Map Orientation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
IFR Low Altitude
Chart
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-36 GPS Navigation Information on the IFR Low Altitude Chart
Navigation Status Box
IFR High Altitude
Chart
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Page Title
Map Orientation
Map Range
AFCS
Active Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-37 GPS Navigation Information on the IFR High Altitude Chart
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
183
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Map panning on the IFR/VFR Charts works the same as on the Navigation Map. Map range selected on either
the Navigation Map or the IFR/VFR Charts applies to both, with the exception that if a range is selected on the
Navigation Map is not valid for a chart range, the chart is shown with a range of 7.5 nm.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Modifying the chart settings:
1) Press the MENU Key with the IFR/VFR Charts Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Color Scheme’ setting.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Day’, ‘Auto’, or ‘Night’. The IFR/VFR Chart display changes to reflect the
setting.
EIS
4) If ‘Auto’ was selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the backlight threshold field (sets value for automatic
day/night switching).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting the chart to display:
With the IFR/VFR Charts Page displayed, press the VFR Softkey, the IFR Low Softkey, or the IFR High Softkey.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key with the IFR/VFR Charts Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Settings’ option.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Display VFR’ field, the ‘Display IFR Low’ field, or the ‘Display IFR High’ field.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key. The selected chart is displayed.
184
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DESTINATION AIRPORT INFORMATION
The destination airport for which the information is displayed is determined as follows.
• The destination airport is the last airport in the active flight plan if:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- No arrival or approach is loaded, or
- An arrival waypoint is part of the active leg and no approach is loaded, or
- The active leg is past the MAP
• The destination airport is the airport prior to the procedure(s) in the active flight plan if:
EIS
- An arrival and/or approach is loaded and neither are active
• The destination airport is the airport associated with the approach if:
- An arrival waypoint is part of the active leg and an approach is loaded, or
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- The approach is active
• The destination airport is the Direct-to waypoint if:
- The Direct-to waypoint is not in the active flight plan and is an airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If none of these conditions are met, then the destination airport is undefined and the destination information
fields are shown as dashes.
If FOD is positive, but less than 18 gallons, the FOD value is shown is amber. If FOD is zero or negative, the
FOD value is shown in red.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Valid Destination Airport
Estimated
Time Enroute
Enroute
Distance
Fuel Remaining
at Airport
AFCS
Airport
Identifier
Bearing
to Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Invalid Destination Airport
Figure 5-38 Destination Airport Information
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
185
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.3 WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section for details on autotuning.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the system. As a
waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through the database,
displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to navigation
leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint pages.
Identifier Entry Field
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
City Entry Field
Facility
Entry Field
Entered Waypoint on
Map
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City
AFCS
Waypoint Location
Figure 5-39 Waypoint Information Window
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Duplicate
Waypoints Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
186
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Identifier with
Duplicates
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Duplicate
Waypoints
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Duplicate Message
Figure 5-40 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
187
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AIRPORTS
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs to be
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page
Map.
EIS
The Airport Information Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport information,
load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be
involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading frequencies
(auto-tuning). After engine startup, the Airport Information Page defaults to the airport where the aircraft is
located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple
airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport Information
Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘Airport’, ‘Runways’, and ‘Frequencies’. For airports
with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This information is viewed on the Airport
Information Page by pressing the Info softkey until 1 is displayed.
Airport Information
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Runway Information
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Airport/Runway
Diagram
Figure 5-41 Airport Information Page
APPENDICES
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
• Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled lighting)
INDEX
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
188
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The directory information is viewed on the Airport Directory Page by pressing the INFO softkey until INFO2 is displayed. The following are types of airport directory information shown (if available) on the Airport
Directory Page:
• Services Available: Category,
Specific Service
• Pilot Controlled Lighting:
High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
• FBO: Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit
Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Information
• Notes: Airport Notes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Transportation: Ground
Transportation Type Available
• Approach: Approach Facility
Name, Frequency, Frequency
Parameter
• Instrument Approaches:
Published Approach,
Frequency
• NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
• Noise: Noise Abatement
Procedures
• Charts: Low Altitude Chart
Number
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Frequencies: Type/Frequency
• Runway: Headings, Length,
Width, Obstructions, Surface
• Obstructions: General
Airport Obstructions
• Special Operations at
Airport
EIS
• Hours: Facility Hours, Light
Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon
Hours
• Location: Sectional, Magnetic
Variation
• Traffic Pattern Altitudes
(TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
• Weather: Service Type,
Frequency, Phone Number
• Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Airport: Identifier, Site
Number, Name, City, State
• Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers
Airport Directory
Information
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Softkeys
Figure 5-42 Airport Directory Page Example
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
189
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the Airport Information Page, press the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Runways’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
Viewing a destination airport:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
From the Airport Information Page press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination Airport’. The Destination
Airport is displayed.
The Airport Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Communication Frequencies
Pre-Taxi
Approach * Control
CTA *
Radar
Arrival *
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
Gate
Terminal *
ATIS
Ground
TMA *
AWOS
Helicopter
Tower
Center
Multicom
TRSA *
Class B *
Class C *
Other
Unicom
Clearance
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-6 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
APPENDICES
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page. See the
Procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display (see
the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather).
INDEX
The system provides a Nearest Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The Nearest Airports Window displays a list of
up to 25 of the nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three they
are displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “None Within 200nm” is displayed.
190
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Bearing/Distance to Airport
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Length of Longest
Runway
COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest Softkey
Figure 5-43 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD Airport Information Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing
the ENT Key again returns to the Nearest Airports Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list.
Continued presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest
Airports list.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
Airport Information
Airport Information
AFCS
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
- Lat/Long
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-44 Airport Information Window on PFD
APPENDICES
The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in
the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and
surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘Nearest Airports’,
‘Information’, ‘Runways’, ‘Frequencies’, and ‘Approaches’.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to eight frequencies,
and up to eight approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled.
If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected
airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
191
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airports
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
Airport Information
- Facility/City/Elevation
Nearest Airport
Runway Information
EIS
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Window Selection
Softkeys
Approaches Available
Figure 5-45 Nearest Airport Page
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Select the Nearest Softkey to display the Nearest Airports Window. Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the Airport Information
Window.
3) To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘Back’) or press the CLR Key.
The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key moves
through the airport list, alternating between the Nearest Airports Window and the Airport Information Window.)
AFCS
4) Press the CLR Key or the Nearest Softkey to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window.
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST page group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Nearest Airports Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may already
be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, “None Within 200nm” is displayed.
APPENDICES
3) Select the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Nearest Airports’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports list
is highlighted.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport.)
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
192
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, select the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select
Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Runways’ Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
EIS
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 3000 feet (or meters) for runway length
and “Hard Only” for runway surface type.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup 1 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (Any, Hard Only, Hard/Soft).
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup 1 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Nearest Airport Criteria
- Type of Runway Surface
- Minimum Runway Length
INDEX
Figure 5-46 System Setup Page - Nearest Airport Selection Criteria
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
193
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
INTERSECTIONS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
used to define the intersection.
EIS
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled ‘Intersection’, ‘Information’, and ‘Nearest VOR’.
Intersection Identifier
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
Intersection Info
- Region
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Intersection
Figure 5-47 Intersection Information Page
AFCS
Selecting an intersection:
1) With the Intersection Information Page displayed, enter an identifier in the Intersection Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest Intersections Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest Intersection Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
194
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path. In addition
to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in
three boxes labeled ‘Nearest INT’, ‘Information’, and ‘Reference VOR’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to 21 intersections are visible at a time. If there
are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that fact
is displayed.
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
EIS
Intersection Information
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Intersection
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
Nearest
Intersection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Intersection Lat/Long
Reference VOR Info
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
Figure 5-48 Nearest Intersections Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
195
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NDBS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying a map of
the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled
‘NDB’, ‘Information’, ‘Frequency’, and ‘Nearest Airport’.
NDB Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
EIS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
NDB Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
Selected NDB
Nearest Airport Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-49 NDB Information Page
NOTE: Compass locator (LOM, LMM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in
conjunction with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker;
when LMM is used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
AFCS
Selecting an NDB:
1) With the NDB Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in which it’s
located in the NDB Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) With the Nearest NDB Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest NDB Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
196
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled
‘Nearest NDB’, ‘Information’, and ‘Frequency’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to 12 NDBs are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are within
200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are
no nearest NDBs in the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
EIS
NDB Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest NDB
NDB Information
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-50 Nearest NDB Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
197
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VORS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS navigation signals, or to
quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information cannot be viewed on the VOR Information
Page. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information
Page and if it includes only DME, it is displayed as VOR-DME.
EIS
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the VOR Information
Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled ‘VOR’, ‘Information’, ‘Frequency’, and ‘Nearest Airport’.
VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected VOR
VOR Information
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
VOR Frequency
Selected VOR
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airport Info
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
Figure 5-51 VOR Information Page
AFCS
The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are: Low Altitude, High Altitude, and Terminal.
Selecting a VOR:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the VOR Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in which it’s
located in the VOR Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
Or:
198
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV
frequency from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations
in three boxes labeled ‘Nearest VOR’, ‘Information’, and ‘Frequency’. The list only includes waypoints that
are within 200 nm.
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
VOR
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to 12 VORs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text indicating
that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information is dashed.
VOR Identifier/Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VOR Information
Nearest VOR
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
AFCS
VOR Frequency
Figure 5-52 Nearest VOR Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
199
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VRPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VRP Information Page is used to view information about visual reporting points (VRPs). In addition to
displaying a map of the currently selected VRP and surrounding area, the VRP Information Page displays VRP
information in two boxes labeled ‘VRP’ and ‘Information’’.
Selected VRP
Navigation Map Showing Selected VRP
VRP Identifier/Symbol
EIS
- VRP Name
VRP Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Country
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
- Lat/Long
Figure 5-53 VRP Information Page
AFCS
Selecting a VRP:
1) With the VRP Information Page displayed, enter the identifier or the name of the VRP in the VRP Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest VRP Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VRP Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
200
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest VRP Page can be used to quickly find a VRP close to the aircraft. In addition to displaying a
map of the surrounding area, the Nearest VRP Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VRPs in two
boxes labeled ‘Nearest VRP’ and ‘Information’. The list only includes VRPs that are within 200 nm.
Navigation Map Showing Nearest VRP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the VRP identifier indicates the selected VRP. Up to 12 VRPs are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no VRPs in the list, text indicating
that there are no nearest VRPs is displayed. If there are no nearest VRPs in the list, the information is dashed.
Nearest VRP
EIS
VRP Identifier/Symbol
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VRP Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- VRP Name
- Country
- Lat/Long
AFCS
Figure 5-54 Nearest VRP Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
201
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
USER WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from
any map page (except PFD Inset Map, HSI Map, AUX-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a
position on the map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing/
distance from an existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or a latitude and longitude. Once a
waypoint has been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased upon
system power down.
User Waypoint Info
EIS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
User Wpt Comment
Reference Wpt/Info
- Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
Selected User
Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
User Waypoint List
- Identifier
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
# User Wpts Used
Figure 5-55 User Waypoint Information Page
AFCS
Selecting a User Waypoint:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the User Waypoint List using the large FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest User Waypoints Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest USR Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
202
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Nearest User Wpt List
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
EIS
User Waypoint Info
- Comment
- Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reference Wpt Info
Selected User
Waypoint
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
Figure 5-56 Nearest User Waypoint Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways:
Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the New Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
AFCS
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the Reference Waypoints window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the Reference Waypoints window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
APPENDICES
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the Information window using the FMS Knobs.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “Temporary” or “Normal” by moving the cursor to
“Temporary” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
203
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the Reference Waypoints window using the FMS Knobs.
EIS
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the Reference Waypoints window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the Information window using the FMS Knobs.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “Temporary” or “Normal” by moving the cursor to
“Temporary” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-57 User Waypoint Information Page Menu
204
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is displayed with the captured position.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
EIS
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint box is highlighted.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the Reference Waypoints window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the Reference Waypoints window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the Information window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “Temporary” or “Normal” by moving the cursor to
“Temporary” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
9) Press the Go Back Softkey to return to the map page.
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List, if required, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Move the cursor to the desired field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
205
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Renaming user waypoints:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Enter a new name.
1) Highlight a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List. Select the Rename Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Rename User Waypoint’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.
AFCS
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint
information page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘Normal’ or ‘Temporary’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the User Waypoint Information Page.
206
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
Deleting a single user waypoint:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Select the Delete Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘Yes’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
EIS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all user waypoints:
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints.’
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
207
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.4 AIRSPACES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Identification Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR).
Class D Airspace
EIS
MOA (Military)
Class B Airspace
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Restricted Area
Class C Airspace
AFCS
Alert Area
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADIZ
APPENDICES
Warning Area
Figure 5-58 Airspaces
INDEX
The Nearest Airspaces Page, Airspace Alerts Window, and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
208
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the
Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
EIS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup 1 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup 1 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
Airspace Alerts Box
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Airspace Altitude Buffer
- Alert On/Off
(Default Settings Shown)
APPENDICES
INDEX
Defaults Softkey
Figure 5-59 System Setup Page - Airspace Alerts
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
209
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the Airspace Group in the Map Settings Menu. See
Table 5-3 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace
area.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nearest Airspaces Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In addition, a selected
frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying
a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in
four boxes labeled ‘Airspace Alerts’, ‘Airspace Agency’, ‘Vertical Limits’, and ‘Frequencies’.
EIS
Airspace Alerts Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Airspace 3
Airspace/Agency Info
Airspace 2
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspace 1
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
Associated Frequencies
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Figure 5-60 Nearest Airspaces Page
AFCS
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The
Alerts and FREQ softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or more
frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the Nearest Airspaces Page.
2) Select the Alerts Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
APPENDICES
3) Select the desired airspace.
INDEX
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
210
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the PFD ALERTS Softkey displays the message window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts are
displayed in the message window:
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace
within 10 minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead – less
than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less than
2 nm.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
EIS
Table 5-6 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Smart Airspace function de-emphasizes airspaces above or below the current aircraft altitude. The function
does not require the aircraft present position or flight path to enter the lateral boundaries of the airspace. If the
current aircraft altitude is within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace, the airspace boundary is
shown normally. If the current aircraft altitude is not within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace,
the airspace boundary is shown subdued.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Smart Airspace Off
Smart Airspace On
Figure 5-61 Smart Airspace
Turning smart airspace on or off:
APPENDICES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Group’ Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Airspace’ in the ‘Group’ Box and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Smart Airspace’ field in the Airspace Map Setup Window.
INDEX
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn smart airspace ‘On’ or counterclockwise to turn smart airspace ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
211
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on either the MFD Controller or the
PFD, is quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the system establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
EIS
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Direct-to Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The Direct-to Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Direct-to Point Info
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map of Selected Point
Location of Destination
- Bearing/Distance
AFCS
Desired Course
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-62 Direct-to Window - MFD
212
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Direct-to Point Info
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Direct-to Point Info
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
EIS
Activation Command
Figure 5-63 Direct-to Window - PFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the Direct-to Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan wayoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
AFCS
Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the Direct-to
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Active Flight Plan Window.
Waypoint Submenu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
APPENDICES
Figure 5-64 Waypoint Submenu
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
213
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the
active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
EIS
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Or:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, or the Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select the desired waypoint.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Any Nearest, Recent or User waypoint can be selected as a direct-to destination in the Direct-to Window.
Selecting a Nearest, Recent or User waypoint as a direct-to destination:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the
default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Nearest, Recent or User waypoints.
AFCS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Direct-to Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation.
If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active flight plan
waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page defaults to the
displayed waypoint.
APPENDICES
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
INDEX
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
214
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the Nearest Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the Nearest Airports Page and press
the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
EIS
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
1) From a navigation map page, press the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the system resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
215
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Cancel Direct-To NAV
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-65 Direct-to Window - Cancelling Direct-to Navigation
When navigating a direct-to, the system sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘Course’) on the Direct-to Window.
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the course field.
3) Enter the desired course.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
AFCS
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
INDEX
APPENDICES
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from the
aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint, or at the
specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior to the directto destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of a direct-to destination that is
part of the active flight plan. All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on
Vertical Navigation for more information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
216
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Enter the desired altitude.
4) Press the ENT Key. The option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.
EIS
7) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
8) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key to activate.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Page Menu
- Clear Vertical Constraints
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-66 Direct-to Window - Clearing Vertical Constraints
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
217
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight planning on the system consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The system allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Flight Plan Leg Type
Symbol
EIS
Active Course Leg*
Active Heading Leg*
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active Roll Steering Path*†
Course Leg in the current flight segment
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Course Leg not in the current flight segment
Heading Leg
Roll Steering Path †
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Future Roll Steering Path ‡
Turn Anticipation Arc
AFCS
* The active leg or path is the one currently being flown, and is shown in magenta.
† A roll steering path is a computed transition between two disconnected legs.
‡ A roll steering path in the flight plan that is beyond the next leg appears as a future roll steering path. When a future roll
steering path becomes the next leg in the flight plan, it appears as a roll steering path.
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 100 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. One flight plan can
be activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned
off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the system automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
INDEX
Table 5-8 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
218
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
EIS
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
• Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
Active FPL Waypoint List
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
AFCS
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Vertical Navigation Profile
Turn Anticipation
Arc
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Required
- Vertical Deviation
Figure 5-67 Active Flight Plan Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
219
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight Plan Comment
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List
EIS
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-68 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
Catalog Contents
- # Used
- # Empty
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Plan List
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
Selected FPL Info
AFCS
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Softkeys
Figure 5-69 Flight Plan Catalog Page
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The active flight plan is listed on the active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Active Flight Plan
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the system is currently providing guidance, and is shown
on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).
NOTE: The system supports AFCS lateral guidance for all leg types (using NAV or FMS APPR mode). The
INDEX
system does not support course deviation for any heading leg types (VA, VD, VI, VM, or VR).
220
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating an active flight plan on the PFD:
1) Press the FPL Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
3) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
4) Repeat step numbers 2 and 3 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
EIS
5) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Creating an active flight plan on the MFD:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Select the origin airport and runway.
a) Highlight the origin airport identifier using the FMS Knob, or moving the Quick Select Box with the Joystick.
c)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Use the FMS Knob, alphanumeric keypad, or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city
name of the origin waypoint.
Press the ENT Key. The Set Runway Window is displayed with the Runway field highlighted.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
e) Press the ENT Key again to add the origin airport/runway to the flight plan.
3) Repeat step number 2 for the destination airport and runway.
4) Select the enroute waypoints.
a) Highlight the location to insert the waypoint using the FMS Knob, or moving the Quick Select Box with the
Joystick (the waypoint will be inserted at the insertion point indicator).
AFCS
b) Use the FMS Knob, alphanumeric keypad, or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city
name of the waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Repeat step number 4 to enter each additional enroute waypoint.
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor (if required).
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
221
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Creating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Select the New Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
4) Select the origin airport and runway.
a) Highlight the origin airport identifier using the FMS Knob.
EIS
b) Use the FMS Knob, alphanumeric keypad, or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city
name of the origin waypoint.
c)
Press the ENT Key. The Set Runway Window is displayed with the Runway field highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway, and press the ENT Key.
e) Press the ENT Key again to add the origin airport/runway to the flight plan.
5) Repeat step number 4 for the destination airport and runway.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Select the enroute waypoints.
a) Highlight the location to insert the waypoint using the FMS Knob (If the enroute header is selected, the
new waypoint is placed following the header. If an enroute waypoint or the dashes are selected, the new
waypoint will be placed ahead of the selected item.)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Use the FMS Knob, alphanumeric keypad, or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city
name of the waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
7) Repeat step number 6 to enter each additional enroute waypoint.
8) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
AFCS
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key on the Control Unit to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
APPENDICES
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
6) Press the IMPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
INDEX
Or:
222
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If an existing flight plan is selected, an “Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL” prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select “CANCEL” using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the IMPORT Softkey again.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
EIS
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
List of Flight Plans to Import &
Details for the Selected File
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Import/Export Softkeys
Import Successful
Figure 5-70 Flight Plan Import
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
223
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FPL Key on the Control Unit to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the EXPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Export Flight Plan”.
EIS
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
APPENDICES
Import/Export Softkeys
Stored Flight Plan to be Exported &
Exported Flight Plan Name
Export Successful
INDEX
Figure 5-71 Flight Plan Export
224
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight plans can be transferred to or from a mobile device via the Flight Stream 510 Bluetooth wireless
connection. Transfer of a flight plan to a mobile device is controlled by the mobile device.
Previewing a pending flight plan transfer from a wireless connection:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a Pending Flight Plan pop-up alert appears
in the lower right corner of the MFD, and an Connext annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page name.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Preview Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
Or:
Select the Preview Softkey to display the Preview Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
EIS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key,
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Preview Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key to display the Preview Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
Ignoring a pending flight plan transfer from a wireless connection:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a Pending Flight Plan pop-up alert appears
in the lower right corner of the MFD, and an Connext annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page name.
2) Press the CLR Key to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan will
still be available on the Flight Plan Catalog page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
Select the Ignore Softkey to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The pending flight
plan will still be available on the Flight Plan Catalog page.
Pending Connext Action
Annunciator
AFCS
Pending Flight Plan
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Pending Flight Plan
Pop-Up Alert
Ignore Softkey
Preview Softkey
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Figure 5-72 Pending Flight Plan Transfer
225
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Pending Connext Action
Annunciator
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pending Flight Plan
Store? or Activate?
Selection
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Delete Softkey
Store Softkey
Activate Softkey
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-73 Preview Flight Plan Page
Storing a pending flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.
5) Press the ENT Key to display the Preview Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AFCS
6) Select the Store Softkey to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
Or:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Store?’.
c) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
Or:
APPENDICES
a) Press the MENU Key,
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
INDEX
Activating a pending flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the Preview Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
226
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Select the Activate Softkey. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
Or:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate?’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to activate the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan becomes
the active flight plan and is removed from the Flight Plan Catalog Page. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting a pending flight plan:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired pending flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Select the Delete Softkey. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
Or:
Press the CLR Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
Or:
AFCS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan is removed
from the Flight Plan Catalog Page. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press
the ENT Key.
Deleting all pending flight plans:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete All Pending’.
INDEX
5) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all pending flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
6)
190-02183-00 Rev. A
With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all pending flight plans. To cancel the request, press the
CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
227
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans are
limited to 100 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints in
the flight plan exceeds 100, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the
new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
Stored Flight Plan Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-74 Stored Flight Plan Page
APPENDICES
Flight Plan Full Message
INDEX
Figure 5-75 Active Flight Plan Page - FPL Full
228
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press
the ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed.
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-76 Duplicate Waypoints Window
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Highlight the location to insert the waypoint using the FMS Knob, or moving the Quick Select Box with the
Joystick (the waypoint will be inserted at the insertion point indicator).
APPENDICES
3) Use the FMS Knob, alphanumeric keypad, or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name
of the waypoint. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
4) Press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
INDEX
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function on the Active Flight Plan Page and pan to the map location
of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the end of
the active flight plan.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
229
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the desired
airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway entry point,
select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be loaded if there is a
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure.
The system also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints.
EIS
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airways Available at TOP
Airway Waypoint
Sequence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of
Selected Airway
Figure 5-77 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
Adding an airway to a flight plan using the FMS Knob:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu
item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the cursor
position).
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is
highlighted.
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
230
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Adding an airway to a flight plan using the Quick Select Box:
1) Press the FPL Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Use the Joystick to place the QuickSelect Box on the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this
waypoint is not a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
3) Press the MENU Key and select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
EIS
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is
highlighted.
6) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
Selected Airway Exit
Point
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Exit Point
Preview of
Selected Airway
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airway Exit Points
Available
AFCS
Figure 5-78 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
231
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Inserted Airway Header
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- Airway Identifier: [airway
identifier].[exit waypoint identifier]
(e.g., V4.SLN)
Figure 5-79 Active Flight Plan Page - Airway Inserted
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
RESTRICTIONS ON ADDING AIRWAYS
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only one direction.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
For example, airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the
list of airway waypoints. That is, each waypoint may have its own conditional route in relation to another
waypoint.
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the system database.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
232
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Perspective allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.
Flight Plan Name
EIS
Flight Plan Waypoint
List
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Softkeys
Load Departure Load Arrival Load Approach Activate Flight Plan -
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-80 Stored Flight Plan Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
233
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DEPARTURE (DP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Departure Airport
EIS
Selected
Departure
Departures Available at
KMCI
Departure Waypoint
Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of
Selected
Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-81 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Departure”, and press the ENT Key. The
Departure Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
234
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Departure Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Departure
Selected Runway
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Selected Transition
EIS
Departure Transition
Points Available
Selected
Departure End
Point
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-82 Departure Loading Page - Selecting Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Departure Header
- Departure Identifier: [departure
airport]-[departure runway].
[departure transition].
[departure end point]
(e.g., KMKC-ALL.WLDCT2.SLN)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-83 Stored Flight Plan Page - Departure Inserted
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
235
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVAL (STAR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Destination Airport
EIS
Selected Arrival
Arrivals Available at
KCOS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Runway
Arrival Waypoint
Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of
Selected Arrival
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-84 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The Arrival
Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
236
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Transitions Available
with DBRY1
EIS
Arrival Waypoint
Sequence
Preview of
Selected Arrival
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 85 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Arrival Header
- Arrival Identifier:
[arrival airport]-[arrival transition].
[arrival].[arrival runway]
(e.g., KCOS-TBE.DBRY1.ALL)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-86 Stored Flight Plan Page - Arrival Inserted
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
237
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
APPROACH (APPR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.
EIS
Destination Airport
Selected
Approach
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Approaches Available at
KCOS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of
Selected
Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-87 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Approach”, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the Approach Channel field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
INDEX
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.
238
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Approach
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
Selected Approach
EIS
Preview of
Selected
Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Load Approach?
Figure 5-88 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Approach Header
- Approach Identifier: [approach
airport].[runway and approach type]
(e.g., KCOS-RNAV 35RGPS LPV)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-89 Stored Flight Plan Page - Approach Inserted
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
239
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased when
the system is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be
viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
EIS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude
information for the selected Flight Plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the EDIT Softkey to open the Stored Flight Plan Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Flight Plan
Stored Flight Plan Info
AFCS
- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
Figure 5-90 Stored Flight Plan Information
APPENDICES
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
240
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATE A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
EIS
3) Select the Activate Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the Invert Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COPY A FLIGHT PLAN
The system allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
AFCS
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the COPY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Copy
to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
DELETE A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the system memory.
Deleting a stored flight plan:
INDEX
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
241
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Press the DELETE Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
EIS
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT PLAN EDITING
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system allows deleting an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by the
system.
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DELETING FLIGHT PLAN ITEMS
APPENDICES
Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints
in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete
a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be deleted.
INDEX
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the waypoint to be deleted (MFD only).
242
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if required.
Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the header of the airway to be deleted.
EIS
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the header of the airway to be deleted (MFD only).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if required.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the header of the procedure to be deleted.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the header of the procedure to be deleted (MFD only).
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
AFCS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if required.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
INDEX
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
243
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the airway to be deleted.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the procedure to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
244
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS (NAMES)
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification
and sorting.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Use the FMS Knobs or the alphanumeric keypad to edit the comment.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the comment field.
3) Use the alphanumeric keys on the Display Controller to edit the comment.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
AFCS
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
APPENDICES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs or the alphanumeric keypad to edit the comment.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
245
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
EIS
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and
Distance from Flight
Plan Waypoint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
Figure 5-91 Along Track Offset
APPENDICES
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the along track offset.
INDEX
3) Press the ATK OFST Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 999 nm (limited by leg distances).
246
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PARALLEL TRACK
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the
current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
EIS
Using direct-to, loading an approach, a holding pattern, or editing and activating the flight plan automatically
cancels Parallel Track. Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel
tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active Flight Plan prior to Parallel Track
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting Parallel
Track
AFCS
Figure 5-92 Active Flight Plan Window - Selecting Parallel Track
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Activating parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with the Direction field highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘LEFT’ or ‘RIGHT’ and press the ENT Key. The Distance field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘Activate Parallel Track?’ is
highlighted.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.
247
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Offset Direction
Offset Distance
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activation Prompt
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-93 Parallel Track Window
Parallel Track Waypoints
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- ...
- LAA-p
Activating Parallel Track
affects the active flight
plan from the current
position on (will not affect
an approach)
AFCS
Original Track
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Parallel Track
APPENDICES
Figure 5-94 Parallel Track Active
INDEX
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation prompt
is displayed, but disabled. If an approach leg is active, the status indicates that the system is unable to activate the
parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance
results in an unreasonable route geometry (e.g., there is a sharp turn of more than 120 degrees), the status indicates
that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry (‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Invalid Route Geometry’). If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
248
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type (‘Parallel Track Unavailable Not Allowed for Active Leg’). Parallel track is also unavailable for a
leg if there are no legs remaining in the flight plan after the given leg, or OBS mode is active
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Parallel track will be cancelled if the active leg changes to a leg where one of the preceding is true.
Activation of parallel track will apply from the current position along the flight plan until a leg that does not
meet the criteria for parallel track. Guidance will be computed to return to the original track at the beginning
of that leg.
Subdued Prompt (Unavailable)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Unavailable Status
Approach Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Unavailable Status
Active Leg Incompatible
Unavailable Status
Invalid Geometry
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-95 Parallel Track Unavailable
AFCS
Offset Direction &
Distance Subdued
(Unavailable)
Cancel Prompt
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Active Status
APPENDICES
Figure 5-96 Cancelling Parallel Track
Cancelling parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with ‘CANCEL PARALLEL TRACK?’ highlighted.
3) Press the ENT Key.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
249
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Activating a flight plan leg:
The system allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently
used for navigation guidance).
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
EIS
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ACT LEG Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘Activate’ highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and press
the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if required.
Current
Active Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selected Destination
Waypoint
Activate Leg Softkey
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-97 Active Flight Plan Page - Selecting the Leg Destination Waypoint
250
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
New Active
Flight Plan Leg
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Confirmation Window
Figure 5-98 Active Flight Plan Page - New Active Leg
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the Invert Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
251
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is
displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and
Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Switching between leg-to-leg waypoint distance and cumulative waypoint distance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
EIS
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the CUM and Leg-Leg Softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the Leg-Leg Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
4) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Active Flight Plan Cumulative Distance
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active Flight Plan Leg to Leg Distance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Wide Softkey, Narrow Softkey,
Leg-Leg Softkey, CUM Softkey
Figure 5-99 Active Flight Plan - Leg to Leg vs. Cumulative Distance
Switching between wide and narrow view:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Select the View Softkey to display the Wide and Narrow Softkeys.
3) Select the Wide Softkey to display the wide view, or select the Narrow Softkey to display the narrow view.
INDEX
4) Select the Back Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
252
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Active Flight Plan Narrow View
Active Flight Plan Wide View
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Wide Softkey, Narrow Softkey,
Leg-Leg Softkey, CUM Softkey
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-100 Active Flight Plan - Wide vs. Narrow View
COLLAPSING AIRWAYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight Plan
Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
AFCS
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Q3.FEPOT Airway
Collapsed View
Expanded View
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-101 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
253
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
EIS
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference
waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The system displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user
waypoint at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.
USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position, or at a
direct-to waypoint.
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears with
the course field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘Load?’ is highlighted to insert the hold into the flight plan.
254
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hold At
Waypoint
Menu
Selection
Waypoint
Selected
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Location of Hold
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Hold Entry Course
Course Direction
Inbound or Outbound
Leg Length Mode Button
(Time or Distance)
Leg Length
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(Right or Left)
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Expect Further Clearance Time
Load Hold in Active Flight Plan
INDEX
Figure 5-102 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
255
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold at’ window appears
with the course field highlighted.
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold waypoint at the aircraft
present position and activate the hold.
Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press a Direct-to Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, but select ‘Hold?’ instead of ‘Activate?’
when finished (MFD or PFD).
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
8) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-defined hold defined
at the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to wayoint is part of the active flight plan, the HOLD is inserted into
the active flight plan. If the direct-to waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is
created.)
Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
INDEX
APPENDICES
Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern to the inbound course
and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.
256
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Removing a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the HOLD waypoint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the active flight plan. Select ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the holding pattern.
Editing a user-defined hold:
EIS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Edit Hold’, and press the ENT Key. The 'Hold at' window appears with the
course field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘Update?’ is highlighted to update the hold.
Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:
AFCS
1) Press a Direct To Key to display the Direct To Window (PFD or MFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ selection.
3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
257
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Hold At
Present
Position
Menu
Selection
Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inbound or Outbound
Leg Length Mode Button
(Time or Distance)
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(Right or Left)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
Expect Further Clearance Time
APPENDICES
Activate Hold
INDEX
Figure 5-103 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at the Aircraft Present Position
258
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoint
Selected
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Leg Length
(Time in nm or
Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Leg Length Mode Button
(TIME or DIST))
Map of Hold Location
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Expect Further
Clearance Time
APPENDICES
Load Hold and
Activate Direct To
Hold At Direct To
Waypoint Selection
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Figure 5-104 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at a Direct To Waypoint
259
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The system supports vertical path guidance and altitude constraints for the following leg types: AF,
CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FC, FD, PI, RF, and TF. Altitude constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
EIS
The system system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute
and teminal phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a
direct-to waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a
linear deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan. Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Disabled (fields dashed)
ENBL VNV Softkey
CNCL VNV Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-105 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
Enabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Select the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the Active VNV Profile box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., FALUR)).
Disabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
INDEX
2) Select the Cncl VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is disabled.
260
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and
time to top of descent/bottom of descent (TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and
Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TOD items
displayed in the Active VNV Profile box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually enabled. Vertical
guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
EIS
The system allows a vertical navigation direct-to to any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Selecting the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Prior to VNV Direct-to
After VNV Direct-to
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
VNV Direct-To Softkey
VNV PROF Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-106 Vertical Navigation Direct-To
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (cyan number) to be used. If not,
the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
3) Select the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
261
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the Active VNV Profile box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
EIS
2) Select the VNV Prof Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the Active VNV Profile box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database.
Altitude Constraint
Examples
Displayed Text
Examples
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5OOOFT
Cross AT or ABOVE
5,000 ft
White Text
Cyan Text with Pencil Icon
Cyan Text
AFCS
23OOFT
Cross AT 2,300 ft
Temperature
Compensated
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3OOOFT
Cross AT or BELOW
3,000 ft
White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-107 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
262
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5OOOFT
Altitude calculated by the system estimating the altitude of the aircraft
as it passes over the navigation point. No white line above or below to
indicate a potential constraint.
5OOOFT
Altitude is designated for use in determining
vertical guidance. A pencil icon indicates manual
designation or manual data entry.
5OOOFT
Altitude retrieved from the navigation database. White line above or
below indicates the type of constraint, as shown in the preceding figure.
These altitudes are provided as a reference, and are not designated to be
used in determining vertical guidance.
The system cannot use this altitude in
determining vertical guidance because of an
invalid constraint condition.
EIS
5OOOFT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Cyan Text
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
White Text
Table 5-9 Altitude Constraint Color Coding
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitudes associated with approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the system automatically
uses the altitudes loaded with the approach for giving vertical speed and deviation guidance. Note that these
altitudes are displayed as cyan text up to, but not including, the FAF. The FAF is always a “reference only”
altitude and cannot be designated, unless the selected approach does not provide vertical guidance. In this case,
the FAF altitude can be designated.
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the CLR Key.
The altitude is now displayed only as a reference. It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed
altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude
to a non-designated altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance using the FMS Knob:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance using the Quick Select Box:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Use the alphanumeric keys on the Display Controller to enter the same altitude.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the system allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively
overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or
ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical
profile.
263
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS
SBAS approach)
EIS
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF.
Entering/modifiying an altitude constraint using the FMS Knob:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entering/modifiying an altitude constraint using the Quick Select Box:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the alphanumeric keys on the Display Controller. To enter
altitudes as a flight level, enter F as the first character.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event
an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral
waypoint, the system displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude
can be provided. The system also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been
edited.
264
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude constraint (MFD only), and press
the FMS Knob.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude?’ confirmation window is displayed.
EIS
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude constraint (MFD only), and press
the FMS Knob.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is replaced by a system
calculated altitude, if available).
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
AFCS
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude constraint (MFD only), and press
the FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
265
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.8 PROCEDURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Perspective can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APPRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using the
Procedures (PROC) Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the departure and arrival airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate”
is given. “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation
guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps
the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system adds terminal procedures to the flight plan based on leg types coded within that procedure in the
navigation database. If the terminal procedure in the flight plan contains an identifier like ‘6368ft’, that indicates
a leg that terminates when the specified altitude (6368 feet) has been exceeded. A heading leg in the flight plan
displays ‘hdg’ preceding the DTK (e.g. ‘hdg 008°’). A flight plan leg requiring the pilot to manually intitiate
sequencing to the next leg displays ‘MANSEQ’ as the identifier.
Heading Leg Terminating at the
Specified Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Manually Sequenced Heading Leg
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-108 Procedure Leg Identifiers
266
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DEPARTURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING A DEPARTURE INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
Available Procedure Actions
Departure Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Departure Preview
Departure Choices
APPENDICES
Loaded Procedures
Figure 5-109 Departure Selection
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
267
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loaded Departure
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Departure
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Viewing available departures at an airport:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-110 Departure Loading
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO-1 Softkey or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
APPENDICES
Loading a departure into the active flight plan from the Departure Information Page:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
INDEX
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
268
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Select a different departure, if desired.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The
cursor moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on the map.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The
cursor moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
EIS
4) Press the MENU Key to display the Departure Information Page Menu.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load Departure’.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure into the active flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
REMOVING A DEPARTURE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the departure header.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
269
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVALS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING AN ARRIVAL INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Arrival’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page is displayed.
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
Available Procedure Actions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Destination Airport
APPENDICES
Loaded Procedures
Arrival Preview
Arrival Choices
INDEX
Figure 5-111 Arrival Selection
270
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected Arrival
Loaded Arrival
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-112 Arrival Loading
Viewing available arrivals at an airport:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor moves
to the Transition box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO-1 Softkey or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
271
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan from the Arrival Information Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
3) Select a different arrival, if desired.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.
EIS
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The arrival is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The
cursor moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
4) Press the MENU Key to display the Arrival Information Page Menu.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load Arrival’.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure into the active flight plan.
REMOVING AN ARRIVAL FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
Or:
APPENDICES
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the arrival header.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
272
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPROACHES
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
EIS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures. If
an approach is loaded when another approach is already in the flight plan, the new approach replaces the
previous approach, unless the active leg is past the missed approach point. In this case, the second approach
is loaded at the end of the previous approach, and the previous approach is converted to waypoints (no longer
part of an APPR). The approach sequence is defined by selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “Load” or “Load & Activate” is given (“Load &
Activate” is only available for the active flight plan). “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan
without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate
waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure available for quick activation when needed.
“Activating” also adds the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance
to the first waypoint in the approach.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the approach type indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
The SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approach service levels
according to the published chart. The ‘+V’ designation adds advisory vertical guidance for assistance in
maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is displayed
on the system PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. Baro VNAV guidance
is displayed on the system PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta pentagon. The
active approach service level is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
273
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HSI Annunciation
Description
LNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV minima
LNAV+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV minima.
Advisory vertical guidance is provided
L/VNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAVVNAV
(available only if minima (downgrades to Baro VNAV if SBAS
SBAS available) unavailable)
LP
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if Advisory vertical guidance is provided
SBAS available)
LPV
RNAV GPS approach using published LPV minima
(available only if (downgrades to Baro VNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
Example on HSI
Approach Service Level
- LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 5-9 RNAV GPS Approach Service Levels
LOADING AN APPROACH INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The Approach Loading Page is displayed.
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the Approach Channel field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) Minimums
a) To set ‘Minimums’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key.
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to
select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
274
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘Load?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘Activate’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED
FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
Destination Airport
Available Procedure Actions
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approach Preview
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loaded Procedures
Approach Choices
Figure 5-113 Approach Selection
Selected Approach
Loaded Approach
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
Figure 5-114 Approach Loading
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
275
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available approaches at an airport:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the APR Softkey. The Approach
Information Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Approach. The approach is previewed on
the map.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available approaches. Press the ENT Key to select the approach. The
cursor moves to the Transition box. The approach is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Minimums box. The approach is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select minimums on or off. Press the ENT Key.
a) When minimums are selected on, the cursor moves to the minimum altitude field . Use the small FMS Knob
to select the altitude. Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) If temperature compensated minimums was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Use the
small FMS Knob to select the temperature. Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the Sequence box. The
approach is previewed on the map.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When minimums are selected off, the cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach is previewed on the
map.
7) Press the INFO-1 or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the Nearest Airports Page.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
APPENDICES
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
7) Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key.
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to
select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
276
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected
final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
ACTIVATING AN APPROACH
A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window.
Activating a previously loaded approach:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps above to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘Activate Vector-to-Final' and press the ENT Key.
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) From the Approach Loading Page, press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with ‘Load & Activate
Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to
a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
AFCS
REMOVING AN APPROACH FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
INDEX
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the approach header.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
277
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
MISSED APPROACH
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
1) Press the PROC Key.
EIS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Missed Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the Go-Around Button.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by the navigation database, and may be below, equal to, or above the published
minimums for this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet)
after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of
6,368 feet is reached. After reaching 6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case
MOGAL). If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established
to the published fix (MOGAL) to begin the missed approach procedure.
APPENDICES
Course to Altitude Leg
Figure 5-115 Course to Altitude
INDEX
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the
aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
278
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If desired, the system can compensate the loaded approach altitudes based on a pilot-supplied temperature
at the destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of -40º C, the system increases
the approach altitudes accordingly. A temperature compensated altitude is displayed in slanted text.
Activating temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key. The Temperature Compensation Window is displayed.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the temperature at the <airport>. The compensated altitude is computed as
the temperature is selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the Temperature Compensation Window on the
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MFD, or in the References Window on the PFD. There is only one compensation temperature for the system,
therefore, changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and the minimums.
Refer to the Flight Instruments section for information about applying temperature compensation to the
MDA/DH.
5) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate Compensation?’ is highlighted.
6) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Temperature
AFCS
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Temperature
Compensation
Selected
APPENDICES
Figure 5-116 Temperature Compensation
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
279
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Cancel
Compensation?
Highlighted
Activate
Compensation?
Highlighted
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 5-117 Activating/Cancelling Temperature Compensation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Compensated
Altitudes
Uncompensated
Altitudes
Figure 5-118 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Cancelling temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Temperature Compensation Window is displayed.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘Cancel Compensation?’ is highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key. The temperature compensated altitude at the FAF is cancelled.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Activating/cancelling temperature compensation for the loaded approach altitudes does not select/
deselect temperature compensated minimums (MDA/DH), nor does selecting/deselecting temperature
compensated minimums activate/cancel temperature compensated approach altitudes.
INDEX
APPENDICES
When pilot input for approach waypoint temperature compensation is not used, the system will utilize
the VNAV function in use to offset the lateral position of the baro-VNAV bottom of descent (calculated
by the Transition to Approach feature). Once calculated, the VNAV function seamlessly applies the lateral
adjustment to the baro-VNAV descent path so that a smooth transition onto the approach vertical path occurs.
For example, on a day with temperatures warmer than ISA, the baro-VNAV path will typically be above the
actual approach descent path. The system will automatically adjust for this by calculating a lateral distance
prior to the FAF which is applied to ensure the baro-VNAV path intersects the approach descent path.
NOTE: Initiating the VNAV direct-to function or manually specifying an FPA at the FAF will disrupt the VNAV
function from creating a lateral offset. Thus, temperature is not compensated for and the baro-VNAV path
may not intersect the approach descent path.
280
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.9 TRIP PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on manually entered fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining
fuel).
TRIP PLANNING
EIS
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the AUX Page Group.
Selected Flight Plan Segment
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Trip Planning Page Mode
- Automatic/Manual
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
Trip Statistics
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
AFCS
Fuel Statistics
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
Figure 5-119 Trip Planning Page
APPENDICES
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
• Departure Time - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations are from the
aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated Airspeed - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary source of information
is GPS ground speed.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
• Indicated Altitude - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source of information
is GPS altitude.
281
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
EIS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTs) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track - Desired Track is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints.
It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the destination.
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
AFCS
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected,
then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current
leg being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to
and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the
last leg of the flight plan was selected.
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes
and are the local time at the destination.
282
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FUEL STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (Efficiency) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the current
fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (Total Endurance) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
EIS
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (Remaining Fuel) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (Remaining Endurance) - This value is calculated by taking
the time of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel required for trip (Fuel Required) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Total range at entered fuel flow (Total Range) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Density Altitude
• True Airspeed
The pilot may select Automatic or Manual page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint (WPTs) mode. In
automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTs selection).
Selected Flight Plan NN -
Selected Leg(s)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
AFCS
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
Figure 5-120 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
Selected Flight Plan
Selected Leg(s)
Not Available
APPENDICES
Not Available
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
Figure 5-121 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
283
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
Select the Auto Softkey or the Manual Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Select the FPL Softkey or the WPTs Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
EIS
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the flight plan number field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Inset Map also displays the selected data.
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the WPTs Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The
cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
AFCS
1) Select the Manual Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu, and press the ENT Key. The cursor
may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the Departure Time field and enter the desired value. Press the
ENT Key. The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat
until all desired values have been entered.
284
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
NOTE: All weight & balance page data fields display data rounded to the nearest 5 pounds or 5 kilograms.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Landing Longitudinal CG
Takeoff Longitudinal CG
Aircraft Load Entry
Predicted CG Movement due to
Fuel Burn
Current Longitudinal CG
Estimated Weight Calculator
Graph Softkey
Est. Landing Weight Calculation Est. Landing Fuel Calculation Fuel Reserves Entry Excess Fuel Calculation -
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Fuel Softkey
Confirm Softkey
Figure 5-122 Weight & Balance Page
Takeoff Longitudinal CG
Predicted CG Movement
due to Fuel Burn
Current Longitudinal CG
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Landing Longitudinal CG
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Basic Empty Weight Zero Fuel Weight Calculation Fuel On Board Ramp Weight Calculation Taxi Fuel Entry Takeoff Weight Calculation Current Weight Calculation Longitudinal Station CG Calculation % MAC Calculation -
EIS
- Pilot Weight Entry
- Copilot Weight Entry
- TKS Fluid Weight Entry
- Passenger Middle Weight Entry
- Passenger Left Weight Entry
- Passenger Right Weight Entry
- Baggage Weight Entry
Aircraft Weight & Balance
Calculator
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Zoom Softkey
APPENDICES
Back Softkey
Figure 5-123 Weight & Balance Graph Zoomed
Viewing the zoomed CG graph:
INDEX
1) Press the Graph Softkey.
2) Press the Zoom Softkey to switch between the zoomed and normal view.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
285
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Entering the aircraft load weights:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Pilot’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the weight.
4) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry and move the cursor to the next field.
5) Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
The ‘Zero Fuel Weight’ is calculated by adding the basic empty weight and the aircraft load weights.
Entering the fuel on board weight:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the Fuel Softkey to display the Intital Usable Fuel Page.
2) Add or subtract fuel by using the FMS Knobs.
3) Press the ENT Key or the W&B Softkey to return to the Weight and Balance Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key or the Confirm Softkey to confirm the Weight and Balance Page entries.
The 'Ramp Weight’ is calculated by adding the zero fuel weight and the fuel on board weight.
Entering the taxi fuel weight:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘Taxi Fuel’ field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the taxi fuel weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor
AFCS
The ‘Takeoff Weight’ is calculated by subtracting the taxi fuel weight from the ramp weight. The ‘Current
Weight’ is calculated by subtracting the fuel burn weight from the takeoff weight.
Entering the fuel reserve weight:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘Fuel Reserves’ field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the fuel reserves weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor
286
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When the aircraft is in the air and a destination waypoint has been entered, the fuel calculations can be
completed.
• ‘Est Landing Weight’ = zero fuel weight + estimated landing fuel weight.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• ‘Est Landing Fuel’ = fuel on board weight - (fuel flow x ETE)
• ‘Excess Fuel’ = estimated landing fuel weight - fuel reserves weight
If the aircraft is on the ground or a destination waypoint has not been entered, the following fields display
invalid values consisting of four dashes:
• ‘Est Landing Weight’
EIS
• ‘Est Landing Fuel’
• ‘Excess Fuel’
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WEIGHT AND BALANCE CAUTION AND WARNING CONDITIONS
• If the zero fuel weight is greater than the maximum allowable zero fuel weight, then the zero fuel weight is
displayed in amber.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• If the ramp weight is greater than the maximum allowable ramp weight, then the ramp weight is displayed in
amber.
• If the takeoff weight is greater than the maximum allowable takeoff weight, then the aircraft weight is displayed
in amber.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• If the current weight is outside the envelope, then the current weight is displayed in amber.
• If the estimated landing weight is greater than the maximum allowable landing weight, then the estimated
landing weight is displayed in amber.
• If the estimated landing fuel weight is positive, but less than or equal to the fuel reserves weight, the following
values are displayed in amber:
AFCS
- Estimated landing fuel weight
- Excess fuel weight
• If the estimated landing fuel weight is zero or negative, then the following values are displayed in amber:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Estimated fuel at landing weight
- Excess fuel weight
APPENDICES
• If the ‘Station' is outside the specified CG envelope, then the station value and the MAC are displayed in
amber.
• If the expected fuel burn will place the ‘Station’ outside of the specified CG envelope, then the station value
and the fuel burn line outside of the envelope are displayed in amber.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
287
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.10 RAIM PREDICTION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate
a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic, 2.0 nm for enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal,
and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is
available nearly 100% of the time. The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a
specified date and time. RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival
date and time. Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not
available. RAIM prediction must be initiated manually if there is concern over SBAS coverage at the destination
or some other reason that compromises navigation precision. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the
final approach course, the approach does not become active. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the
missed approach procedure must be flown.
RAIM PREDICTION Box
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Prediction Waypoint
- Arrival Time
- Arrival Date
- RAIM Status
AFCS
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
Prediction
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-124 RAIM Prediction
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘Waypoint’ field is highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
INDEX
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint; or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
288
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘Compute RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Predicting RAIM availability at the aircraft present position:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘Waypoint’ field is highlighted.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set WPT to Present Position’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
EIS
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘Compute RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Status of the RAIM computation for the selected waypoint, time, and date is displayed at the bottom of the
RAIM Prediction Box as follows:
• ‘Compute RAIM?’ - RAIM has not been computed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• ‘Computing Availability’ - RAIM calculation is in progress.
• ‘RAIM Available’ - RAIM is predicted to be available.
• ‘RAIM Not Available’ - RAIM is predicted to be unavailable.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) provides increased navigation accuracy when available. SBAS
can be enabled or disabled manually on the GPS Status Page.
AFCS
SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
APPENDICES
RAIM Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
Prediction
Figure 5-125 SBAS Display - Active
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
289
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Enabling/Disabling SBAS:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key to disable SBAS. Press the ENT Key again to enable SBAS.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SBAS Status
SBAS Selection Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(displays RAIM
Prediction
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-126 SBAS Display - Disabled
290
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.11 NAVIGATING A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the SBAS capable GPS system while
Perspective provides vertical guidance through descents. A lateral flight plan (LNAV) would be navigated in much
the same way, but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active.
NOTE: The following example flight plan is for instructional purposes only. All database information depicted
should be considered not current.
EIS
The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO4 departure, various Victor Airways,
and the DBRY3 arrival with the transition at TBE. The flight plan includes an enroute altitude of 12,000 feet, an
RNAV LPV (WAAS) approach selected for runway 35R, and a missed approach executed at the Missed Approach
Point (MAP). A few enroute changes are demonstrated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Prior to departure, the TIFTO4 departure, the airways, and the DBRY3 arrival at KCOS are loaded. See the
Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals. Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5-127 indicating the
active departure leg.
After takeoff, ATC assigns a heading of 240º.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Figure 5-127 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240º. ‘TERM’ (Terminal) is the current CDI flight
phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1.0 nm CDI scaling.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-127 Assigned Heading of 240º
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
291
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) ATC now assigns routing to join V4. A heading of 290º is assigned to intercept V4. The aircraft turns to heading
290° as seen in Figure 5-128.
Figure 5-128 Assigned Heading of 290º
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Enter V4 into the flight plan.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
292
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) The desired entry point for V4 (TOP) must be entered. Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired
flight plan insertion point (SLN) as shown in Figure 5-129. When the V4 entry point (TOP) is inserted, it is
placed immediately above the highlighted waypoint (SLN).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-129 Begin Adding V4 to the Flight Plan
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. Enter the desired entry point for
V4, Topeka VOR (TOP), as shown in Figure 5-130.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-130 Entering V4 Entry Point
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
293
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Press the ENT Key. TOP is inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5-131.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-131 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan
e) With SLN still highlighted as in Figure 5-131, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise. The Waypoint Information
Page is displayed and the LD AIRWY Softkey is now available.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
f) Press the LD AIRWY Softkey to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5-132.
APPENDICES
Figure 5-132 List of Available Airways for TOP
INDEX
g) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight V4 in the list as seen in Figure 5-132.
294
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
h) Press the ENT Key. The list of available exits for V4 is now displayed as in Figure 5-133.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-133 List of Available Exits for V4
If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to select the desired exit. In this case Salina VOR (SLN) is selected as in
Figure 5-133.
j)
Press the ENT Key. The selected airway and exit are displayed, and the prompt “Load?” highlighted as in
Figure 5-134.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
i)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-134 Ready to Load V4
k) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
295
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
V4 is now loaded into the flight plan as shown in Figure 5-135.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
l)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-135 V4 is Loaded in the Flight Plan
5) Making V4 the active leg of the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ULNAZ. The TO waypoint of the leg is selected in order to activate
the leg.
AFCS
c) Press the ACT LEG Softkey. The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5-136. Note the TOP
to ULNAZ leg is actually part of V4.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-136 Comfirm Active Leg
296
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Verify the displayed leg is the desired leg and press the ENT Key. Note in Figure 5-137, the magenta arrow
in the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4 is now the active flight plan leg. Note
the phase of flight remained in Terminal (TERM) mode up to this point because a departure leg was active.
Since a leg after the departure is now active, the current CDI flight phase is ENR (Enroute) and CDI scaling
has changed to 2.0 nm.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-137 V4 Now Active Leg
6) The aircraft continues on heading 290º. When crosstrack distance is less than 2.0 nm, the XTK disappears from
the HSI and the CDI is positioned on the last dot indicating a 2.0 nm distance from the centerline of the next
course.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
297
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) As the CDI approaches center, the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5-138.
Figure 5-138 Turn on to Active Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) At SLN, Victor Airway 244 (V244) is intercepted. Turn prompts are displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box
as seen in Figure 5-139.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-139 Turn to Intercept V244
298
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) As seen in Figure 5-140, V244 is now the active flight plan leg.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-140 V244 Now Active Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
299
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
10) At Lamar VOR (LAA) V263 is intercepted. See Figure 5-141.
Figure 5-141 HYS to LAA Leg Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11) ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to the OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure. ATC advises
to expect an altitude of 10,000 feet at OPSHN.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to select OPSHN in the flight plan list.
) Key. The Direct-to Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 5-142.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
c) Press the Direct-to (
Figure 5-142 Direct To OPSHN
300
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
d) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the VNV altitude field as shown in Figure 5-143.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-143 Enter VNV Altitude
e) An altitude of 10,000 feet is entered as requested by ATC.
f) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the VNV offset field as shown in Figure 5-144.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-144 Enter VNV Offset Distance
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
301
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
g) Enter the offset, or distance from the waypoint at which to reach the selected altitude. In this case, three
miles prior to OPSHN is entered. In other words, the system gives vertical guidance so the aircraft arrives
at an altitude of 10,000 feet three miles prior to OPSHN.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
h) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to. Note, in Figure 5-145, the magenta arrow indicating
the direct-to OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN. The preceding offset waypoint indicates the
offset distance and altitude that were previously entered. The remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival
procedure have no database specified altitudes, therefore, dashes are displayed. Keep the CDI centered
and maintain a track along the magenta line to OPSHN.
EIS
Note the Direct-to waypoint is within the loaded arrival procedure, therefore, phase of flight scaling for
theCDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
NOTE: If the loaded arrival procedure has waypoints with altitude constraints retrieved from the database
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
to be used as is, the altitude must be manually accepted by placing the cursor over the desired altitude, then
pressing the ENT Key. The altitude is now displayed as cyan meaning it is used by the system to determine
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
APPENDICES
Figure 5-145 Direct-to Active
12) The aircraft is proceeding to OPSHN. The expected approach is the RNAV LPV approach to runway 35R, so it is
selected.
INDEX
a) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
302
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) ‘SELECT APPROACH’ should be highlighted as shown in Figure 5-146.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-146 Procedures Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
c) Press the ENT Key. A list of available approaches for the destination airport is displayed as in Figure 5-147.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-147 List of Available Approaches
APPENDICES
d) Turn either FMS Knob to select the RNAV LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5-147.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
303
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
e) Press the ENT Key. A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed as in Figure 5-148.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-148 List of Available Transitions
f) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired transition. In this case, the Initial Approach Fix (IAF) at HABUK
is used.
g) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
h) Barometric Minimums
To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small
FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
Figure 5-149 Barometric Minimums Set
304
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
i)
With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, again press the ENT Key. The selected approach is added to the flight plan as
seen in Figure 5-150.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-150 Loaded Approach
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
305
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
13) Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5-151. These
altitudes are loaded from the database and are displayed as cyan text, indicating these values are “designated”
for use in computing vertical deviation guidance.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: To no longer use the displayed altitude for calculating vertical deviation guidance, perform the
following:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired altitude.
c) Press the CLR Key.
d) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
After making the altitude “non-designated”, it is displayed as white text.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and waypoints beyond the FAF
cannot be designated for vertical guidance. These altitude values are always displayed as white text, as in
Figure 5-151. Vertical guidance from the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) is given using
the WAAS GPS altitude source, therefore, the displayed altitude values are for reference only.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-151 Vertical Guidance is Active to the FAF
306
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
14) As the aircraft approaches OPSHN, it may be desirable to adjust the speed, or steepness of the upcoming
descent. The default Flight Path Angle (FPA) is -3.0 degrees and a required vertical speed is computed to
maintain the -3.0 FPA. To change the vertical flight path, perform the following steps.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Press the VNV Prof Softkey to place the cursor in the target vertical speed field (VS TGT) as shown in Figure
5-152.
b) At this point, the descent vertical speed can be selected, or the FPA can be selected. Turn the large FMS
Knob to select the desired selection field, then turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired value.
EIS
Note the information now displayed in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ box. Also, note the offset waypoint (orange
box) and gray circle are now displayed on the map. The gray circle marks the Top of Descent (TOD). In this
example, vertical guidance is provided at the TOD that results in a -3.0 degree FPA descent to an altitude
of 10,000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-152 Adjusting the Descent
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
c) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
307
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
15) As seen in Figure 5-153, the aircraft is approaching TOD. Note the target vertical speed required to reach the
selected altitude. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) are
now displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5-154. When the aircraft is within one minute of the TOD, it is
annunciated as shown in Figure 5-154, and an aural alert ‘Vertical track’ will be heard.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-153 Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)
AFCS
Target Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
APPENDICES
Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
(RVSI)
INDEX
Figure 5-154 VDI & RVSI Upon Reaching Top of Descent (TOD)
308
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
16) Upon reaching TOD, a descent vertical speed is established by placing the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as
shown in Figure 5-155.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Keep Vertical Deviation
Indicator Centered
Align Actual Vertical Speed
with
Required Vertical Speed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-155 VDI & RVSI Showing Established Descent
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
17) Approaching the bottom of descent (BOD) as shown in Figure 5-156. Upon reaching the offset waypoint for
OPSHN, the aircraft is at 10,000 feet.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-156 Approaching Bottom of Descent (BOD) at OPSHN Offset Waypoint
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
309
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
18) The aircraft is approaching OPSHN. The upcoming turn and next heading are annunciated at the top left of the
PFD as seen in Figure 5-157. Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircraft on a track through the turn radius to
intercept the magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-157 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg
310
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
19) After passing OPSHN, the next leg of the arrival turns magenta as shown in Figure 5-158. The magenta arrow
in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-158 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
20) The flight continues through the arrival procedure to FSHER. At a point 31 nm from the destination airport, the
phase of flight scaling for the CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the
HSI.
Annunciations for the upcoming turn and descent, as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight
progresses.
AFCS
21) The approach may be activated at any point to proceed directly to the IAF. After FSHER, ATC approves approach
activation. Manually activate the approach procedure:
a) Press the PROC Key.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Approach’ as shown in Figure 5-159.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
c) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
APPENDICES
Figure 5-159 Manually Activate Approach
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
311
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
22) The active leg is now the course direct to HABUK iaf (see Figure 5-160).
Figure 5-160 Approach is Now Active
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
23) A descent to FALUR is in the next leg. Note the TOD point on the map. Annunciations for the upcoming turn
and descent, as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight progresses.
INDEX
Figure 5-161 Descending Turn to the Initial Approach Fix (IAF)
312
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
24) After crossing FALUR the next waypoint is the FAF. The flight phase changes to LPV on the HSI indicating the
current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach service level is LPV. CDI scaling changes accordingly
and is used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach. The RVSI is no longer displayed and the VDI
changes to the Glidepath Indicator (as shown in Figure 5-162) when the final approach course becomes active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-162 Descending to the FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The descent continues to the FAF (CEGIX) using the Glidepath Indicator, as one would use a glideslope indicator,
to obtain an altitude of 8,100 feet at the FAF (Figure 5-162).
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
313
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
25) After crossing CEGIX, the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to “AT or ABOVE”
6,600 feet at the Missed Approach Point (MAP) (RW35R) as seen in Figure 5-163.
Figure 5-163 Descending to the Missed Approach Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
26) Upon reaching the MAP, it is decided to execute a missed approach. Automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended past the MAP. Press the Go Around Button, or press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD, to resume
automatic waypoint sequencing through the missed approach procedure.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
A Course to Altitude leg is initiated and the CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as seen on
the HSI in Figure 5-164.
INDEX
Figure 5-164 Missed Approach Active
314
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
After reaching 6,600 feet, a direct to is initiated to ADANE, which is the Missed Approach Hold Point
(MAHP) as seen in Figure 5-165.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-165 Direct To MAHP
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
315
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
26) The aircraft continues climbing to “AT or ABOVE” 9,000 feet at ADANE. A holding pattern is established at the
MAHP (ADANE) as shown in Figure 5-166.
Figure 5-166 Establishing the Holding Pattern
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
27) The aircraft maintains 10,000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5-167.
INDEX
Figure 5-167 Hold Established
316
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.12 ABNORMAL OPERATION
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and Perspective
stops using GPS.
EIS
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the system detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the system
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by Perspective in DR Mode may become
increasingly unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or
heading data is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated
position and, consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the
aircraft. Estimated position information displayed by Perspective through DR while there is no heading and/or
airspeed data available should not be used for navigation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compounds the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
DR Mode is indicated on the system by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in amber over the
‘own aircraft’ symbol as shown in Figure 5-168. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in amber on the HSI
slightly above and to the right of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-168. The CDI deviation
bar remains, but is removed from the display after 20 minutes in DR Mode. The autopilot will remain coupled
in DR mode as long as the deviation info is available (20 min.) Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’
alert message appears on the PFD. Normal navigation using GPS/SBAS source data resumes automatically once
a valid GPS solution is restored.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as amber text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in Figure
5-168.
Also, while the system is in DR Mode, the autopilot does not couple to GPS, and TAWS, Terrain-SVS, and
Terrain Proximity are disabled. Additionally, the accuracy of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and
waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to function, but with degraded accuracy.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
317
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Ground
Speed
Course Deviation
Indicator
Current
Track
Indicator
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance &
Estimated
Time Enroute
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
Destination
Airport
Information
Nav Data Bar
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
All data except
Active Leg, TAS,
and DTK are in
amber
AFCS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Subdued Aircraft
Symbol
APPENDICES
Figure 5-168 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Amber
NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
INDEX
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
318
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard avoidance features available for the system are designed to aid situational awareness and provide advisory
information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.
Weather
• GDL 69A SiriusXM Weather (Optional)
• GSR 56 Garmin Connext Weather (Optional)
EIS
• Flight Information Services-Broadcast (Optional)
• L-3 Stormscope® WX-500 Lightning Detection System (Optional)
Terrain Avoidance
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Terrain Proximity
• Terrain-SVT (Optional)
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B (TAWS-B) (Optional)
Traffic
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Garmin GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
• Garmin GTX 345 Automatic Dependent Surveillance- Broadcast (ADS-B) Traffic (Optional)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
319
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 SIRIUSXM WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
EIS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The optional GDL 69A and 69A SXM is a remote-mounted data link satellite receiver. Differences in the receiver
models, where applicable, are discussed throughout this section; refer to appropriate aircraft documentation to
determine the receiver model installed in this aircraft. Received graphical weather information and associated
text is displayed on the Multi Function Display (MFD) and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) map. The GDL 69A
and GDL 69A SXM can also receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services. Both weather data and audio
entertainment programming operate in the S-band frequency range to provide continuous reception capabilities
at any altitude throughout North America.
Services from SiriusXM are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit www.
siriusxm.com.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ACTIVATING SERVICES
Before SiriusXM Weather can be used, the service must be activated by providing SiriusXM’s customer service
the coded IDs unique to the installed data link receiver. The SiriusXM Weather service has a coded Data Radio
ID. The Data Radio ID must be provided to activate the weather service. This ID is in the following locations:
AFCS
• The AUX - XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 6-1)
• The SiriusXM Activation Instructions included with the Data Link Receiver
• The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Contact the installer if the Audio and Data Radio IDs cannot be located.
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to display weather data and/
or entertainment programming provided through the GDL 69A.
Establishing an account for SiriusXM services:
APPENDICES
1) Select the XM Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Press the Info Softkey to display the Aux - XM Information Page.
3) Note the Data Radio ID (for SiriusXM Weather) and/or the Audio Radio ID (for SiriusXM Satellite Radio).
4) Contact SiriusXM customer service through the phone number listed on its website, www.siriusxm.com.
INDEX
5) Provide SiriusXM customer service the Data Radio ID and/or Audio Radio ID, in addition to payment information,
and the desired weather product subscription package.
After SiriusXM has been contacted, it may take approximately 15 minutes until the activation occurs.
320
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Verifying the SiriusXM Weather service activation:
1) Once a SiriusXM Weather account has been established, select the XM Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Select the Info Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Observe the list of supported Weather Products. A white empty box appears next to an unavailable weather
product; a green filled box appears next to an available weather product. During activation, it may take several
minutes for weather products in the selected subscription package to become available.
Data Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Weather
EIS
Audio Radio ID
(for SiriusXM Satellite
Radio)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Weather Products
(Available Products for
Service Class Indicated
in Green)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select to Display XM
Information page
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
USING SIRIUSXM WEATHER PRODUCTS
AFCS
The principal map for viewing SiriusXM Weather information is the Weather Data Link (XM) Page in the Map
Page Group. This is the only the system map display capable of showing information for all available SiriusXM
Weather products.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Viewing the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM, CNXT or FIS-B) Page.
APPENDICES
3) If the page title does not contain ‘(XM)’, it will be necessary to change the data link weather source to SiriusXM
Weather. Refer to the next procedure to change the source.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
321
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD Weather
Product Display
Enabled
NEXRAD Weather
Product Ages
(US)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Selected for
Display
Figure 6-2 Weather Data Link (XM) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Changing the data link weather source to SiriusXM:
1) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) If necessary, turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM, CNXT or FIS-B) Page.
3) Press the MENU Key (Figure 6-3).
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
4) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Display XM Weather’. Weather Data Link Page title and
softkeys change to correspond to selected data link weather source.
Figure 6-3 Changing the Data Link Weather Source
INDEX
For each enabled SiriusXM Weather product which can be shown as a map overlay, the system displays a
weather product icon and product age. The product age is the elapsed time (in minutes) since the weather data
provider compiled the weather product. The product age display does not indicate the age of the information
contained within the weather product, which can be significantly older than the displayed weather product age.
322
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The weather product icon and age may be enabled/disabled on the PFD map.
Enabling/disabling Weather Product Information on the PFD map:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) With the PFD map displayed, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD or METAR Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the Lightning Softkey.
b) Press the Datalink Softkey to enable/disable the display of SiriusXM Lightning.
EIS
c) Press the Back Softkey.
Enabling/disabling weather product age information on the PFD map:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) With the PFD map displayed, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) Press the WX LGND Softkey to enable/disable the display of weather product age information.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SiriusXM Weather service broadcasts weather products at specific intervals (defined in the Broadcast
Rate column in Table 6-1). If for any reason, a product is not broadcast within the Expiration Time intervals
(see Table 6-1), the system removes the expired data from the display, and shows dashes instead of the product
age. This ensures the displayed information is consistent with what is currently being transmitted by the
SiriusXM Weather service. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age
changes to amber. If data for a weather product is not available, the system displays ‘N/A’ next to the weather
product symbol instead of the product age.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Table 6-1 shows the weather product symbols, the expiration times and the broadcast rates. The broadcast
rate represents the interval at which the SiriusXM Weather service transmits new signals that may or may not
contain updated weather products. It does not represent the rate at which the weather information is updated
or when the Data Link Receiver receives new data. SiriusXM and its weather data suppliers define and control
the data update intervals, which are subject to change.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
323
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
30
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
60
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
30
15 (69A)
30 (69A SXM)
7.5
SiriusXM Lightning (LTNG)
30
5
Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
30
1.25
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
60
12
METARs
90
12
City Forecast (CITY)
90
12
Surface Analysis (SFC)
60
12
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
120
12
Winds Aloft (WIND)
90
12
County Warnings (COUNTY)
60
5
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
60
12
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
(ICNG)
90
22
90
12
90
12
180
12
30
60
60
5
12
12
SiriusXM Weather Product
Symbol
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD
INDEX
APPENDICES
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Air Report
(AIREPs)
Turbulence
(TURB)
Radar Coverage Not Available
TFRs
TAFs
No product image
No product image
No product image
5 (U.S.)
10 (Canada)
Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
324
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
+
SitiusXM Lightning (LTNG)
+
Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
METARs
+
+
+
+
Surface Analysis (SFC)
+
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
+
Winds Aloft (WIND)
+*
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
City Forecast (CITY)
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
+
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
+
Icing Potential (ICNG)
+
PIREPs
+
+
AIREPs
+
+
Turbulence (TURB)
+
No Radar Coverage
+
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
+
+
+
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
+
AFCS
County Warnings (COUNTY)
TAFs
Flight Plan Pages
+
+
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Trip Planning Page
Weather Data Link (XM)
Page
+
Weather Information Page
Navigation Map Page
+
EIS
NEXRAD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SiriusXM Weather
Product
PFD Inset Map/HSI Map
Table 6-2 shows which SiriusXM Weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific
maps.
APPENDICES
* Winds Aloft data is available inside the VSD when VSD is enabled on the Navigation Map Page.
Table 6-2 Weather Product Display Maps
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Map (Figure 6-4) shows
the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link (XM) Page). When a weather product is selected for
display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product is enabled.
325
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-4 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Weather Product Softkeys
INDEX
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link (XM) Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus
also provide the ability to enable/disable the display of weather products, equivalent to using the softkeys to
enable/disable the display of weather products.
326
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-5).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Product Group 1’ or ‘Product Group 2’, and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-6).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the changed settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-5 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-6 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Setup Menu
Restoring default Weather Data Link (XM) Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’, then press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
6) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
327
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Maps besides the Weather Data Link (XM) Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map
Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-7).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-8).
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-9).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-7 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-8 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-9 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
APPENDICES
When a SiriusXM Weather product is enabled for display on the PFD map, the weather product information
box (with the product icon and age) can be displayed inside the PFD map.
Displaying/removing the weather product information box on the PFD map:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
INDEX
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) To remove the weather product information box, press the WX LGND Softkey again.
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the Weather Data Link (XM)
Page. A weather product legend can also be displayed on the Navigation Map Page for active SiriusXM Weather
products displayed on that page.
328
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page):
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the Legend Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
EIS
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the Legend Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the Navigation Map Page):
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Legend Softkey (available if one or more SiriusXM Weather products are enabled for display).
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the Legend Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the display on the map:
• METARs
• Cloud Tops
• County Warnings
• Cell Movement
• TFRs
• SIGMETs
• AIREPs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Echo Tops
AFCS
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If adjusting the map range while panning is enabled, the map re-centers on the Map Pointer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Additional
Information
on Weather
Feature
Selected with
Map Pointer
Severe
Thunderstorm
Selected with Map
Pointer
INDEX
Figure 6-10 Panning on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
329
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain, echo tops, turbulence,
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
icing data is displayed.
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider compiles the available
individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when
it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual images--gathered from
each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The
data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. The NEXRAD weather product should never be used as a
basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
For radar sites in the United States, the NEXRAD weather product shows a composite reflectivity image.
This shows the highest radar energy received from multiple antenna tilt angles at various altitudes. For radar
sites based in Canada, the NEXRAD weather product shows radar returns from the lowest antenna tilt angle,
known as base reflectivity. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the intensity of the echoes
and the type of precipitation, if known.
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
330
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying NEXRAD weather information:
1) Select the MAP Softkey (for the PFD map, press the Map/HSI Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the NEXRAD Softkey.
A mosaic of data from all the available NEXRAD radar sites is shown. All weather product legends can
be viewed on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page. For the NEXRAD legend, press the Legend Softkey when
NEXRAD is selected for display.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Data with Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in gray shade of purple.
Reflectivity
AFCS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
APPENDICES
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
331
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Undetermined precipitation types may be displayed as mixed.
• An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information
about storms directly over the site.
EIS
• Precipitation may be occurring below the lowest antenna tilt angle (0.5º), and therefore the radar beam
overshoots the precipitation. For example, at a distance of 124 miles from the radar site, the radar beam
is approximately 18,000 feet above the radar site. The radar cannot detect any precipitation occurring
below the beam at this distance and altitude.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• At smaller map ranges, the smallest square block on the display represents an area of approximately
four square kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of radar
reflectivity sampled within the area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Unknown precipitation below 52ºN is displayed as rain regardless of actual precipitation type.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Block represents
approximately 4 km2
Figure 6-13 NEXRAD Weather Product with 30 NM Map Range
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
APPENDICES
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
INDEX
• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
332
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed precipitation, regardless of
actual precipitation type.
• If the precipitation type is unknown, the system displays the precipitation as rain, regardless of actual
precipitation type.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No Coverage
Above 55°N
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Precipitation
Above 52°N
Always Displays
as Mixed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-14 NEXRAD Weather Product - Canada
ECHO TOPS
AFCS
NOTE: Echo tops cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD or Cloud Tops are selected for display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Echo Tops weather product (Figure 6-15) shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest
radar echo. The highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the
highest altitude at which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
333
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-15 Echo Tops Weather Product
Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Echo Top Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
To display the Echo Tops legend (Figure 6-16), press the Legend Softkey when Echo Tops is selected for
display. Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are
removed.
No Radar Coverage
APPENDICES
Figure 6-16 Echo Tops Legend
INDEX
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in gray shade of-purple.
334
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CLOUD TOPS
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If a GDL 69/69A SXM receiver is installed, the broadcast rate for Cloud Tops is 30 minutes. As with
all SiriusXM Weather products, the product age becomes amber when it reaches half of the expiration time,
which is 60 minutes for Cloud Tops. Therefore, this weather product age may be amber during routine
operation.
EIS
The Cloud Tops weather product (Figure 6-17) depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite
imagery.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-17 Cloud Tops Weather Product
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the CLD Top Softkey.
APPENDICES
To display the Cloud Tops legend (Figure 6-18), press the Legend Softkey when Cloud Tops is selected for
display. Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
INDEX
Figure 6-18 Cloud Tops Legend
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
335
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIRIUSXM LIGHTNING
NOTE: SiriusXM Lightning information cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same map as information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
from an optional on-board lightning detection system.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The SiriusXM Lightning weather product (Figure 6-19) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground
lightning strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact
location of the lightning strike is not displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Lightning
Strikes
Figure 6-19 SiriusXM Lightning Weather Product
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The SiriusXM Lightning weather product is available on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Weather Data Link (XM) Page
• Flight Plan Pages
• AUX - Video Page
Displaying SiriusXM Lightning information on Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
APPENDICES
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the XM LTNG Softkey.
INDEX
To display the Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page (Figure 6-20), select the Legend
Softkey when SiriusXM Lightning is selected for display.
Figure 6-20 SiriusXM Lightning Legend
336
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying SiriusXM Lightning information on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select the XM LTNG Softkey.
Displaying SiriusXM Lightning information on PFD map:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
EIS
3) Press the Datalink Softkey.
4) When finished, press the Back Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CELL MOVEMENT
The Cell Movement weather product (Figure 6-21) shows the location and movement of storm cells as
identified by the ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement
indicated with short, orange arrows.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Storm Cells
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-21 Cell Movement Data
APPENDICES
On most applicable maps, Cell Movement information appears with the NEXRAD weather product. On the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page, Cell Movement data can be selected independently.
NOTE: The Storm Cell base height is not available if a GDL 69 SXM or 69A SXM data link receiver is installed.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
In this case, the Storm Cell base height is displayed as 0 feet when the map pointer selects a storm cell.
337
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Cell Movement information on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page using the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the Cell MOV Softkey.
To display the Cell Movement legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, (Figure 6-22), press the Legend
Softkey when Cell Movement is selected for display.
EIS
Figure 6-22 Cell Movement Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
For navigation maps, the pilot can enable/disable the Cell Movement weather product using the NEXRAD
Softkey. For this to occur, the pilot must first enable the ‘Cell Movement’ option in the Map Settings menu
of the Navigation Map Page.
Setting up the system to display Cell Movement with NEXRAD on navigation maps:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for the Cell Movement menu option. When set to ‘On’, Cell Movement
is enabled/disabled with the NEXRAD weather product on navigation maps. When set to ‘Off’, Cell Movement
is not displayed on navigation maps.
6) When finished, push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to remove the menu.
AFCS
After the ‘Cell Movement’ option is set to ‘On’, refer to the previous procedures for enabling/disabling the
NEXRAD weather product to control both products simultaneously on navigation maps using the NEXRAD
Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
APPENDICES
The National Weather Service (NWS) issues SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and
AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information) for potentially hazardous weather. The NWS issues a
Convective SIGMET for hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition
occurring at a localized geographical position.
NOTE: If a GDL 69/69A SXM receiver is installed, the SIGMET and AIRMET weather products are not available
INDEX
unless at least one SIGMET or AIRMET has been received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no
SIGMET or AIRMET is available.
338
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Convective
SIGMET
AIRMET for
Icing conditions
AIRMET
Mountain
Obscuration
EIS
AIRMET for
Turbulence
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIRMET for IFR
conditions
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-23 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-24 shows sample AIRMET text.
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend, press the Legend Softkey when SIGMETs and AIRMETs are
selected for display.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-24 Sample SIGMET Text
Figure 6-25 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
339
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the report. A
colored flag indicates an airport with an available METAR.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
METAR flag
selected with Map
Pointer
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Additional Information on Weather
Feature Selected
with Map Pointer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-26 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link Page
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.
INDEX
APPENDICES
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, then in its original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not found
in the decoded version. TAF information is displayed only in its raw form when it is available.
340
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, press the METAR Softkey.
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
EIS
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note the METAR text must be
completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
AFCS
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-27 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
The original METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map
page. The METAR text appears in a box near the METAR flag.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the
MFD. METAR flags appears next to waypoints in the flight plan with an associated METAR. A solid cyan
METAR flag indicates the METAR observations are available for a specific waypoint; a hollow cyan METAR
flag indicates an off-route METAR near the waypoint is available.
341
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight a waypoint with an associated METAR. The METAR text will appear in the
SELECTED WAYPOINT WEATHER window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
EIS
Original METAR text is also accessible on navigation maps displaying METAR flags. When the map pointer
is panned over a METAR flag, the METAR text is shown in a box near the flag.
Displaying original METAR text information on the PFD map:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the METAR Softkey.
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired METAR flag. Original METAR text appears on the map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) When finished, press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer.
To display the METAR legend (Figure 6-28) on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, press the Legend Softkey
when METARs are selected for display.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The content of the METAR determines the METAR flag color. The METAR flag is gray when the METAR
text does not contain adequate information to determine the condition.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-28 METAR Legend
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST
NOTE: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed Aviation Database
APPENDICES
service area.
INDEX
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
342
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-29 Current Surface Analysis Data
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the SFC Softkey.
4) Press the softkey for the desired forecast time: Current, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey
label changes to show the forecast time selected.
AFCS
Or:
Press the Off Softkey to disable the display of the weather product.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Surface Analysis and City Forecast legend (Figure 6-30), press the Legend Softkey when the
Surface Analysis and City Forecast are enabled for display.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-30 Surface Analysis Legend
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
343
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FREEZING LEVELS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Freezing Level weather product (Figure 6-31) shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and
location at which the first isotherm is found. When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that
altitude has not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears
when it becomes available.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-31 Freezing Level Data
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
AFCS
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the FRZ LVL Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Freezing Level legend (Figure 6-32), press the Legend Softkey when Freezing Level data is
selected to be displayed.
INDEX
Figure 6-32 Freezing Level Legend
344
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WINDS ALOFT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Winds Aloft weather product (Figure 6-33) shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface
and at selected altitudes. Altitude can be chosen in 3,000-foot increments from the surface up to 42,000 feet
MSL.
Displaying the Winds Aloft weather product:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the FMS Knob.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
EIS
3) Select the Wind Softkey.
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Select the Next or Prev Softkey
to cycle through the altitude softkeys. The Wind Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-33 Winds Aloft Data at 12,000 Feet
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-34), press the Legend Softkey when Winds Aloft is selected
for display.
APPENDICES
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Figure 6-34 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
345
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Profile View on the Navigation Map Page
(Figure 6-35). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to aircraft
speed.
Winds Aloft Data Age
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Scale
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-35 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on
Profile View
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-3.
Headwind
Symbol
Tailwind
Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind
Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
5 knots
10 knots
APPENDICES
50 knots
INDEX
Table 6-3 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
346
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling the Vertical Situation Display (containing winds aloft data):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable/disable the Vertical Situation Display.
Or:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
EIS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Winds Aloft data inside the VSD is enabled by default when the VSD is displayed on the Navigation Map
Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display for the VSD:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-36).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘VSD’ and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-37).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Winds on/off field. (Figure 6-38).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-36 Navigation Map Page Menu
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-37 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Figure 6-38 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, VSD Group
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
347
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
COUNTY WARNINGS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The County Warning weather product (Figure 6-39) provides specific public awareness and protection
weather warnings from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on severe
thunderstorms, tornadoes, and flood conditions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Thunderstorm
Warning
Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flood
Warnings
Figure 6-39 County Flood Warning
Displaying County Warning information:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the FMS Knob.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the County Softkey.
APPENDICES
To display the County Warnings legend (Figure 6-40), press the Legend Softkey when County Warnings
are selected to be displayed.
INDEX
Figure 6-40 County Warnings Legend
348
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CYCLONE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cyclone weather product (Figure 6-41) shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical
storms, and their projected tracks. The system displays the projected track information in the form of
DD/HH:MM.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cyclone
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-41 Cyclone Data Selected for Display
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the FMS Knob.
AFCS
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the Cyclone Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Cyclone legend (Figure 6-42), press the Legend Softkey when Cyclones are selected to be
displayed.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-42 Cyclone Legend
NOTE: If a GDL 69/69A SXM receiver is installed, the Cyclone weather product is not available unless at
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
least one cyclone or tropical storm has been received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no
cyclone or tropical storm has been received.
349
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ICING (CIP & SLD)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Current Icing Product (CIP) weather product (Figure 6-43) shows a graphical view of the current icing
environment. Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific
to aircraft type). The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time
of the analysis.
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
EIS
Displaying the Icing weather product:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the ICNG Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Select the Next or PREV Softkey to
cycle through the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to indicate the altitude selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Supercooled Large
Droplet Threat
Light Icing Potential
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Moderate Icing
Potential
APPENDICES
Figure 6-43 Icing Data at 9,000 Feet
INDEX
To display the Icing Potential legend (Figure 6-44), press the Legend Softkey when Icing is enabled for
display.
Figure 6-44 Icing Potential Legend
350
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TURBULENCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Turbulence weather product (Figure 6-45) identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude
air mass associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between
21,000 and 45,000 feet. Turbulence data is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
Displaying the Turbulence weather product:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
EIS
3) Select the TURB Softkey.
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the Next or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to indicate the altitude selection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-45 Turbulence Data at 21,000 Feet
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Turbulence legend (Figure 6-46), press the Legend Softkey when Turbulence is selected for
display.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-46 Turbulence Legend
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
351
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PIREPS AND AIREPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) (Figure 6-47) are in-flight weather observations collected from pilots.
When significant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required
to solicit PIREPs. A PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing
conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
A similar type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). Commercial airlines typically provide AIREPs.
EIS
Urgent
PIREP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIREP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Routine
PIREP
Selected
PIREP selected with
Map Pointer
Figure 6-47 AIREPs and PIREPs on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
AFCS
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the AIREPS or PIREPS Softkey.
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
when it is selected.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information
not present in the decoded version.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
352
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Decoded PIREP Text
EIS
Selected PIREP
Raw PIREP Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-48 PIREP Text on the Weather Information Page
To display the PIREP or AIREP legend (Figure 6-49), press the Legend Softkey when PIREPs or AIREPs are
enabled for display.
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-49 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
TEMPORARY FLIGHT RESTRICTIONS (TFRS)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
APPENDICES
The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) to designate areas
where flight is restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including national security,
law enforcement, natural disasters, airshows, and large sporting events. The FAA may issue TFRs at any time,
and TFR information displayed on the system is only intended to supplement TFR information obtained from
official sources including Flight Service Stations (FSS), and Air Traffic Control facilities.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR product is not available or has expired, the system
displays ‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
353
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Information for
selected TFR
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-50 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page or Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information window.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
Figure 6-51 Full Text for Selected TFR
INDEX
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the
TFR product data is removed from the map.
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
354
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-52).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aviation’ group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-53).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range setting (Figure 6-54).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (‘Off’ or range settings).
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-52 Navigation Map Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-54 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Aviation Group
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-53 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
355
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.2 FIS-B WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
EIS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Garmin GTX 345R is a Universal Access Transceiver (UAT). If equipped with the GTX 345R, it receives
Flight Information Services - Broadcast (FIS-B) weather data from a network of UAT ground-based transceivers
(GBTs). The system displays FIS-B graphical weather information and associated text on the Weather Data Link
Page and on navigation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FIS-B weather data reception requires the aircraft being within range and line-of-sight of an operating GBT
broadcasting FIS-B weather data. Reception may be affected by factors including altitude or terrain.
Reception of FIS-B weather data occurs automatically without any pilot action. FIS-B broadcasts provide
weather data in a repeating cycle which may take approximately ten minutes to transmit all available weather
data. Therefore, not all available weather data may be available immediately upon initial FIS-B signal acquisition.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
USING FIS-B WEATHER PRODUCTS
The primary map for viewing FIS-B Weather data is the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page in the Map Page
Group.
Viewing the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page:
AFCS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B, CNXT or XM) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) If the page title displays a weather data link weather source other than ‘FIS-B’, such as ‘XM’, proceed to the
following steps to change the data link weather source.
4) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Display FIS-B Weather’ and press the ENT Key. The page title will display
‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ to indicate FIS-B is now the selected data link weather source.
On the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) page, the pilot can enable/disable the FIS-B weather feature, which includes
all FIS-B weather products and related softkeys on various maps.
Enabling/disabling the FIS-B weather feature:
INDEX
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Enable FIS-B Weather’ or ‘Disable FIS-B Weather’, and press the ENT Key.
356
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Weather Product Ages
for SIGMET and AIRMET
Weather Products.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-55 Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page with SIGMETs/AIRMETs Displayed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When a FIS-B weather product is active on a map, the age of the data is displayed on the screen to the right
of the product symbol (Figure 6-55). The age of the product is based on the time difference between when
the data was assembled on the ground and the current GPS time. Weather products are transmitted at specific
intervals (defined in the Broadcast Rate column in Table 6-4).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the Expiration Time intervals (see Table 6-4), the
data is considered expired and is removed from the display. This ensures that the displayed data is consistent
with FIS-B broadcast data. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age
displayed changes to amber. The system displays dashes instead of a product age when a product has expired.
If a weather product is not available or has not been received, the system displays ‘N/A’ instead of a product age.
AFCS
Table 6-4 shows the FIS-B weather product symbols, the expiration times, and broadcast rates. The broadcast
rate represents the interval at which FIS-B GBTs broadcast new signals that may or may not contain new weather
data. It does not represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content is received by the UAT.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
357
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FIS-B Weather Product
Symbol
Expiration Time Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
(Minutes)
NEXRAD Composite (US)
30
15
NEXRAD Composite (Regional)
30
2.5
90
5
90
10
90
10
60
5
EIS
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
No Radar Coverage
no product image
30
2.5
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
no product image
60
10
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
no product image
10
Table 6-4 Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
METARs
+
+
+
+
+
+
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
PIREPs
No Radar Coverage
+
+
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
+
TAFs
+
+
+
+
+
+*
+
TFRs
+
Winds Aloft* (WIND)
INDEX
+
Flight Plan Pages
+
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Video Page
Weather Data Link
(XM) Page
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
Navigation Map Page
NEXRAD
FIS-B Weather Product
Weather Information
Page
PFD Inset Map/HSI
Map
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-5 shows which FIS-B weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific
maps.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
* Winds Aloft information appears inside the VSD Inset Window on the Navigation Map Page.
Table 6-5 FIS-B Weather Product Display Maps
358
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD map (Figure 6-56)
shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page. When a weather product is
enabled for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-56 Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Weather Product Softkeys
AFCS
Maps besides the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map
Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Setting up and customizing FIS-B weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-57).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-58).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-59).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings).
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
359
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 6-57 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-58 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-59 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus
also provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-60).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Product Group 1’, and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-61).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
INDEX
APPENDICES
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page with the changed settings.
360
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-60 Weather Data Link
(FIS-B) Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-61 Weather Data Link (FIS-B)
Page Setup Menu
Restoring default Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-60).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Product Group 1’, and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-61).
5) If restoring an individual weather product setting to its default value, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the
desired field to restore.
AFCS
6) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Turn the large FMS Knob if needed to highlight ‘Restore Selection Default’ (to restore only the highlighted field)
or ‘Restore All Defaults’ (to restore all products within the selected product group to their default settings), and
press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
361
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
If multiple data link weather services are installed, customizing the display settings for the corresponding
weather products shown in Table 6-6 will result in identical settings for all services.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SiriusXM Weather Product and Softkey
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD) and No Radar Coverage
Cloud Top
(CLD TOP)
SiriusXM Lightning
(XM LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
FIS-B Weather Product
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD) and No Radar Coverage
Not Available
Not Available
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Table 6-6 Weather Data Link Map Settings Shared for Multiple Weather Data Link Sources
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When a FIS-B weather product is enabled for display on the PFD map, the weather product information box
(with the product icon and age) can be displayed inside the PFD map.
Displaying/removing the weather product information box on the PFD map:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
AFCS
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) Press the WX LGND Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the Weather Data Link
(FIS-B) Page. A weather product legend can also be displayed on the Navigation Map Page for active FIS-B
weather products displayed on that page.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
2) Select the Legend Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
3) To remove the Legend Window, select the Legend Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
362
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the Navigation Map Page):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select the Legend Softkey (available if one or more FIS-B weather products are enabled for display).
4) To remove the Legend Window, select the Legend Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
Additional information about METARs or TFRs can be displayed by panning over a METAR flag or TFR on
the map:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Information for
selected TFR
EIS
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-62 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
363
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider to FIS-B compiles
the available individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time
to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual
images--gathered from each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD
weather product age. The data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the FIS-B GBTs, which transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. NEXRAD information should never be used as a basis for
maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Boundary
of Regional
NEXRAD Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
No radar coverage
within coverage
boundary
APPENDICES
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
INDEX
Figure 6-63 Regional NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
364
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The FIS-B NEXRAD weather product may be displayed for a region around the GBT (higher resolution,
updated more frequently) or for across the continental United States (lower resolution, updated less
frequently). A combined version of both weather products is also available for display on the same map.
When the combined NEXRAD is selected, regional NEXRAD takes display precedence where data is available,
and continental US NEXRAD is displayed outside of the regional NEXRAD coverage area. Displaying the
NEXRAD weather product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
2) Select the NEXRAD Softkey. Each selection cycles though a coverage option as the softkey name changes (US,
RGNL, or US/RGNL.
EIS
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select the NEXRAD Softkey.
3) To change the type of NEXRAD displayed, press the MENU Key.
4) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group, then press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Data Region field.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘CONUS’ (continental United States), ‘RGNL’ (regional), or ‘Combined’,
then press the ENT Key. This selection also affects the PFD map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on PFD map:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey to enable/disable the display of NEXRAD.
AFCS
The regional NEXRAD weather product coverage area varies, as it is determined by the data received from
ground-based sources. When the regional NEXRAD weather product is enabled, a white hashed boundary
rectangle encloses this area to indicate the geographic limits of the regional NEXRAD coverage being displayed.
The system shows composite radar data from all available NEXRAD sites inside of this boundary area.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If the continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product is shown (US Softkey enabled),
the coverage boundary is not shown on the map.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
365
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Continental
USA NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No radar coverage
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-64 Continental US (CONUS) NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the
information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed
on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page. For the NEXRAD legend (Figure 6-65), select the Legend Softkey
when the NEXRAD weather product is enabled.
APPENDICES
No radar coverage
Figure 6-65 NEXRAD Weather Product Legend
INDEX
The display of no radar coverage is enabled when NEXRAD is selected for display. Areas where radar data
is not currently available, has not yet been received, or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple.
366
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: If the system has not received all available NEXRAD weather data (such as during initial FIS-B signal
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
acquisition or in areas of marginal or poor signal reception), the system may display areas of no radar
coverage which are subsequently removed as radar data is received. It may take up to approximately ten
minutes to receive all FIS-B data, when adequate reception is available.
Reflectivity
EIS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• At smaller map ranges, individual blocks of NEXRAD weather data are viewable. For the regional version
of the NEXRAD weather product, the smallest block represents 1.5 nm wide by 1 nm tall. For the
continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product, each block is 7.5 nm wide by 5 nm
wide. The color of each block represents the highest radar reflectivity detected within that area.
• The continental US version of the NEXRAD weather product is not available above 60º of latitude.
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
AFCS
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
APPENDICES
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A localized SIGMET can be displayed when significant
weather conditions are not widespread.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
367
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The entire SIGMET or AIRMET is shown as long as any portion of it is issued within the selected coverage
area of the Connext Data Request.
EIS
AIRMET for
Mountain
Obscuration
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIRMET for
Turbulence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRMET for Surface
Winds
Figure 6-66 SIGMET/AIRMET Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-67 shows sample SIGMET text.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-67), select the Legend Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
INDEX
Sample SIGMET Text
SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Figure 6-67 SIGMET/AIRMET Text and Legend
368
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The system will begin to display METAR flags as it receives reports; however it may take approximately
ten minutes for all available METAR and TAF data to be received over a FIS-B broadcast.
EIS
Aviation Routine Weather Reports or METARs typically contain current information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect routine hourly observations. An Aviation Selected Special Report or SPECI includes
the code “SPECI” in the report, and may be issued if critical information has changed after the issuance of a
METAR. The system displays colored flags at airports with report(s) available.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Original text
for selected
METAR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METAR
Flag Selected
with Map
Pointer
AFCS
Figure 6-68 METARs on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are predications of expected weather conditions for an area within
five statute miles of the center of an airport’s runway complex. The National Weather Service issues scheduled
TAFs four times each day, and additional amended TAFs if conditions warrant. TAFs typically span a forecast
period of 24 hours, but may be scheduled for a longer period. TAFs may include forecast wind, visibility,
significant weather phenomena, and sky conditions using METAR codes.
METAR and TAF text are available on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not
found in the decoded version. TAF information, when available, appears only in its original text.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
369
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page, press the METAR Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
EIS
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Decoded METAR
Text
Original TAF Text
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-69 METAR and TAF Information on WPT - Weather Information Page
370
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Original METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map page
on which a METAR is displayed. The METAR text is shown in a box near the METAR flag.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
METAR flags appears next to waypoints in the flight plan with an associated METAR. A solid METAR flag
indicates the METAR observations are available for specific waypoint; a hollow METAR flag indicates an offroute METAR is available near the waypoint.
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint. The METAR text will appear in the ‘Selected
Waypoint Weather’ Window below.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page (Figure 6-70), select the Legend
Softkey when METARs are selected for display.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. The system displays a gray
METAR flag when the METAR text does not contain adequate classification information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-70 METAR Legend
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
371
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WINDS AND TEMPERATURES ALOFT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Winds and Temperatures Aloft weather product (Figure 6-71) shows the predicted temperature, wind
speed and direction at selected altitudes. Winds and temperatures aloft are available in various altitudes
between 1,000 feet and 53,000 feet MSL.
Displaying Winds Aloft information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
EIS
3) Press the Wind Softkey.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the softkey for the desired altitude. Press the Next or PREV Softkey to cycle through the altitude softkeys.
A cyan indication appears on the Wind Softkey to show the selected winds aloft altitude.
Figure 6-71 Winds Aloft Weather Product with 9,000 Feet Selected
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-72), select the Legend Softkey when Winds Aloft is selected
for display.
INDEX
Figure 6-72 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
372
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available in the VSD Inset Window on the Navigation Map
Page (Figure 6-73). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to
aircraft speed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Track Mode
Boundary of VSD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected VSD
Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude
Winds Aloft
information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-73 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data in the VSD
Tailwind
Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind
Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Headwind
Symbol
AFCS
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-7.
5 knots
APPENDICES
10 knots
50 knots
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Table 6-7 VSD Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
373
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling the VSD (containing winds aloft data):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Select the Inset Softkey.
Or:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ (choice dependent on current state) and press
the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Winds Aloft data inside the VSD Window is enabled by default when the VSD is displayed on the Navigation
Map Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display in the VSD:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Settings highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-74).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the VSD Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-75).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Winds’ (Figure 6-76).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-74 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-75 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
374
Figure 6-76 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PIREPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) describe in-flight weather encountered by pilots. A PIREP may contain
adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, turbulence, and type
of aircraft flown. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
EIS
PIREP selected with Map
Pointer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Urgent PIREP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-77 PIREPs on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
Displaying PIREP text:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
AFCS
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the PIREPS Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
when it is selected.
5) Press the ENT Key. The PIREP text is first displayed in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note
the original text may contain additional information not shown in the decoded version.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP text.
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to close the PIREP text window and return to the Weather Data Link (FIS-B)
Page.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
375
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PIREP Age in
Hours + Minutes
EIS
Decoded PIREP Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Original PIREP Text
Figure 6-78 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To display the PIREP legend (Figure 6-79), select the Legend Softkey when PIREPs are selected for display.
The PIREP color is determined by the report type (routine or urgent).
Figure 6-79 PIREPs Weather Product Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TFRS
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
APPENDICES
In the United States, the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs)
to designate areas where flight is restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including
national security, law enforcement, natural disasters, airshows, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued
at any time, and TFR data displayed is only intended to supplement official TFR information obtained from
Flight Service Stations (FSS), and air traffic control.
INDEX
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR data is not available or has expired, the system displays
‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
376
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Information for
selected TFR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-80 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page or Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
Information Window.
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the Information Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-81 Full Text for Selected TFR
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
377
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the
TFR product data is removed from the map.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Setting up and customizing TFR data for navigation maps:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
3) With Map Settings highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-82).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-83).
5) Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the TFR On/Off setting.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-82 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-84 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Aviation Group
INDEX
Figure 6-83 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
378
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FIS-B WEATHER STATUS
Additional information about the status of FIS-B weather products is available on the AUX - ADS-B Status
Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Viewing FIS-B status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - ADS-B Status Page.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-85 Viewing FIS-B Weather Status on ADS-B Status Page
FIS-B Weather Status:
FIS-B Processing
DISABLED
---------------AVAILABLE
Description
The FIS-B weather feature is enabled to process and display FIS-B weather
products.
The FIS-B weather feature is disabled.
No data received from the GTX 345R UAT.
FIS-B weather data is available for display for the weather product.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOT AVAILABLE FIS-B weather data is not available for the weather product, and/or the system is
not receiving the FIS-B weather service.
APPENDICES
AWAITING DATA The system is receiving the FIS-B weather service, and is waiting to receive the
weather product from the FIS-B data broadcast.
INDEX
Weather Products:
AIRMET
CONUS NEXRAD
METAR
METAR GRAPHICAL
NOTAM/TFR
PIREP
REGIONAL NEXRAD
SIGMET
TAF
WINDS/TEMPS ALOFT
Status
Message
ENABLED
AFCS
ADS-B Status Page Item
Table 6-8 AUX-ADS-B Status Page Messages for FIS-B Weather
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
379
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.3 GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
EIS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The availability of specific Garmin Connext Weather products varies by region. For product coverage
information, refer to http://sites.garmin.com/connext.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The optional GSR 56 Iridium satellite data link receiver provides extensive weather information to the system.
The system displays graphical weather information and its associated text on the Multi Function Display (MFD)
and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map.
The system provides weather information after the flight crew selects either a manual or automatic Connext
Data Request on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page on the MFD.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Garmin Connext Weather requires an active subscription to both the Iridium satellite telephone and Garmin
Connext weather data services. Refer to the Additional Features section for information on registering for Garmin
Connext services.
REGISTERING THE SYSTEM FOR GARMIN FLIGHT DATA SERVICES
AFCS
When an account is established, Garmin Flight Data services provides an Access Code which must be entered
in the system in order to complete the registration process.
Registering the system to receive Connext Weather:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the aircraft outside and having a clear view of the sky, turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the
MAP page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Map-Weather Data Link (CNXT, XM or FIS-B) Page. If ‘XM’ is
displayed in the page title, it will be necessary to change the data link source to CNXT before continuing. Refer
to ‘Viewing the Weather Data Link Page’ procedure to change the data link source to CNXT prior to registration.
APPENDICES
3) If the system displays the ‘Connext Registration’ window, proceed to step 7. Otherwise, press the MENU Key.
The Page Menu window is now displayed as seen in Figure 6-86.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Register With Connext’ in the menu list.
6) Press the ENT Key. The Connext Registration window is displayed as shown in Figure 6-87.
INDEX
7) Enter the access code provided by Garmin Flight Data Services in the Access Code field.
8) Press the ENT Key. ‘Register’ will now be highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key. The system will contact Garmin Flight Data Services. System registration is complete when
‘Registered’ is displayed in the Status field.
380
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-86 Select Register With CNXT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-87 Enter Access Code
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ACCESSING GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER PRODUCTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The principal map for viewing Garmin Connext Weather information is the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
in the Map Page Group (Figure 6-88). This is the only map display capable of showing information for all
available Garmin Connext Weather products. No weather data is displayed until the system completes the first
crew-initiated Connext Data Request.
Viewing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page:
AFCS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (CNXT, XM or FIS-B) Page. If the page title does
not contain ‘Display Connext Weather’, continue with this procedure to change the data link weather source
from SiriusXM to Garmin Connext.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Display Connext Weather’, then press the ENT Key. Page
title displays ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
381
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Weather
product age
information
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Precip Weather
Product Display
Enabled icon
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Precip Weather
Product Selected
for Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-88 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
(After CNXT Weather Request)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When a weather product is selected for display on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page, a box containing a
symbol for the product and its age (in minutes) are shown in the upper right (Figure 6-88). If weather data has
not been requested yet or is not available, ‘N/A’ is shown next to the product symbol instead of age. The age of
the weather product is based on the time difference between when the data was assembled on the ground and
the current GPS time.
The Garmin Connext weather service updates its available weather products either continuously or at specific
intervals, depending on the weather product. Refer to the Refresh Rate column in Table 6-9. The flight crew
determines when and how often to access the data from Garmin Connext.
AFCS
If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the defined Expiration Time intervals (see Table
6-4), the data is considered expired and is removed from the display. The age of the expired product is replaced
by dashes. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age changes to amber.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As an additional reference, the Garmin Connext Weather product symbol and age can be enabled/disabled
for display on the PFD map.
Enabling/disabling Weather Product Information on PFD map:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) Press the WX LGND Softkey to display or remove weather product icon and age data when a data link weather
product is shown on the PFD map.
INDEX
Table 6-9 shows the Garmin Connext Weather product symbols, the expiration time and the refresh rates.
The refresh rate represents the interval at which the Garmin Connext ground-based infrastructure makes
available the most current known weather data. It does not necessarily represent the rate at which new content
is received from weather sources.
382
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The availability of specific Garmin Connext Weather products varies by region. For product coverage
information, refer to http://sites.garmin.com/connext.
Symbol
Radar Precipitation
(PRECIP)
30
Refresh Rate
(Minutes)
U.S.: 3*
Canada: 3*†
Europe: 15
Australia: 15ˆ
Continuous
60
Continuous
90
Continuous
90
Continuous
90
Continuous
60
Continuous
60
Continuous
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
30
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
30
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
60
EIS
Infrared Satellite
(IR SAT)
Data Link Lightning
(DL LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Temporary Flight Restrictions
no product image
(TFRs)
Terminal Aerodrome Reports
no product image
(TAFs)
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Garmin Connext Weather
Product
AFCS
* The composite precipitation image is updated every 3 minutes, but individual radar sites may take
between 3 and 10 minutes to provide new data.
†
Canadian radar precipitation data provided by Environment Canada.
ˆ Australian radar precipitation data provided by the Australia Bureau of Meteorology
Table 6-9 Garmin Connext Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
383
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Datalink Lightning (LTNG)
+
+
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
+
+
+
+
+*
PIREPs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Winds Aloft (WIND)
+
+
+
Radar Coverage
+
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
+
+
+
TAFs
+
+
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
METARs
Flight Plan Pages
Infrared Satellite (IR SAT)
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Video Page
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
+
Weather Information
Page
Weather Data Link
(CNXT) Page
Precipitation (PRECIP)
Navigation Map Page
EIS
Garmin Connext Weather
Product
PFD Inset Map/HSI
Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 6-10 shows which Garmin Connext Weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol)
on specific system maps.
+
* Winds Aloft data available on Navigation Map Page inside Profile View window.
Table 6-10 Garmin Connext Weather Product Display Maps
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD map. (Figure 6-89)
shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page. When a weather product is
selected for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product display is enabled.
384
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-89 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Softkeys (MFD)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus
also provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-90).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Product Group 1’ or ‘Product Group 2’, and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-91).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, maximum map range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
APPENDICES
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
385
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-90 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Menu
Figure 6-91 Weather Data Link
(CNXT) Page Setup Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Restoring default Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If both Garmin Connext Weather and SiriusXM weather services are installed, customizing the display settings
for the corresponding weather products shown in Table 6-11 will result in identical settings for both services.
386
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Garmin Connext Weather
Product (CNXT)
Precipitation
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD)
(PRECIP)
Cloud Top
Infrared Satellite
(CLD TOP)
(IR SAT)
SiriusXM Lightning
Garmin Connext Lightning
(DL LTNG)
(XM LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
(PIREPs)
SiriusXM Weather Product
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-11 Corresponding Weather Data Link Product Settings
Maps besides the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation
Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-92).
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-93).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-94).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
387
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 6-92 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-93 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-94 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Each active weather product (with the exception of TFRs) has an associated legend which can be displayed
on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page. If no weather product softkeys are selected, the Legend Softkey is
subdued.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
AFCS
2) Select the Legend Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
4) To remove the Legend Window, select the Legend Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the display on the map:
• Infrared Satellite (IR SAT)
• METARs
• SIGMETs
• TFRs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
INDEX
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
388
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Pointer on
METAR flag symbol
Additional
information for
selected METAR
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-95 Panning on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
CONNEXT DATA REQUESTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Connext Data Request Menu provides the flight crew with the options to define the requested weather
coverage area(s), choose automatic weather update intervals (if desired), and the ability to send or cancel
weather data requests. A ‘Request Status’ window inside the menu shows the status of the Connext Data
Request.
AFCS
Before a Connext Data Request can occur, a valid request coverage area must be defined from which all
currently available Garmin Connext Weather products will be retrieved. At a minimum, either the aircraft’s
present position or a waypoint (as part of a flight plan or entered directly in the ‘Waypoint’ coverage field) must
be part of the request coverage area, otherwise the request status window indicates ‘Invalid Coverage Area’ and
the system will not allow a request to occur.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
It is not necessary for a destination (based on an active flight plan), a flight plan, or waypoint to be specified
prior to enabling these coverage areas; however no weather data will be retrieved for these option(s) until a
flight plan or waypoint is provided, respectively.
Manually Requesting Garmin Connext Weather information:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-96).
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
389
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired coverage option(s) and press the ENT Key to show or hide a
green check mark to select one of more of the following coverage selections (Figures 6-97, 6-98):
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• Destination – Requests data based on the active flight plan destination (Direct-To destinations excluded).
See the Flight Management section for more information about entering and activating flight plans.
• Present Position – Requests data based on current location.
• FPL – Requests data along an active flight plan, if one currently exists. Turn the small FMS Knob to select
the desired flight plan look-ahead distance option (or choose ‘Remaining FPL’ to request weather data for the
remainder of the flight plan), then press the ENT Key.
EIS
• Waypoint – Requests data based on a waypoint (which may be off-route). Turn the large and small FMS
Knobs to enter a waypoint, then press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob highlight to the ‘Diameter / Route Width’ distance field and turn the small FMS Knob
to select the desired diameter and route width of the request, then press the ENT Key.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the large FMS Knob until the ‘Send Request’ field is highlighted. Press the ENT Key to initiate the request
immediately or press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page without requesting
weather data.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-96 Weather Data Link (GFDS) Page Menu
INDEX
Figure 6-97 GFDS Data Request Window
390
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Destination Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
EIS
Present Position Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Next 80 nm of Flight Plan
Selected, 200 nm Route
Width Requested
Off-Route Waypoint
Selected, 200 nm Diameter
Requested
AFCS
Figure 6-98 Garmin Connext Weather Data Request Results with Precipitation Data Displayed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
During a Connext Data Request, the Request Status Window initially displays “Contacting Connext...”. Once
a connection is established, the Request Status Window displays “Receiving Wx Data... Time Remaining:” with
an estimated data transfer time (either minutes or seconds). If desired, the Connext Data Request Menu may
be removed while the data request is processing by pressing the FMS Knob; the data request will continue
to process in the background. Connext Data Requests typically take between 1 to 4 minutes to complete
depending on the size of the selected weather coverage area, the amounts of weather activity present, and the
Iridium signal strength.
INDEX
The system retrieves all available Garmin Connext Weather products within the selected coverage area during
an initial Connext Data Request, regardless of which products (if any) are currently enabled for display. On
subsequent requests, the system retains previously retrieved textual data (such as METARs and TAFS) if it has
not expired, while new textual weather data matching the current coverage area and all graphical weather data
is transferred to the aircraft during every data request.
At the completion of a successful weather data request, the request status window (if still open) will indicate
‘OK’.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
391
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Cancelling a Connext Data Request in Progress:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Cancel Request’ field and press the ENT Key. The request status box
indicates ‘Request Cancelled’.
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
EIS
The flight crew can schedule Connext Data Requests to recur automatically. Automatic requests remain
enabled until the flight crew them, or the system power is removed. The Request Status Window indicates the
number of minutes or seconds until the next automatic data request occurs.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: If automatic Connext Data Requests were enabled prior to the system entering Reversionary Mode,
the automatic weather data requests will continue in Reversionary Mode, however the Connext Data
Request Window and its associated options will not be available in Reversionary Mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Enabling/disabling automatic Connext Data Requests:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Choose the desired weather coverage options.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Update Rate’ field. Then turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the
desired automatic update frequency (Off, 5 Min, 10 Min, 15 Min, 20 Min, 30 Min, 45 Min, or 60 Min), then press
the ENT Key.
AFCS
6) The ‘Send Request’ field is highlighted and a countdown timer is displayed in the ‘Request Status’ Window
based on the currently selected update rate. Press the ENT Key to immediately send an immediate Connext
Data Request.
Or:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
392
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER PRODUCTS
PRECIPITATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Precipitation data cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain data.
EIS
The Precipitation weather product provides radar precipitation information in selected radar coverage areas.
This information comes from individual weather radar sites and weather data sources such as government
agencies. Each radar site or source may provide weather data at differing rates and times. Periodically, the
Garmin Connext Weather service compiles the available information to form a composite image, and assigns
a single time to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the Precipitation weather product.
Individual images--gathered from each radar site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed
Precipitation weather product age.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the Precipitation weather product, the
displayed weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current
radar synopsis and may not depict the current weather conditions. The Precipitation weather product should
never be used as a basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the
information it contains.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Precipitation
Weather Product
Icon and Age
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Boundary of
weather data
request
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Precipitation
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-99 Precipitation Data on the Weather Data Link (GFDS) Page
Precipitation data can be displayed on the following maps:
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Weather Data Link (GFDS) Page
• Flight Plan Pages
• Airport Information Page
• AUX - Video Page
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
• PFD Inset Map
393
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying Precipitation weather information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
2) Select the PRECIP Softkey.
1) Select the Map Opt Softkey (for PFD map, press the Map/HSI). This step is not necessary on the Weather Data
Link (CNXT) Page.
EIS
The system displays either base or composite radar imagery, depending on the region.
Region
Radar Reflectivity Type
United States
Composite Reflectivity
Canada, Europe, Australia
Base Reflectivity
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The base reflectivity precipitation weather product shows the radar returns from the perspective of a single
antenna tilt angle. The composite reflectivity precipitation weather product shows the highest radar energy
received from multiple antenna tilt angles. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the
intensity of the echoes and the type of precipitation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page. For the Precipitation
legend (Figure 6-100), select the Legend Softkey when Precipitation is selected for display.
AFCS
No radar coverage
Boundary of weather
data request
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-100 Precipitation Weather Product Legend
APPENDICES
The display of radar coverage is enabled active when Precipitation is selected for display. Areas where
precipitation radar coverage is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple. A white boundary line depicting the selected coverage area of the Connext Data Request encloses the
precipitation data when this weather product is displayed.
Reflectivity
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the Precipitation
display directly correlate to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous weather
can be very complex.
INDEX
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
394
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The different radar echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). Weather
radars measure the reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Precipitation Limitations
Radar images may have certain limitations:
• Radar composite reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
EIS
• An individual radar site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about
storms directly over the site.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• At smaller map ranges, individual blocks of radar data are viewable. Each block of radar information
represents approximately four square kilometers and depicts the highest level of reflectivity detected
within that area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Block represents
4 km2
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-101 Precipitation Weather Product - Zoomed
APPENDICES
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
INDEX
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
395
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
INFRARED SATELLITE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Infrared Satellite (IR SAT) weather product (Figure 6-101) depicts cloud top temperatures from satellite
imagery. Brighter cloud top colors indicate cooler temperatures occurring at higher altitudes.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-101 Infrared Satellite Data on the Weather Data Link (GFDS) Page
Displaying Intrared Satellite information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Select the IR SAT Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
To display the Infrared Satellite legend (Figure 6-102), select the Legend Softkey when Infrared Satellite
data is selected for display.
Figure 6-102 Infrared Satellite Legend
GARMIN CONNEXT DATA LINK LIGHTNING
INDEX
The Garmin Connext Data Link Lightning (DL LTNG) weather product (Figure 6-103) shows the approximate
location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a twokilometer region. Neither cloud-to-cloud nor the exact location of the lightning strike is displayed.
396
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Lightning Strikes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-103 Garmin Connext Data Link Lightning
Data Link Lightning data displayed on the following maps:
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Weather Data Link Page
• Flight Plan Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• PFD Inset Map
• AUX - Video Page
Displaying Data Link Lightning information:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Select the DL LTNG Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Datalink Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page (Figure 6-104), select the
Legend Softkey when Datal Link Lightning is selected for display.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-104 Data Link Lightning Legend
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Select the DL LTNG Softkey.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
397
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on PFD map:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
3) Press the Datalink Softkey.
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
EIS
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A localized SIGMET can be displayed when significant
weather conditions are not widespread.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The entire SIGMET or AIRMET is displayed as long as any portion of it is issued within the coverage area
of the Connext Data Request.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRMET for Icing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AIRMET for IFR
Conditions
AIRMET for
Turbulence
AFCS
AIRMET for
Mountain
Obscuration
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-105 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
APPENDICES
2) Select the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the SIGMET
or AIRMET until the desired item is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-106 shows sample SIGMET text.
INDEX
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-106), select the Legend Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
398
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Sample SIGMET Text
SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
EIS
Figure 6-106 SIGMET/AIRMET Text and Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud base heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an
airport or observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and
other critical data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the
report. METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Original METAR text
for selected METAR
symbol
APPENDICES
Figure 6-107 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link (GFDS) Page
INDEX
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
399
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not
found in the decoded version. TAF information is displayed only in its original form when TAFs are available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page, select the METAR Softkey.
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
EIS
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Select the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
METAR Text
APPENDICES
TAF Text
INDEX
Figure 6-108 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
400
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page (Figure 6-109), select the Legend
Softkey when METARs are selected for display.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. A gray METAR flag is displayed
when the METAR text does not contain adequate information.
EIS
Figure 6-109 METAR Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system also shows METAR flags and their associated text on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MF.D.
The system shows a METAR flag next to waypoints in the flight plan with an available METAR.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
METAR flags appears next to waypoints in the flight plan with an associated METAR. A solid METAR flag
indicates the METAR observations are available for a specific waypoint; a hollow METAR flag indicates an
off-route METAR near the waypoint is available.
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight a waypoint with an available METAR (indicated with a METAR flag next
to it). The METAR text will appear in the ‘Selected Waypoint Weather’ Window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
AFCS
Original METAR text is also accessible on navigation maps displaying METAR flags. When the map pointer
is panned over a METAR flag, the METAR text is shown in a box near the flag.
Displaying original METAR text information on the PFD map:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the METAR Softkey.
3) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired METAR flag. Original METAR text appears on the map.
APPENDICES
4) When finished, press the Joystick to remove the map pointer.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
401
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WINDS ALOFT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Winds Aloft data (Figure 6-110) shows the forecasted wind speed and direction at the surface and at
selected altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments from the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL.
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the Wind Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Select the Next or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The Wind Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
AFCS
Figure 6-110 Winds Aloft at 9,000 Feet
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-111), select the Legend Softkey when Winds Aloft is
selected for display.
INDEX
Figure 6-111 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
402
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Profile View on the Navigation Map
Page (Figure 6-112). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to
aircraft speed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Track Mode
Boundary of VSD
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Winds Aloft Data Age
Altitude Scale
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-112 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on
Profile View
Headwind Symbol
None
Tailwind Symbol
None
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-12.
Headwind/Tailwind Component
Less than 5 knots
AFCS
5 knots
10 knots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
50 knots
Table 6-12 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
APPENDICES
Enabling/disabling the VSD (containing winds aloft data):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
INDEX
4) Select the VSD Softkey.
Or:
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
403
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1) Select the Navigation Map Page
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ (choice dependent on current state) and press
the ENT Key.
Winds Aloft data inside the VSD is enabled by default when the VSD is displayed on the Navigation Map
Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display on the VSD:
EIS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-113).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘VSD’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-114).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Winds’On/Off field. (Figure 6-115).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-113 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-115 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, VSD Group
INDEX
Figure 6-114 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
404
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PIREPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) describe in-flight weather encountered by pilots. A PIREP may contain
adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, turbulence, and type
of aircraft flown. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PIREP
Selected
Urgent
PIREP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-116 PIREPs on the Weather Data Link (GFDS) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying PIREP text:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the PIREPS Softkey.
AFCS
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
when it is selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key. The PIREP text is first displayed in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note
the original text may contain additional information not present in the decoded version.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP text.
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to close the PIREP text window and return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT)
Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
405
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PIREP age in hours +
minutes
EIS
Decoded PIREP Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Original PIREP Text
Figure 6-117 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (CNTX) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To display the PIREP or AIREP legend (Figure 6-118), select the Legend Softkey when PIREPs are selected
for display.
AFCS
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
Figure 6-118 PIREPs Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TFRS
NOTE: Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) data from Garmin Connext is only available in the United States (not
APPENDICES
In the United States, the FAA issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) to designate areas where
flight is restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including national security, law
enforcement, natural disasters., airshows, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued at any time, and
TFR data displayed on the system is only intended to supplement official TFR information obtained from
Flight Service Stations (FSS), and air traffic control.
INDEX
including any U.S. territories.) Refer to http://sites.garmin.com/connext for product coverage information.
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR data is not available or has expired, the system displays
‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
406
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Information for
selected TFR
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-119 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page or Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information window.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-120 Full Text for Selected TFR
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the
TFR product data is removed from the map.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
407
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-121).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aviation’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-122).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range setting (Figure 6-123).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-121 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-123 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Aviation Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-122 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
408
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
If the system cannot complete a CNXT weather data request, one or more messages will appear in the request
status window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Description
The system has disabled automatic weather data requests due to excessive errors. Automatic
weather data requests have stopped. Send a manual weather data request to resume automatic
updates.
The system will attempt another automatic weather data request after an error occurred during the
previous request. Timer counts down until the next automatic request occurs.
A general error has occurred. If the error persists, the system should be serviced.
A communications error has occurred with the GDL59 or GIA. The system should be serviced.
A general error has occurred. If the error persists, the system should be serviced.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Weather Request
Status Message
Auto requests inhibited
Send manual request to
reset.
Auto update retry: ##
Seconds
Connext Comm Error [1]
Connext Comm Error [2]
Connext Comm Error [3]
No Connext
Subscription
INDEX
Request Canceled
Request Failed - Try
Again
Transfer Preempted
APPENDICES
Reduce Request Area
The weather data request coverage area does not contain at least one of the following: a
waypoint, a flight plan, or a flight plan destination. Verify at least one of the coverage options is
enabled (checked) and contains required criteria, then re-send the data request.
The system is not be currently subscribed to Garmin Connext services or the access code is incorrect.
Verify the access code. Contact Garmin at 1-866-739-5687 in the United States or 913-397-8200,
wait for the operator, and request Extension 1135 for assistance.
The size of the received weather data has exceeded system memory limits. Reduce the size of the
coverage area and issue another Connext Data Request to ensure all available weather data has
been received.
The user has cancelled a Connext Data Request.
The weather data request timed-out. Re-send data request.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Invalid Coverage Area
There is a problem with the Garmin Connext registration. Contact Garmin at 1-866-739-5687
in the United States or 913-397-8200, wait for the operator, and request Extension 1135 for
assistance.
The Garmin Connext Weather data server is temporarily out of service, but is expected to return to
service in less than 30 minutes.
The Garmin Connext Weather data server will be out of service for at least 30 minutes.
AFCS
Connext Server Temp
Inop
Connext Server Inop
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Connext Login Invalid
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Connext Comm Error [4] This occurs if multiple automatic weather data requests have recently failed, or the GDL 59 or a GIA
is off-line.
Connext Comm Error [5] This can occur if the GDL 59 is off-line or not configured, or the Iridium or Garmin Connext services
are not accessible. Check Iridium signal strength. If this error persists, the system should be
serviced.
Connext Comm Error [6] A communications error has occurred. It this error persists, the system should be serviced.
Connext Comm Error [7] A weather data transfer has timed out. Check Iridium signal strength and re-send the data request.
Connext Comm Error [8] A server error has occurred or invalid data received.
Connext Comm Error [9] An error occurred while reading or writing data. If the error persists, the system should be serviced.
The GDL 59 is busy. Retry request later.
Table 6-13 Abnormal Garmin Connext Data Request Status Messages
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
409
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER IN REVERSIONARY MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the system is operating in Reversionary Mode, only those weather products which can be displayed
on the PFD map will be available for display (see Table 6-10 for a list of weather products and their associated
map availability).
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
If manual Connext Data Requests were enabled prior to entering Reversionary Mode, no new weather data
will be retrieved while operating in Reversionary Mode. If automatic Connext Data Requests were enabled
prior to Reversionary Mode operation, the system will continue the automatic data requests in Reversionary
Mode (provided automatic requests have not been inhibited due to a system error).
410
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.4 STORMSCOPE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely on information from the lightning detection system display as the sole basis for
hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate
or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
NOTE: Stormscope lightning information cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same map as lightning
EIS
information from data link lightning sources.
The following pages can display on-board lightning detection system data:
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• Nearest Pages
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Stormscope Page
• Navigation Map
• AUX - Video Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To display lightning data on the Navigation Map, AUX - Trip Planning Page, or any of the Nearest Pages, select
the Map Opt Softkey, then select the STRMSCP Softkey. These pages can also display cell or strike data using the
yellow lightning strike symbols shown in Table 6-14.
Displaying Stormscope information on MFD navigation maps:
1) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Select the STRMSCP Softkey.
Displaying Stormscope information on PFD map:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
AFCS
3) Press the STRMSCP Softkey.
Lightning Age
Symbol
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Strike is less than 6 seconds old
Strike is between 6 and 60 seconds old
APPENDICES
Strike is between 1 and 2 minutes old
Strike is between 2 and 3 minutes old
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Table 6-14 Lightning Age and Symbols
411
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SETTING UP STORMSCOPE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
Setting up Stormscope options on the Navigation Map:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Settings’ selected (Figure 6-124), press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’,
and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections (Figure 6-125).
EIS
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-127).
The following options are available (Figure 6-126):
• Stormscope On/Off field – Enables/disables the display of Stormscope lightning symbols.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Stormscope maximum display range – Selects the maximum map range to display Stormscope symbols.
Stormscope data is removed when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is selected.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Stormscope Mode – Selects the Cell or Strike mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters or
cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-124 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-126 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
INDEX
Figure 6-125 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
412
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CELL AND STRIKE MODE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity (Figure 6-127). Stormscope identifies
clusters of electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning
strikes.
Selecting the ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Settings’ selected, press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ group and press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Mode field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to change between ‘Cell’ and ‘Strike’ options. When the desired item is selected, press
the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Stormscope Mode
Lightning Strike
Rate Per Minute
AFCS
Stormscope Navigation Map
Overlay Enabled Icon
Figure 6-127 Navigation Map Page with Stormscope Lightning Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn. This
is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
413
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Manually clearing Stormscope data on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’ (Figure 6-128).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-128 Navigation Map Page Options Menu
ZOOM RANGE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed up to 800 nm zoom range (in North Up orientation) on the
Navigation Map Page. However, in Track Up orientation at the 500 nm range, a portion of Stormscope lightning
data can be behind the aircraft and therefore not visible on the Navigation Map. Since the range for Stormscope
data is 400 nm diameter total (200 nm in front and 200 nm behind), the 500 nm range in North Up orientation
shows all the data.
At a map range of less than 25 nm, Stormscope lightning data is not displayed, but can still be present.
AFCS
Selecting a Stormscope range on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the select the ‘Weather’ group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Stormscope maximum map display range distance.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope maximum map display range distance.
APPENDICES
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
To change the display range on the Navigation Map Page, turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the map
range or counter-clockwise to decrease the map range.
414
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
USING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
On the Stormscope Page, lightning information can be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm,
and 200 nm.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Page.
3) Turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the map range or counter-clockwise to decrease the map range.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Stormscope Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Lightning Strike
Rate Per Minute
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-129 Stormscope Page with Cell Mode Selected
AFCS
Selecting ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Select the Mode Softkey. The Cell and Strike softkeys are displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the Cell Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or select the Strike Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper right corner of the Stormscope Page.
4) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level softkeys for the Stormscope Page.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Stormscope Page Menu. Either ‘Cell Mode’ or ‘Strike Mode’ is highlighted
in cyan to indicate the mode to be selected.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key to select the highlighted mode and remove the menu. To remove the menu without changing
modes, press the MENU Key or the CLR Key, or push the FMS Knob.
415
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn . This
is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
Clearing Stormscope lightning on any map clears this information from all displays on the system.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Manually clearing Stormscope cell or strike information:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Select the Clear Softkey.
Or:l
EIS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Lightning Data’, then press the ENT Key.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’, then press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-130 Navigation Map Page Options Menu
416
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.5 TERRAIN PROXIMITY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as a sole source of information for maintaining separation
from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from third party sources and cannot
independently verify the accuracy of the information.
EIS
The system’s Terrain Proximity is a terrain awareness system that does not comply with TSO-C151b certification
standards. It increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not
confuse Terrain Proximity with Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS). TAWS is more sophisticated
and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified. Terrain Proximity does not provide warning annunciations or voice
alerts. It only provides color indications on map displays when terrain and obstacles are within a certain altitude
threshold from the aircraft. Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS uses more
sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain Proximity requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain Proximity displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
AFCS
The system’s GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite
position. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above
mean sea level calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GSL
altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that
normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL
altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain Proximity
feature portrays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
417
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
DISPLAYING TERRAIN PROXIMITY DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The symbols and colors in Figure 6-131 and Table 6-15 and Table 6-16 are used to represent obstacles and
aircraft altitude when the Terrain Proximity Page is selected for display. Terrain Proximity uses black, green,
yellow, and red to represent terrain information relative to aircraft altitude. The color of each obstacle is
associated with the altitude of the aircraft.
Projected Flight Path
EIS
100 ft Threshold
Red
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
2000 ft
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
Figure 6-131 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft
altitude
AFCS
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-15 Terrain Proximity Obstacle Symbols and Colors
Wind Turbine Obstacle Location
APPENDICES
Lighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude
INDEX
Unlighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Table 6-16 Terrain Proximity Wind Turbine Obstacles and Colors
418
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following pages:
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Page
• Terrain Proximity Page
• AUX - Video Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• PFD Inset Map/HSI
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page):
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey (for the PFD map, press the Map/HSI Softkey).
2) Press the TER Softkey until REL is shown to display terrain and obstacle data.
EIS
When Terrain Proximity is selected on maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page, an icon to indicate the
feature is enabled for display and a legend for Terrain Proximity colors are shown (Figure 6-135).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles recognized by
Terrain Proximity as yellow or red are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within
the setting limit.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Maps besides the Terrain Proximity Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the
Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20
nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-132).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-133).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-134).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Terrain Display – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• Obstacle Data – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings).
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
419
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 6-132 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-133 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-134 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map. The map
panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the Joystick. If the
map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
AFCS
Additional
Information on
Obstacle Selected
with Map Pointer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Lighted
Obstacles
(Above or Within
100’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
APPENDICES
Lighted Obstacle
Selected with Map
Pointer
Terrain Display
Enabled Icon
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
INDEX
Figure 6-135 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page
420
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Map - Terrain Proximity Page is the principal map page for showing terrain and obstacle data in relation
to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation information (airports, VORs, and
other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable
with the Joystick Knob from 250 ft to 1000 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain Proximity Page.
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain Proximity Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
421
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.6 TERRAIN-SVT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
Garmin SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or
reliability upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
WARNING: Do not use Terrain-SVT information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain-SVT is intended only
EIS
to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain-SVT is included with the Synthetic Vision option. If the TAWS-B option is also installed,
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS-B will take precedence over Terrain-SVT.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain-SVT is a terrain awareness system integrated with the optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT).
Terrain-SVT provides visual and auditory alerting to indicate the presence of threatening terrain or obstacles
relevant to the projected flight path. For detailed information regarding SVT, refer to the Flight Instruments
section.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain-SVT does not comply with TSO-C151b certification standards. It increases situational awareness and
aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not confuse Terrain-SVT with Terrain Awareness and
Warning System (TAWS). TAWS is more sophisticated and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified. Although the
terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft
distance from terrain and obstacles and provides additional alerting capabilities.
Terrain-SVT does not provide the following:
AFCS
• Premature Descent Alerting (PDA)
• Excessive Descent Rate (EDR)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Negative Climb Rate (NCR)
• Descent to 500 Feet Voice Callout Alert (VCO)
Terrain-SVT requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
APPENDICES
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
Terrain-SVT displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
INDEX
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
422
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite
position. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above
mean sea level calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GSL
altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that
normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL
altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
EIS
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to GSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain-SVT
feature portrays a 3-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
DISPLAYING TERRAIN-SVT DATA
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain-SVT uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-136 and Tables 6-17, 6-18 and 6-19 are used to
represent terrain, obstacles, and potential impact points.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
2000 ft
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
AFCS
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
Figure 6-136 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain-SVT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
APPENDICES
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft
altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude
INDEX
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
Table 6-17 Terrain-SVT Obstacle Symbols and Colors
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
423
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Unlighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
Lighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
EIS
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 6-18 Terrain-SVT Wind Turbine Obstacles and Colors
Potential Impact Area Examples Alert Type
Example Annunciation
Warning
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
or
Caution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
or
Table 6-19 Terrain-SVT Potential Impact Areas with Annunciations
AFCS
Terrain-SVT information can be displayed on the following maps:
• PFD map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Pages
• Terrain-SVT Page
• AUX - Video Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain-SVT Page):
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey (for the PFD map, press the Map/HSI Softkey).
2) Press the TER Softkey until REL is shown to display terrain and obstacle data.
APPENDICES
When Terrain-SVT is enabled on maps other than the Terrain-SVT Page, the system shows a status icon is to
indicate that the feature is enabled for display. A legend for Terrain-SVT terrain colors will accompany the icon
on Navigation, Trip Planning, and Flight Plan Pages (Figure 6-142) . The legend appears without the status
icon on the Terrain-SVT Page.
INDEX
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling the
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD map.
424
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map settings chosen on the Navigation Map Page affect the map settings used on other maps and pages
(except the Terrain-SVT Page). The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the
range setting made for the Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map
is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also
adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
EIS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-137).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-138).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-139).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Terrain Display – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• Obstacle Data – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are
shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-137 Navigation Map Page Menu
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-138 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Figure 6-139 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
425
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN-SVT PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Map - Terrain-SVT Page is the principal map page for viewing terrain, obstacle, and potential impact
point data in relation to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation information
(airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight
path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the
Terrain-SVT Page.
EIS
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the Joystick from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range arc.
Displaying the Terrain-SVT Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain-SVT Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain-SVT Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
2000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
AFCS
Yellow Lighted Obstacles
(Between 100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Annunciation Window
APPENDICES
Figure 6-140 Terrain-SVT Page
NOTE: Terrain alerting is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of 89º South latitude. This is due
INDEX
to limitations present within the Terrain database and the system’s ability to process the data representing
the affected areas.
426
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERRAIN-SVT ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within Terrain-SVT software algorithms.
Terrain-SVT alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert
is issued, the system provides visual annunciations and voice alerts. Table 6-20 shows Terrain-SVT alert types
with corresponding annunciations and voice messages.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The Terrain-SVT Alert Annunciation is
shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and to the lower right the on the MFD. If the Terrain-SVT
Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
EIS
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the Terrain-SVT Page)
Alert Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pop-up
Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-141 Terrain-SVT Alert Annunciations
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Terrain Display Enabled
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 6-142 Navigation Map Page
(After Terrain-SVT Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
427
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Type
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation
MFD
Pop-Up Alert (except
Terrain-SVT Page)
Voice Alert
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
* Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-20 Terrain-SVT Alerts Summary
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of Terrain-SVT compares the projected flight path as
derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases. The system
issues FLTA alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.
AFCS
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of the
projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the ground
speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest runway
along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes narrower until
the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle Clearance (RTC or ROC respectively)
and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle Impact (ITI or IOI respectively).
428
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Required Terrain Clearance
RTC Level (FT)
RTC Descending (FT)
800
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
600
500
400
300
EIS
Required
Terrain Clearance
(FT)
Required
Terrain
Clearance
(FT)
700
200
100
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Distance From Runway (NM)
Distance From Runway (NM)
Figure 6-143 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system automatically disables FLTA alerts when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination
runway elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends. When
Terrain-SVT alerts are manually inhibited, the annunciation ‘TER INH’ is shown on the PFD and in the MFD
terrain annunciation window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-144 Terrain-SVT Alerting Disabled (Terrain-SVT Inhibited) Annunciation
AFCS
Inhibiting/enabling Terrain-SVT alerting:
1) Select the Terrain-SVT Page.
2) Press the Inhibit Softkey to inhibit or enable Terrain-SVT (choice dependent on current state).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Inhibit Terrain’ or ‘Enable Terrain’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
While Terrain-SVT alerting is manually inhibited (or the system is unavailable or has failed), the system may
display a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation if the following conditions are met:
• The aircraft is on a GBAS SBAS approach.
• The Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint.
• The aircraft is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix..
INDEX
See the Flight Instruments Section for more details about the ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
429
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During power-up, Terrain-SVT conducts a self-test of its visual annunciations and voice alerts. An voice alert
is issued at test completion.
Terrain-SVT continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the system issues the voice alert “Terrain System
Failure” along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert annunciation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Terrain-SVT requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should
the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the Terrain-SVT Page. The voice alert “Terrain
System Not Available” is generated. When sufficient GPS signal is returns and the aircraft is within the
database coverage area, the voice alert “Terrain System Available” is generated.
Alert Type
PFD/MFD† Alert
Annunciation
System Test in Progress
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
System Test Pass
None
Terrain Alerting Inhibited
No GPS position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage area
Terrain System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, and
Terrain-SVT operating with PFD
Terrain or Obstacle databases
None
Terrain-SVT Page Center
Banner Annunciation
TERRAIN TEST
Voice Alert
None
None
“Terrain System Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“Terrain System Not Available”*
None
“Terrain System Not Available”*
TERRAIN FAIL
“Terrain System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
INDEX
APPENDICES
† Annunciation is shown on Terrain-SVT Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “Terrain System Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Table 6-21 Terrain-SVT System Status Annunciations
430
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.7 TAWS-B
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use TAWS-B information for primary terrain avoidance. TAWS-B is intended only to
enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed if the aircraft is out of the installed terrain database coverage area.
EIS
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS-B databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately
processes and cross-validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS-B (Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B) is an optional feature to increase situational
awareness and aid in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). TAWS-B provides visual annunciations and
voice alerts when terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. The displayed
alerts and warnings are advisory in nature only.
TAWS-B satisfies TSO-C151b Class B requirements for certification.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAWS-B requires the following information to operate properly:
• A valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information is based
on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be
shown if available in the database. Garmin verifies the data to confirm accuracy of the content, per TSO-C151b.
However, the displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data may still contain
inaccuracies.
AFCS
TAWS-B uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS
altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea
level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to
determine TAWS-B alerts. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations
in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local
altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source. Therefore, GSL altitude
provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-B are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and GSL
altitude, TAWS-B displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and
altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and “predict” the
aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, TAWS-B can provide
advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read
from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s GSL altitude differing
from the baro-corrected altitude.
431
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
RELATIVE TERRAIN SYMBOLOGY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAWS-B uses colors and symbols to represent terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than 200 feet above
ground level, AGL) present in the databases relative to aircraft altitude. The system dynamically adjusts these
colors as the aircraft altitude changes, and after takeoff and landing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
While the aircraft is on the ground, the system displays relative terrain 400 feet or more above the aircraft
altitude using red, and terrain at less than 400 feet above aircraft altitude using black, as shown on the TAWS
On-Ground Legend shown in Figure 6-145. When the aircraft is in the air, the system displays relative terrain
information using red, yellow, green, and black, as shown on the TAWS In-Air Legend shown in Figure 6-106.
As the aircraft transitions from on-ground to in-air, or from in-air to on-ground, the display of relative terrain
momentarily fades into the corresponding colors. If a TAWS alert occurs, the relative terrain colors transition
to the TAWS In-Air Legend if in the TAWS On-Ground Legend was shown in order to provide the flight crew
with the most information possible.
TAWS On-Ground Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAWS In-Air Legend
Figure 6-145 Terrain Icon and Legend
During an alert, the system shows potential impact areas over terrain or obstacles using bright yellow (caution)
or bright red (warning) on navigation maps and on the TAWS-B Page.
AFCS
The colors and symbols in Figure 6-146 and Tables 6-22. 6-23 and 6-24 represent terrain, obstacles, and
potential impact areas.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Red
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
APPENDICES
2000 ft
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
INDEX
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
Figure 6-146 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS-B
432
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft
altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude
EIS
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
Table 6-22 TAWS Relative Obstacle Symbols and Colors
Lighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Unlighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
Wind Turbine Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
Table 6-23 TAWS-B Wind Turbine Obstacles and Colors
Example Annunciation
AFCS
Potential Impact Area Examples Alert Type
Warning
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
or
Caution
APPENDICES
or
Table 6-24 TAWS-B Potential Impact Area with Annunciations
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
433
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAWS-B information can be displayed on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Page
• TAWS-B Page
• AUX - Video Page
Enabling/disabling relative terrain information on MFD navigation maps:
1) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
EIS
2) Select the TER Softkey to cycle through terrain options. The selected mode is displayed in cyan: Off, Topo, REL.
Press the TER Softkey until ‘REL’ is displayed on the softkey.
Displaying relative terrain information (PFD Map):
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Rel Ter Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When TAWS-B is selected on maps other than the TAWS-B Page, an icon to indicate the feature is enabled
for display and a legend for TAWS-B terrain colors are shown. The legend appears without the icon on the
TAWS-B Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling the
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD map.
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Maps besides the TAWS-B Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest
obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
NOTE: Terrain alerting is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of 89º South latitude. This is due
INDEX
APPENDICES
to limitations present within the Terrain database and the system’s ability to process the data representing
the affected areas.
434
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-147).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-148).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-149).
• Terrain Display – Selects the display of topo, relative terrain, or no terrain, and selects the maximum map
range at which terrain is shown
EIS
• Obstacle Data – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are
shown
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-147 Navigation Map Page Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-149 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
APPENDICES
Figure 6-148 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
435
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The TAWS-B Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact area data in relation to the
aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. It is the principal page for viewing TAWS-B
information. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be enabled for reference. If an obstacle
and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential
point of impact on the TAWS-B Page.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.. Map range is adjustable
with the Joystick from 250 feet to 1000 nm, as indicated by the map range arc.
EIS
Displaying the TAWS-B Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the TAWS-B Page.
Showing/hiding aviation information on the TAWS-B Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Orientation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Map Range Arc
AFCS
Yellow Lighted
Obstacles (Between
100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain Legend
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-150 TAWS-B Page
436
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS-B ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS-B software algorithms.
TAWS-B alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert
is issued, visual annunciations are displayed and voice alerts are simultaneously issued. Table 6-19 shows
TAWS-B alert types with corresponding annunciations and voice alerts.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The TAWS-B Alert Annunciation
appears to the left of the Selected Altitude box on the PFD, and bottom left on the MFD. If the TAWS-B Page is
not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
EIS
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the TAWS-B Page)
Alert Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pop-up
Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-151 TAWS-B Alert Annunciations
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Terrain Display Enabled Icon
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 6-152 Navigation Map Page
(After TAWS-B Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
437
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PFD/MFD**
Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TAWS-B Page)
Voice Alert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR)
“Pull Up”
*
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
or
*
EIS
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
or
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
*
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
*
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
APPENDICES
*
or
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR)
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Voice Callout
(VCO) “500”
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR)
*
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up’
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
*
or
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
INDEX
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent. Alerts for the default
configuration when more than one option is available are indicated with asterisks.
** Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-25 TAWS-B Alerts Summary
438
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide notification when the aircraft is
determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain a rate that is calculated to be excessive relative to height
above terrain. Figure 6-153 shows the parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
6000
5500
5000
4000
NK
: “SI
ion
Caut
3500
”
RATE
EIS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
4500
3000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2500
2000
Warning: “PULL UP”
1500
1000
12000
11000
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
Descent Rate (FPM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
0
0
500
Figure 6-153 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of TAWS-B compares the projected flight path as
derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases. The system
issues visual and voice alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of
the projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the
ground speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest
runway along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes
narrower until the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle Clearance (RTC or ROC respectively)
and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle Impact (ITI or IOI respectively).
APPENDICES
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-154. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TAWS-B Page.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are
accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS-B Page. The alert is annunciated when the
projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-154.
439
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Required Terrain Clearance
RTC Level (FT)
RTC Descending (FT)
800
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Required
Terrain
Clearance (FT) (FT)
Required
Terrain
Clearance
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Distance From Runway (NM)
Distance From Runway (NM)
Figure 6-154 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system automatically suppresses FLTA alerts from occurring under any of the following conditions:
• The aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination elevation and within 0.5 nm of the destination.
• The aircraft is less than 50 feet above terrain or on the ground.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• The aircraft is between runway ends.
PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway (Figure 6-155).
AFCS
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 nm of the destination airport and ends when the aircraft
is either 0.5 nm from the runway threshold or is at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 nm of the
threshold.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
800
APPENDICES
Height Above Destination (Feet)
700
600
500
400
300
PDA ALERTING AREA
200
100
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
INDEX
0
Distance to Destination (NM)
Figure 6-155 PDA Alerting Threshold
440
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PDA and FLTA visual annunciations and voice alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion should be used
when inhibiting TAWS-B and the system should be enabled when appropriate. When TAWS-B is inhibited,
the alert annunciation ‘TAWS INH’ is shown on the PFD and MFD (Figure 6-156).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-156 TAWS-B Alerting Disabled (TAWS-B Inhibited) Annunciation
Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-B alerting:
EIS
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
2) Select the Inhibit Softkey to inhibit or enable TAWS-B (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Inhibit TAWS’ or ‘Enable TAWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
While TAWS-B alerting is manually inhibited (or the TAWS-B system is not available or has failed), the
system may display a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation if the following conditions are met:
• The aircraft is on a GBAS SBAS approach.
• The Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint.
• The aircraft is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix..
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
See the Flight Instruments Section for more details about the ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation.
FIVE-HUNDRED VOICE ALERT
AFCS
The system provides a “Five-hundred” voice alert when the aircraft descends to within 500 feet above the
terrain or runway threshold. When the aircraft is within five nautical miles of an airport, the “Five Hundred”
voice alert is based on the nearest runway threshold elevation. When the aircraft is more than five nautical
miles from the nearest airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the height above terrain, by
comparing the aircraft’s GPS-GSL altitude to the terrain database.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany the VCO alert. This alert cannot be
inhibited.
NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT (NCR)
APPENDICES
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The voice alert “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a pop-up terrain
alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing from an airport and when the following
conditions are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
INDEX
• Distance from the departure airport is 5 nm or less
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
441
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figures 6-157 and 6-158 shows the NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO-C151b based on Altitude
Loss and Sink Rate respectively.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1000
EIS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
200
100
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Altitude Loss (Feet)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-157 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
1000
900
AFCS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
200
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
100
0
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
Sink Rate (FPM)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-158 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
442
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
PFD/MFD Alert TAWS-B Page
Annunciation Annunciation
Alert Type
System Test in Progress
System Test Pass
None
Aural Message
TAWS TEST
None
None
Single Chime
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
EIS
TAWS System Test Fail
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a self-test of its visual annunciations and voice alerting capability. The
system test can also be manually initiated. A single chime is issued at test completion. TAWS-B System Testing
is disabled when ground speed exceeds 30 knots.
Table 6-26 TAWS-B System Test Status Annunciations
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Manually testing the TAWS-B System:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
2) Press the MENU Key (Figure 6-159).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Select ‘Test TAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-159 TAWS-B Page Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert “TAWS System Failure” is generated
along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.
APPENDICES
TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should the
navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TAWS N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-B Page. The voice alert “TAWS Not
Available” is generated. When the GPS signal integrity is restored and the aircraft is within the database
coverage area, the voice alert “TAWS Available” is generated.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
443
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Alert Type
PFD/MFD* Alert TAWS-B Page Center Banner
Annunciation
Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Test in progress
System Test pass
None
TAWS-B FLTA Alerting Inhibited
EIS
No GPS position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage
area
TAWS-B System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or invalid.
TAWS operating with PFD Terrain
or Obstacle databases
None
Voice Alert
TAWS TEST
None
None
“TAWS System Test Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“TAWS Not Available”
None
“TAWS Not Available”
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
† Annunciation is shown on TAWS-B Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “TAWS Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Table 6-27 TAWS-B System Status Annunciations
444
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.8 VERTICAL SITUATION DISPLAY (VSD) TERRAIN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system offers a Vertical Situation Display (VSD), which includes a profile of terrain and obstacles in an
inset window on the bottom of the Navigation Map Page. Although the VSD does not display TAWS alerts and
potential impact areas, the VSD does use many of the same colors and symbols as TAWS to depict relative terrain
and obstacles within the VSD. Refer to the TAWS discussion for more information about relative terrain and
obstacle color correlation and symbols.
Enabling/Disabling the Vertical Situation Display (VSD):
EIS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Select the Inset Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select the VSD Softkey to enable or disable the VSD.
Or:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
The same controls which enable/disable the display of relative terrain and obstacles on the Navigation Map Page
also control the display of this information in the VSD.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling VSD Relative Terrain on the Navigation Map (when VSD is enabled):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
AFCS
3) Select the Terrain Softkey. Each selection cycles though an option displayed in cyan: Off (disables terrain), Topo
(to show topographical data) or REL (to show relative terrain).
VSD DISPLAY
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the VSD is enabled, it is displayed in a window below the Navigation Map. Altitude is shown along a
vertical scale, with an aircraft icon positioned at the current altitude. Distance is represented horizontally along
the bottom of the Profile View, and increases from left (present position) to right.
APPENDICES
The depicted terrain profile represents an approximate forward-looking contour of the terrain based upon
the highest reported terrain elevations, measured at intervals defined by the terrain database resolution, within
a predefined width along the aircraft track between the aircraft present position and the end of the map range.
The predefined width is determined by the flight phase, as annunciated on the HSI, and is widest during enroute
or oceanic phases. Refer to the Terrain Proximity, Terrain-SVT, or TAWS-B discussions for more information
about displaying terrain or obstacles on the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
445
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Flight Phase
Total Profile View Width
Approach
0.6 nm
Departure
0.6 nm
Terminal
2.0 nm
Enroute
4.0 nm
Oceanic
4.0 nm
Table 6-28 Profile View Width Scale
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The forward looking swath of terrain is based on the selected VSD Mode, annunciated in the top-left corner
of the VSD Inset Window. In Flight Plan Mode, the contour follows the active flight plan, and if no active flight
plan is present, the VSD Inset Window displays ‘Flight Plan Not Available’. In Track Mode, the contour is based
on the aircraft ground track. In Auto Mode, the contour is based on the active flight plan, when available,
otherwise, it is based on the ground track.
Selecting a VSD Mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Select the Inset Softkey.
3) Select the VSD Softkey displaying the VSD mode in cyan. Each press of the softkey cycles through a mode
selection: FPL (flight plan), TRK (track), or Auto.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the Joystick, the horizontal distance of the VSD is adjusted
to match the distance shown on the map range arc, down to one nautical mile. If the Navigation Map range is
adjusted below one nautical mile, the VSD range remains at one nautical mile. When Navigation Map range is
adjusted to remove altitude-correlated colored terrain data (as shown in the Terrain Legend) or obstacles from
the Navigation Map, these items are also removed from the VSD; only an outline of the terrain will be displayed
in black in the VSD Inset Window. Refer to the TAWS discussions for more information about displaying terrain
or obstacles on the Navigation Map Page.
Navigation Map Range
APPENDICES
Profile
View Path
Enabled
Selected VSD
Mode
Selected
Altitude
Altitude Scale
Terrain Enabled Icon
Terrain Legend
INDEX
Profile View Total
Distance
Figure 6-160 VSD on the Navigation Map Page with Relative Terrain Information
446
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRACK MODE BOUNDARY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Track Mode Boundary represents the horizontal and lateral boundaries of the VSD. The boundary is
shown as a white rectangle on the Navigation Map Page and is only available when the VSD is enabled in Track
Mode. White range markers both edges of the Track Mode Boundary rectangle match the range markers along
the distance scale inside the VSD Inset Window whenever the profile range is at least four nautical miles (or 7.5
km if configured for metric units).
The Track Mode Boundary may be enabled/disabled, and the Navigation Map range at which the Profile Path
is removed from map display can be changed.
EIS
Customizing the Track Mode Boundary display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-161).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘VSD’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-162).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-163).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• TRK Mode BNDRY – Enables/disables the display of the Track Mode Boundary and sets maximum range at
which Track Mode Boundary is shown.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (On/Off, range settings).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-161 Navigation Map Page Menu
APPENDICES
190-02183-00 Rev. A
INDEX
Figure 6-162 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-163 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
VSD Group
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
447
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.9 GARMIN GTS 800 TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of TAS system limitations. TAS systems require transponders of other aircraft
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due to phenomena
such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may be displayed intermittently, or
not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb
descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
NOTE: If a Garmin GTX 345R transponder is installed with this traffic system, refer to the ADS-B traffic
discussion for more information about ADS-B traffic displays.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The optional Garmin GTS 800 is a Traffic Advisory System (TAS). The system enhances flight crew situational
awareness by displaying traffic information for detected transponder-equipped aircraft. The system also provides
visual annunciations and voice traffic alerts to assist the pilot in visually acquiring traffic.
The GTS 800 is capable of tracking a total of 45 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode A, C, or S transponders.
The system can display a maximum of 30 aircraft with the highest threat potential simultaneously. No TAS
surveillance is provided for aircraft without operating transponders.
AFCS
THEORY OF OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the system is in Operating Mode, the TAS unit interrogates the transponders of intruding aircraft while
monitoring transponder replies. The system uses this information to derive the distance, relative bearing, and
if reported, the altitude and vertical trend for each aircraft within its surveillance range.
The system then calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of Approach
(CPA). If the closure rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory (TA), visual and voice alerting is
provided.
APPENDICES
TAS SURVEILLANCE VOLUME AND SYMBOLOGY
The GTS 800 TAS monitors the airspace within ±10,000 feet of own altitude, and up to 12 nm in the
forward direction. TAS range is somewhat reduced to the sides and aft of own aircraft due to the directional
interrogation signal patterns.
INDEX
If equipped with a transponder capable of receiving Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast (ADS-B)
information, the system will display the traffic using the symbology shown in Table 6-29. If not equipped with
448
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
an Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast (ADS-B) transponder, traffic symbology will be displayed
as in Table 6-30.
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Symbol
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
EIS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range with directional information. Displayed at outer range
ring at proper bearing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional information. Displayed at outer
range ring at proper bearing.
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Other Non-Threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface
(SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or
own aircraft is on the ground.
Table 6-29 TAS Traffic with ADS-B Traffic Symbology with GTX 345R Transponder
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
APPENDICES
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
INDEX
Table 6-30 TAS Symbol Description with GTX 335 Transponder
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
449
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as an amber circle or triangle, alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous
intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory
that is beyond the selected display range (off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen
at the relative bearing of the intruder.
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or triangle, indicates the intruding aircraft
is within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not considered a TA threat.
Other Non-Threat traffic, shown as an open white diamond or triangle, is displayed for traffic beyond a six
nautical mile range that is neither a TA or PA.
EIS
Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding intruder symbol in
hundreds of feet. When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a minus sign ‘-’
indicates traffic is below own aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system displays the altitude vertical trend as an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in
either direction) to the right of the intruder symbol (Figures 6-164, 6-165).
Vector Line indicates
intruder aircraft track
Relative Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vertical trend arrow
Figure 6-164 Intruder Altitude and
Vertical Trend Arrow
Figure 6-165 Intruder Traffic with ADS-B Directional
Information and Track
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If equipped with a transponder capable of receiving ADS-B traffic advisories, if the intruding aircraft is
providing ADS-B track information, a motion vector line extending beyond the traffic symbol in the direction
of the track may also be displayed when either absolute or relative motion vectors are enabled. For more
information on ADS-B trafficW please see ADS-B Traffic section.
AFCS
TA ALERTING CONDITIONS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The traffic system automatically adjusts its TA sensitivity level to reduce the likelihood of nuisance TA
alerting during flight phases likely to be near airports. Level A (less) TA sensitivity is used when the aircraft’s
groundspeed is below 120 knots or when the flaps are down. In all other conditions while the traffic system
is providing surveillance, Level B (greater) TA sensitivity is used to assess TA threats.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Sensitivity Intruder Altitude
Level
Available
450
A
Yes
A
No
TA Alerting Conditions
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of vertical and horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of horizontal separation and vertical
separation is within 600 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.2 nm and vertical separation is within 600 feet.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 15 seconds of separation.
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
B
No
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Yes
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
B
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of vertical and horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of horizontal separation and vertical
separation is within 800 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.55 nm and vertical separation is within 800 feet.
Intruder range is less than 20 seconds.
Table 6-31 TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria
EIS
TAS ALERTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Voice traffic alerts do not occur when the flaps are down. Only visual traffic annunciations are issued
under this condition.
When the traffic system detects a new TA, the following occur:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• A single “Traffic!” voice alert is generated, followed by additional voice information about the bearing, relative
altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA (Table 6-32). The announcement
“Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own aircraft, above own
altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing for five seconds and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area (Figure 6-166).
• The PFD map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
AFCS
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined (Figures 6-168 and 6-169), a amber text banner will be
displayed in the center of the Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD map instead of a TA symbol.
The text will indicate “TA” followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA
traffic, if known.
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer present.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
451
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-166 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Bearing
Relative Altitude
Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-32 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
SYSTEM TEST
NOTE: Traffic surveillance is not provided during the system test. Use caution when performing a system
test during flight.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The traffic system provides a system test mode to verify the TAS system is operating normally. The test takes
approximately ten seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols is
displayed on the Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-167). If the system test passes, the system announces “TAS System
Test Passed”, otherwise the system announces “TAS System Test Failed.” When the system test is complete,
the unit enters Standby Mode.
Testing the Traffic System:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Turn the Joystick knob to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for full test pattern display as shown in the figure
below.
4) Select the Test Softkey.
INDEX
Or:
452
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Test Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAS Test Mode
Test Mode
Annunciation
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-167 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
OPERATION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The traffic unit automatically transitions from STANDBY to OPERATE mode eight seconds after
takeoff. The unit also automatically transitions from OPERATE to STANDBY mode 24 seconds after landing.
After power-up, the traffic system is in Standby Mode. The traffic unit must be in Operating Mode for traffic
to be displayed and for TAs to be issued.
AFCS
Pressing the TAS OPER Softkey allows the system to switch from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as
necessary. Pressing the TAS STBY Softkey forces the unit into Standby Mode.
Switching from operating mode to standby mode:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
On the Traffic Page, press the TAS STBY Softkey
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Standby Mode’.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key.
Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
On the Traffic Page, press the TAS OPER Softkey
Or:
INDEX
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Operate Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key. The traffic system switches from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as necessary.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
453
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-168) shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no
valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick up to 12 mn, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper right corner of the page.
TAS Operating Mode
Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Display
Range Rings
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EIS
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Non-Threat
Traffic with
ADS-B
Directional
Information,
6000’ Above,
Level
Other Non-Threat
Traffic, 1000 below,
climbing
Traffic Advisory,
200’ above,
climbing
No-bearing
Traffic Advisory,
4.0 nm away,
1100’ above,
descending
Traffic
Advisory OffScale, 400’
Below, Level
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-168 Traffic Map Page with TAS and ADS-B Traffic Displayed
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Select the TAS OPER Softkey to begin displaying traffic. ‘OPERATING’ is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select the TAS STBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. ‘STANDBY’ is displayed in the Traffic
mode field.
5) Turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
ALTITUDE DISPLAY
APPENDICES
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which non-threat and proximity traffic is displayed. If the
system issues a TA occurring outside of this airspace, it will always be shown.
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the Traffic Map Page, select the ALT Mode Softkey.
INDEX
2) Select one of the following Softkeys:
• Above: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
454
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Normal: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
•
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Below: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9000 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the Traffic Map Page, press the Back Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
Above
•
Normal
•
Below
•
Unrestricted
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
•
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see Softkey description in previous step 2):
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Map Page Display Range
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
2) The following range options are available:
1) Turn the Joystick.
2) The following range options are available:
750 ft and 1500 ft (with optional ADS-B)
•
1500 ft and 0.5 nm (with optional ADS-B)
•
0.5 nm and 1 nm (with optional ADS-B)
•
1 nm and 2 nm (with optional ADS-B)
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
APPENDICES
•
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
750 ft (with optional ADS-B)
AFCS
•
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
455
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• Navigation Map Page (Heading Up orientation
only)
The Traffic Map Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information is also
available on the following other MFD maps and pages as an additional reference to the Traffic Map Page:
• Nearest Pages
• Active Flight Plan Page
• Trip Planning Page
EIS
• AUX - Video Page
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) option
is installed and enabled. See the Flight Instruments Section for details.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displaying traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Select the Traffic Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate traffic
is enabled for display (Figure 6-169).
NOTE: The Navigation Map Page must be oriented with the heading up to display traffic on the Navigation
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Page. Refer to Section 5.2 of Flight Management for details about changing map page orientation.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Proximity
Advisory
Traffic Advisory
Traffic overlay
enabled icon and
Altitude Display
Mode
APPENDICES
Traffic
Advisory OffScale Banner
Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 6-169 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
456
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-170).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-171).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-172).
• Traffic – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
- TA Only - Displays Traffic Advisories only
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Traffic Mode – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
• Traffic Symbols – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• Traffic Labels – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-170 Navigation Map Page
Menu
APPENDICES
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Figure 6-172 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Figure 6-171 Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu
457
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD map by pressing the TFC Map Softkey. A traffic map
will appear in heading up orientation. Traffic information can also be overlaid with navigation, topographic
and optional weather data.
EIS
Enabling/disabling traffic information on the PFD map:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the display traffic information on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Mode
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Traffic System Test Initiated
TEST
(‘TEST MODE’ shown in center of page)
OPERATING
Operating
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
Standby
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
Traffic System Failed*
FAIL
* See Table 6-30 for additional failure annunciations
AFCS
Table 6-33 Traffic Modes
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
APPENDICES
Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
DATA FAILED
unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
INDEX
Table 6-34 TAS Failure Annunciations
458
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
NO TRFC DATA
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TRFC FAIL
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending).
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
EIS
TA X.X ± XX ↕
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TA OFF SCALE
Description
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-35 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
459
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.10 ADS-B TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Garmin GTX 345R transponder sends and receives Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B)
traffic information on the 1090 MHz Extended Squitter (1090 ES) frequency. It receives ADS-B traffic and data
link weather information on the 978 MHz Universal Access Transceiver (UAT) frequency. The system provides
visual annunciations and voice traffic alerts to help the pilot visually acquire potentially conflicting traffic. This
discussion covers the traffic features of the GTX transponder; refer to the Flight Information Service-Broadcast
(FIS-B) Weather section for more information about the UAT data link weather features of the GTX 345.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ADS-B SYSTEM OVERVIEW
ADS-B is a core technology in the FAA NextGen air traffic control system and is comprised of three segments:
ADS-B (Broadcast), ADS-R (Rebroadcast), and Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TIS-B).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ADS-B is the automatic broadcast of position reports by aircraft, surface vehicles, and transmitters on fixed
objects. These broadcasts contain information such as GPS position, identity (Flight ID, Call Sign, Tail Number,
ICAO registration number, etc), ground track, ground speed, pressure altitude, and emergency status.
1090 ES
UAT
RADAR
Composite
AFCS
GPS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1090 ES
18,000 FT
10,000 FT
APPENDICES
Mode A/C
RADAR
ATC
UAT
UAT
UAT
1090 ES
ADS-B Ground Station (ADS-R,
TIS-B, FIS-B)
INDEX
Figure 6-173 ADS-B System
460
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For the purpose of distinguishing between levels of ADS-B service, there are three classifications of aircraft or
system capability: ADS-B In, ADS-B Out, and ADS-B participating. ADS-B In refers to the capability to receive
ADS-B information. ADS-B Out refers to the capability to transmit ADS-B information. ADS-B participating
refers to the capability to both send and receive ADS-B information. Aircraft lacking either ADS-In, ADS-B Out,
or both ADS-B capabilities may also be referred to as ADS-B nonparticipating aircraft.
AUTOMATIC DEPENDENT SURVEILLANCE-REBROADCAST (ADS-R)
EIS
Because it is not required that ADS-B In capable aircraft be able to receive ADS-B data on both the 1090
MHz and 978 MHz data links, a method exists to get data from one data link to the other. ADS-R is the
rebroadcast of ADS-B data by FAA ground stations, which provide this service by taking data from one link
and rebroadcasting it on the other. For example, two aircraft are in the service volume for a ground station,
and one is transmitting on 1090 MHz and the other on 978 MHz, the ground station retransmits the data
from each aircraft on the other link to ensure the two aircraft can “see” each other.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Because the GTX 345R transponder sends and receives ADS-B traffic reports on the 1090 ES frequency,
but only receives traffic reports on the 978 MHz UAT frequency, the presences of an ADS-R ground station is
necessary for an aircraft with only UAT-capabilities to ‘see’ the aircraft with the GTX 345R transponder.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE-BROADCAST (TIS-B)
TIS-B provides the bridge between the radar-based ATC system and the ADS-B-based system. When an
ADS-B In or Out capable aircraft is within the service volume of an FAA ADS-B ground station, the ground
station broadcasts a portion of the ATC radar data to the aircraft. This aircraft is then included in the list of
aircraft being provided TIS-B service and is then considered a “TIS-B participant.”
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TIS-B coverage is available when the aircraft is within ground station coverage, in Secondary Surveillance
Radar coverage, and the other aircraft is also in Secondary Surveillance Radar coverage, and is transmitting
its altitude.
AFCS
The ground station provides ATC radar information for other aircraft within ±3,500 feet and 15 NM of the
participant, to include altitude, position, ground speed, and ground track. TIS-B broadcasts occur once every
three to thirteen seconds, depending on the characteristics of the ground station providing the TIS-B service.
The following table describes the aircraft that are observed by a GTX 345R-equipped aircraft according to
the level of equipment installed in the other aircraft.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Viewable by GTX 345R Equipped Aircraft
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes*
APPENDICES
Other Aircraft Equipment
1090ES Out Equipped
UAT Receive Only Capable
UAT Transmit Equipped
No Transponder, No ADS-B
Non ADS-B Equipped, but with Mode C or S Transponder
* Only when in ADS-B ground station coverage and when the other aircraft is in ATC radar coverage, or own
aircraft is equipped with a TAS system and traffic is within the TAS surveillance range.
Table 6-36 Aircraft Available for Viewing by an ADS-B Equipped Own Aircraft
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
461
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ADS-B WITH TAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When an active traffic system, such as a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed and operating with the
GTX 345R transponder, the transponder receives traffic from the active traffic system and attempts to match (or
“correlate”) this traffic with ADS-B traffic the transponder is tracking. When a correlation is made, the only the
traffic with the most accurate information is displayed to the flight crew. Any traffic that is not correlated (i.e.,
only detected by one system but not the other) is also displayed for the flight crew. This correlation of traffic
by the transponder improves the accuracy of the traffic displayed, while reducing the occurrence of the same
aircraft being displayed twice.
EIS
NOTE: When operating on the edges of ATC radar coverage or when using an optional active traffic system
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CONFLICT SITUATIONAL AWARENESS & ALERTING
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
providing intermittent traffic data, a single aircraft may be briefly or periodically depicted as two aircraft on
the display.
The transponder issues a voice alert when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is displayed, for example “Traffic! Two
O’clock, Low, Two Miles.”
Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is an alerting algorithm which provides ADS-B traffic alerting similar to
the TAS system discussed previously.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The own aircraft altitude above terrain determines the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm to minimize nuisance
alerts. Radar Altitude (if available), Height Above Terrain, and Geodetic Sea Level (GSL) altitude are used to
adjust the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm in accordance with the following table:
Sensitivity
Level
Height Above
Terrain (HAT)
4
4
4
5
5
5
Any
Any
Unavailable
Any
>1000 <=2350
Unavailable
6
Unavailable or >2350
7
Unavailable or >2350
8
Unavailable or >2350
9
Unavailable or >2350
10
Unavailable or >2350
GPS Phase of Flight
Any
Any
Approach
Any
Any
Terminal
Not approach and not Terminal
(including unavailable)
Not approach and not Terminal
(including unavailable)
Not approach and not Terminal
(including unavailable)
Not approach and not Terminal
(including unavailable)
Not approach and not Terminal
(including unavailable)
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
Lookahead
time
(sec)
20
20
20
25
25
25
Vertical
Threshold
for Alert
(feet)
850
850
850
850
850
850
<=5000
30
850
0.35
40
850
0.55
45
850
0.80
48
850
1.10
48
1200
1.10
Own
Altitude
(Feet)
>5000
<=10,000
>10,000
<=20,000
>20,000
<=42,000
> 42,000
Protected
Volume
(NM)
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
Table 6-37 CSA Alerting Thresholds for ADS-B Traffic
462
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When the system detects a new Traffic Advisory (TA), the following occur:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the bearing,
relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA (Table 6-38). For example,
the announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own
aircraft, above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears to the right of the Airspeed Indicator on the PFD, flashes for five seconds,
and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area (Figure 6-174).
• If the PFD Inset Map was already displayed, the traffic is shown on the displayed map. Otherwise the Traffic
Map is shown on the PFD.
EIS
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a amber text banner will be displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will indicate ‘TA’
followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer a factor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
AFCS
Figure 6-174 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Relative Altitude
“One o’clock” through “Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
Approximate Distance (nm)
“Zero miles”, “Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Bearing
APPENDICES
Table 6-38 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
NOTE: ADS-B traffic voice alerts are suppressed when below 400 feet AGL.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
463
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AIRBORNE AND SURFACE APPLICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GTX 345R can help the pilot visually acquire traffic both in the air and on-the-ground. There are
two ADS-B applications or modes: Airborne Situational Awareness (AIRB) and Surface Situational Awareness
(SURF). The system automatically selects the appropriate application based on conditions.
The AIRB application is on when the aircraft is more than five NM and 1,500 feet above the nearest airport.
When the AIRB application is active, the system only displays traffic which is airborne.
EIS
The SURF application is on when the aircraft is within five NM and less than 1,500 feet above field elevation.
When the SURF applications is on, the system displays airborne and on the ground traffic. At a Traffic Map
Page range of one nm or less, the airport environment (including taxiways and runways) appears in addition to
traffic. The airport displays are derived from the SafeTaxi database. Refer to the Additional Features section for
more information about SafeTaxi displays.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Do not rely on the solely on the traffic display to determine the runway alignment of traffic, especially
when runways are in close proximity to each other.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Due to the varying precision of the data received via ADS-B, ADS-R, and TIS-B services, not all traffic symbols
may not be depicted on the traffic display. Because higher data precision is required for traffic to be displayed
in the SURF environment, some traffic eligible for AIRB will not be displayed while SURF is on. Availability for
AIRB and SURF is depicted on the AUX-ADS-B Status Page, discussed later in this section.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SURF Application On
AFCS
Ground-based
vehicle
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft on the
ground
INDEX
Figure 6-175 Traffic Map Page with SURF Mode On
464
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRAFFIC DESCRIPTION
Symbol
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The symbols used to display ADS-B traffic are shown in Table 6-39. Above or below the traffic symbol is the
traffic identifier, and altitude. A small up or down arrow next to the traffic symbol indicates that the traffic is
climbing or descending at a rate of at least 500 feet per minute.
Description
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
EIS
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range with directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
Other Non-Threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
AFCS
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own
aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Table 6-39 ADS-B Traffic Symbology
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
OPERATION
APPENDICES
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and altitude,
without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map
range is adjustable with the Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper right corner of the page.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
465
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AIRB Application On
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other Non-Threat
Traffic, 1000 below,
climbing
Traffic Advisory,
200’ above,
climbing
No-bearing
Traffic Advisory,
4.0 nm away,
1100’ above,
descending
EIS
Traffic Display
Range Rings
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity
Advisory, 1200’
feet below,
descending
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-176 Traffic Map Page
Enabling/disabling the display of ADS-B traffic.
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Select the ADS-B Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘ADS-B On’ or ‘ADS-B Off’.
b) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Testing the display of ADS-B traffic:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) If necessary, turn the Joystick to select a map range of 2 and 6 nm to ensure full test pattern display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Ensure the the ADS-B Softkey is disabled.
3) If the optional TAS is installed, ensure the TAS STBY Softkey is enabled.
4) Press the Test Softkey.
Or:
APPENDICES
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Test Mode’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
A test pattern of traffic symbols appears during the test, and a ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears on the
PFDs. At the conclusion of the test, the system issues the voice alert “Traffic System Test”. If the test pattern
is displayed and the voice alert is heard, the system has passed the test.
466
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADS-B Test Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-177 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat and Proximity traffic is displayed.
TAs occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the Traffic Map Page, select the ALT Mode Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Select one of the following softkeys:
• Above: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• Normal: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
•
AFCS
• Below: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9000 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) To return to the Traffic Map Page, select the Back Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
Above
•
Normal
•
Below
•
Unrestricted
INDEX
•
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight one of the following options (see softkey description in step 2 above):
3) Press the ENT Key.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
467
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
DISPLAYING MOTION VECTORS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the traffic symbols depict the
traffic’s reported track and speed over the ground. When Relative Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors
extending from the traffic symbols display how the traffic is moving relative to own aircraft. These vectors
are calculated using the traffic’s track and ground speed and own aircraft’s track and ground speed. These two
values are combined to depict where the traffic is moving purely with respect to own aircraft, and provide a
forecast of where the traffic will be, relative to own aircraft, in the near future.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Absolute
Motion Vectors
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Absolute Motion Vectors
selected
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-178 Traffic Map Page with Absolute Motion Vectors Enabled
APPENDICES
Relative Motion
Vectors
INDEX
Relative Motion Vectors
selected
Figure 6-179 Traffic Map Page with Relative Motion Vectors Enabled
468
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling the Motion Vector display:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Select the Motion Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select one of the following softkeys:
•
Absolute: Displays the motion vector pointing in the absolute direction.
•
Relative: Displays the motion vector relative to own aircraft
•
Off:
Disables the display of the motion vector.
EIS
Or:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Relative Motion’, ‘Absolute Motion’ or ‘Motion Vector Off’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
Adjusting the duration for the Motion Vector projected time:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Select the Motion Softkey.
3) Select the Duration Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Select a softkey for the desired duration (30 SEC, 1 MIN, 2 MIN, 5 MIN).
5) When finished, select the Back Softkey to return to the Traffic Map Page.
Displaying Additional Traffic Information
AFCS
The Traffic Map Page can display additional information for a selected aircraft symbol. This may include
the aircraft tail number/Flight ID, type of aircraft (e.g., glider, small/medium/large aircraft, service vehicle,
unmanned airborne vehicle (UAV)), course, track, groundspeed), and other information.
Showing additional traffic information:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The first selected traffic symbol is highlighted in cyan. Additional information appears in
a window in the lower-right corner of the Traffic Map Page.
APPENDICES
3) To select a different aircraft symbol, turn the FMS Knob until the cyan border appears around the desired
aircraft symbol.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob again to disable the traffic selection.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
469
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Page Display Range
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) The following range options are available:
•
750 ft
•
750 ft and 1500 ft
•
1500 ft and 0.5 nm
•
0.5 nm and 1 nm
•
1 and 2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
NOTE: ADS-B traffic can be displayed as an overlay to navigation maps. Refer to the previous TAS discussions
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
for information about these additional traffic displays.
ADS-B SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Traffic Map Page Center
Banner Annunciation
ADS-B: TEST
TEST MODE
ADS-B: AIRB
None
ADS-B: SURF
None
ABS-B Traffic Off
ADS-B: OFF
ADS-B TRFC OFF
ADS-B Traffic Not
Available
ADS-B: N/A
ADS-B TRFC N/A
ADS-B Failed*
ADS-B: FAIL
ADS-B TRFC FAIL
AFCS
ADS-B Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADS-B System Test
Initiated
ADS-B Operating in
Airborne Mode
ADS-B Operating in
Surface Mode
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
* See Table 6-37 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-40 ADS-B Modes
470
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Map Page Center
Annunciation
NO DATA
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
Data is being received from the traffic unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the traffic unit
Table 6-41 Traffic Failure Annunciations
EIS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
TA OFF SCALE
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending).
Traffic unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TA X.X ± XX ↕
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-42 Traffic Status Annunciations
Additional information about the status of ADS-B traffic products is available on the AUX - ADS-B Status Page.
AFCS
Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - ADS-B Status Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
471
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-180 Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status on ADS-B Status Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ADS-B Status Page Item
Traffic Application Status:
Airborne (AIRB), Surface
(SURF), Airborne Alerts
(CSA)
Status Message
On
Available to Run
Not Available
AFCS
Fault
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Not Configured
TIS-B/ADS-R Coverage
APPENDICES
GPS Status: GPS Source
INDEX
Ground Uplink Status:
Last Uplink
---------------Available
Not Available
--------------External #1
External #2
--------Number of minutes, or
‘------’
Description
Traffic application is currently on. Required input data is available, and it
meets performance requirements.
Traffic application is not currently active, but application is ready to run when
condition(s) determine the application should be active. Required input data
is available, and it meets performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is available, but it
does not meet performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is not available or the
application has failed.
Traffic application is not available, because it has not been configured. If this
annunciation persists, the system should be serviced.
Traffic application status is invalid or unknown.
The system is receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
The system is not receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
ADS-R coverage is invalid or unknown.
The GTX 345R is using the #1 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The GTX 345R is using the #2 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The GPS source is invalid or unknown.
Displays the number of minutes since the last uplink from a ground station
occurred. If no uplink has been received, or the status is invalid, dashes appear instead of a number of minutes.
Table 6-43 AUX-ADS-B Status Page Messages for ADS-B Traffic
472
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) always supersedes this Pilot’s Guide.
7.1 GARMIN AFCS
The digital Garmin Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) is fully integrated within the Perspective™ System
avionics architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram to support this system description.
EIS
The AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Flight Director (FD) — Flight director operation takes place within either GIA 63W. Flight director commands
are displayed on the PFD. The flight director provides:
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
– Vertical/lateral mode selection and processing
– Autopilot communication
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, yaw, and pitch trim servos. It also provides
servo monitoring and automatic flight control in response to flight director steering commands, Attitude and
Heading Reference System (AHRS) attitude and rate information, and airspeed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Yaw Damper (YD) — The yaw servo (optional) is self-monitoring and provides Dutch roll damping and turn
coordination in response to yaw rate, roll angle, lateral acceleration, and airspeed.
• Manual Electric Trim (MET) — The pitch trim adapter provides manual electric pitch trim capability when
the autopilot is not engaged and provides directional trim during climbs and descents.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
473
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
AFCS CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The AFCS Control Unit is positioned below the GCU 479, and has the following controls:
1
HDG Knob
Adjusts the Selected Heading and bug in 1 degree increments on the HSI. Press to synchronize
the Selected Heading with the current heading
2
APR Key
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
3
AP Key
LVL Key
4
EIS
5
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7
12
ALT Knob
ALT Key
VS Key
FD Key
NAV Key
13
HDG Key
8
9
10
11
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Engages/disengages the autopilot
Engages the autopilot (if the autopilot is disengaged and the aircraft is within the autopilot
engagement limitations) in level vertical and lateral modes
NOSE UP/DN Wheel Adjusts the vertical mode reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Indicated Airspeed, and
Altitude Hold modes
FLC Key
Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode
VNV Key
Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
Controls the Selected Altitude in 100-ft increments
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
Activates/deactivates the flight director only
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
13
12
11
10
9
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-1 GMC 707 AFCS Control Unit
474
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following AFCS controls are located separately from the AFCS Control Unit:
AP DISC Button
Disengages the autopilot, yaw damper, and interrupts pitch trim operation
(Autopilot Disconnect) An AP DISC Button is located on the pilot’s control stick.
GA Button
(Go Around)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This button may be used to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the associated
aural tone.
EIS
Selects flight director Takeoff (on ground) or Go Around (in air) Mode
If an approach procedure is loaded, this switch also activates the missed approach when the
selected navigation source is GPS or when the navigation source is VOR/LOC and a valid frequency
has been tuned.
The GA Button is located on the power lever.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MET Switch
Used to command manual electric pitch trim
(Manual Electric Trim) An MET Switch is located on the pilot and copilot control stick.
Press DN (forward) and UP (rearward) for manual electric trim.
FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFD.
With the flight director active, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
Maximum commanded pitch (-15°, +20°) and roll (25°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited
to values established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
475
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An initial press of a key listed in Table 7-1 (when the flight director is not active) activates the flight director
in the listed modes. The flight director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from the display
by pressing the FD Key again. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.
Control Pressed
ALT Key
VS Key
Lateral
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
ROL
ROL
TO
GA
ROL
ROL
VNV Key
Roll Hold (default)
ROL
EIS
FD Key
AP Key
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GA Button
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Modes Selected
NAV Key
Navigation**
APR Key
Approach**
HDG Key
LVL Key
Heading Select
Level Hold
GPS
VOR
LOC
BC
GPS
VOR
LOC
HDG
LVL
Vertical
Pitch Hold (default)
Pitch Hold (default)
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
Altitude Hold
Vertical Speed
Vertical Path
Tracking*
PIT
PIT
TO
GA
ALT
VS
VPTH
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
Level Hold
PIT
LVL
*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight director.
AFCS
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS
course before NAV or APR Key press activates flight director.
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS STATUS BOX
APPENDICES
Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFDs when the flight director is active. Flight
director selection and autopilot and yaw damper statuses are shown in the center of the AFCS Status Box.
Lateral flight director modes are displayed on the left and vertical on the right. Armed modes are displayed in
white and active in green.
INDEX
Lateral Modes
Armed
Active
Yaw
Autopilot Damper
Status Status
Vertical Modes
Active
Mode
Reference
Armed
Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display
476
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection,
the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll modes. Mode keys on the AFCS controller are
accompanied by annunciator lights (Figure 7-1) which are illuminated when their respective modes are armed
or active.
EIS
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal operation,
when the FD Key is pressed, the flight director reverts to the default mode(s) for the axis(es). Automatic
transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode annunciation moving to the green
active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight
director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation and
annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNV, SBAS) required to
compute commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters
Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The
flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If
after 10 seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-3 Loss of GPS Signal
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight
director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
COMMAND BARS
AFCS
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed in magenta on the PFDs as a single cue.
The Aircraft Symbol (in yellow) changes to accommodate the Command Bar format; the Command Bars do not
override the Aircraft Symbol. The single-cue Command Bars (Figure 7-5) move together vertically to indicate
pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll commands.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If the attitude information being sent to the flight director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars
are removed from the display. The flight director Command Bars also disappear if the pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚
or bank exceeds 65˚.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
477
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.2 AFCS MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The AFCS is capable of operating in a variety of independent Lateral Modes, Vertical Modes and Combination
of both the Lateral and Vertical Modes.
VERTICAL MODES
EIS
The following table lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The mode
reference is displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes. The NOSE UP/DN Wheel can be used to change the vertical mode reference while operating
under Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical Mode
Pitch Hold
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude Capture
Altitude Hold
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical Speed
Flight Level Change, IAS Hold
Description
Holds the current aircraft pitch
attitude; may be used to climb/
descend to the Selected Altitude
Captures the Selected Altitude
Holds the current Altitude Reference
Maintains the current aircraft vertical
speed; may be used to climb/descend
to the Selected Altitude
Maintains the current aircraft
airspeed while the aircraft is
climbing/descending to the Selected
Altitude
Reference
Range
Reference
Change
Increment
-15° to
+20°
0.5°
± 150 ft
10 ft
nnnn fpm
-3000 to
+1500 fpm
100 fpm
nnn kt
80 to
185 kt
1 kt
Control Annunciation
(default)
PIT
*
ALTS
ALT Key ALT nnnnn ft
VS Key
VS
FLC Key FLC
AFCS
* ALTS armed automatically when PIT, VS, FLC, TO, or GA active, and under VPTH when Selected Altitude is to be captured
instead of VNV Target Altitude
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
APPENDICES
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch
Hold Mode is indicated as the active vertical mode by the ‘PIT’ annunciation. This mode may be used for
climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude Capture Mode
is automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
INDEX
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference. The pitch
reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude
exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to
the nose-up/down limit.
478
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the Pitch Reference
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
EIS
Selected
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-4 Pitch Hold Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
479
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pitch Hold
• Takeoff/Go Around (if the Selected Altitude is at
least 400 feet above the current aircraft altitude)
• Vertical Speed
• Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude
is to be captured instead of the VNV Target
Altitude)
• Flight Level Change
EIS
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed (see previous figure for
example). The ALT SEL Knob is used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until Selected
Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed (next figure). This automatic transition is indicated by the
green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation.
The Selected Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude (shown as the Altitude Reference). As Altitude
Hold Mode becomes active, the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes
green for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic transition.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude Reference
(in this case, equal to
Selected Altitude)
AFCS
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
Figure 7-5 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing the Selected Altitude
INDEX
APPENDICES
Use of the ALT SEL Knob to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is active
causes the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for the
new Selected Altitude.
480
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the current
aircraft altitude (to the nearest 10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The flight director’s Altitude Reference,
shown in the AFCS Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the Altimeter.
Altitude Hold Mode active is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box.
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in Selected Altitude Capture Mode
(see Figure 7-10). Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to Altitude Hold Mode when
the altitude error is less than 50 feet. In this case, the Selected Altitude becomes the flight director’s Altitude
Reference.
EIS
Changing the Altitude Reference
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Turning the ALT SEL Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the
flight director’s Altitude Reference, and does not cancel the mode.
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Altitude
Reference
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
Bug
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
to Maintain Altitude Reference
Figure 7-6 Altitude Hold Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
481
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference. Current
aircraft vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical
Speed Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above
the Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is
selected.
EIS
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS
Status Box along with the Vertical Speed Reference. The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the
Vertical Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is
shown on the indicator.
Changing the Vertical Speed Reference
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above the Vertical Speed Indicator)
may be changed by:
• Using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vertical Speed
Mode Active
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Selected
Altitude
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
Vertical
Speed
Reference
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug
Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-7 Vertical Speed Hold Mode
482
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE MODE (FLC)
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Flight Level Change Mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the FLC Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter). When
Flight Level Change Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected Altitude, airspeed, and
altitude.
EIS
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Flight Level Change Mode is
indicated by a green ‘FLC’ annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed
Reference is also displayed directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the
Airspeed Reference along the tape.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding
to the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference. The flight director
maintains the current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are adjusted and does not
allow the aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Changing the Airspeed Reference
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed Indicator) may be
adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel
Selected
Airspeed Altitude Capture
Reference Mode Armed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Level
Change Mode
Active
AFCS
Airspeed
Reference
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
APPENDICES
Command Bars Indicate Climb
to Attain Selected Altitude
Figure 7-8 Flight Level Change Mode
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
483
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
LATERAL MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following table relates each Garmin AFCS lateral mode to its respective control and annunciation. Refer
to the combination modes section for information regarding Go Around and Takeoff modes.
Lateral Mode
Description
Control Annunciation
Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
(default)
depending on the commanded
bank angle
Captures and tracks the Selected HDG
Heading
Key
EIS
Roll Hold
Heading Select
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation, GPS Arm/Capture/Track
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ROL
25°
HDG
25°
GPS
Captures and tracks the selected
Navigation, VOR Enroute Arm/Capture/Track navigation source (GPS, VOR,
LOC)
Navigation, LOC Arm/Capture/Track
(No Glideslope)
NAV
Key
Maximum Roll
Command Limit
VOR
LOC
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
The AFCS limits turn rate to 3 degrees per second (standard rate turn).
Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls the wings level.
AFCS
When the flight director is activated or switched, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is
annunciated as ‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank
angle condition.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-9 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
APPENDICES
Bank Angle
< 6°
6 to 25°
> 25°
Flight Director Response
Rolls wings level
Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
Limits bank to 25°
INDEX
Table 7-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses
484
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains
the Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a light blue bug on the HSI and in the box to the
upper left of the HSI.
Changing the Selected Heading
NOTE: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.
The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob on either PFD.
EIS
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the bug is turned
more than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading
changes of more than 330° at a time result in turn reversals.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Heading Select
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Command Bars Track
Selected Heading
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected
Heading
Bug
Figure 7-10 Heading Select Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
485
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NAVIGATION MODES (GPS, VOR, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
EIS
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (GPS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering
commands from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly non-precision
GPS and LOC approaches where vertical guidance is not required.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the
selected mode is armed. If the CDI shows less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when
the NAV Key is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active lateral mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-11 GPS Navigation Mode Armed
When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation
Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed automatically when the navigation source switch takes place if the APR Key is not pressed
prior to the automatic source switch.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
(wings rolled level):
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
• Navigation source manually switched (with the CDI Softkey)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• During a LOC/ILS approach, the FAF is crossed while in GPS Navigation Mode after the automatic navigation
source switch from GPS to LOC
486
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the Selected Course
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GPS Navigation
Mode Active
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is Selected
Navigation Source
Command Bars Indicate Right
Turn to Track GPS Course
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-12 Navigation Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
487
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
COMBINATION MODES (VNV, APR, NAV, BC, GA)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following table lists the modes that operating by using both Vertical and Lateral Modes with their
corresponding controls and annunciations.
Mode
Description
Vertical Path Tracking
EIS
VNV Target Altitude Capture
Glidepath
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Glideslope
Backcourse Arm/Capture/Track
Control
Captures and tracks descent legs
VNV Key
of an active vertical profile
Captures the Vertical Navigation
*
(VNV) Target Altitude
Captures and tracks the SBAS
glidepath on approach
APR Key
Captures and tracks the ILS
glideslope on approach
Captures and tracks a localizer
NAV Key
signal for backcourse approaches
Annunciation
VPTH
ALTV
GP
GS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approach, ILS Arm/Capture/Track
(Glideslope Mode automatically armed)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Takeoff
Go Around**
AFCS
Level
25° Capture
10° Track
25°
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
BC
Approach, GPS Arm/Capture/Track
Approach, VOR Arm/Capture/Track
GPS
Captures and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR,
LOC)
Commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level on the
ground in preparation for takeoff
Commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level in the air
Autopilot engages and
commands pitch angle necessary
to establish zero vertical fpm
APR Key
Maximum Roll
Command Limit
VAPP
LOC
GA
Button
Wings Level
GA
Button
Wings Level
***
Wings Level
* ALTV is armed automatically under VPTH when VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of Selected Altitude.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 7-5 Flight Director Combination Modes
VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODES (VPTH, ALTV)
APPENDICES
NOTE: VNV is disabled when parallel track or Dead Reckoning Mode is active.
NOTE: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.
INDEX
Vertical Navigation (VNV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations any
time that VNV flight planning is available. Refer to the GPS Navigation Section for more information on VNV
flight plans. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
488
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• The selected navigation source is GPS.
• A VNV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or vertical direct-to is active.
• VNV is enabled (VNV ENBL Softkey pressed on the MFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.
• Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.
• The VNV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft altitude.
EIS
The flight director may be armed for VNV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The appropriate VNV flight
control modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile. Upon
reaching the last waypoint in the VNV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and
cancels any armed VNV modes.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical Path Tracking Mode (VPTH)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: If another vertical mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path
Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When a vertical profile (VNV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope
Mode is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable,
the appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the
Selected Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
AFCS
Figure 7-13 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode,
acknowledgment is required within five minutes of descent path interception by:
• Pressing the VNV Key
• Adjusting the Selected Altitude
APPENDICES
If acknowledgment is not received within one minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and
the descent is not captured.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
489
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the PFD Navigation
Status Box and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, vertical deviation,
and vertical speed required) appear on the PFDs in magenta.
Vertical Path Tracking
Armed (Flashing Indicates
Acknowledgment Required
EIS
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
VNV Target
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Enroute
Phase of
Flight
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
AFCS
Figure 7-14 Vertical Path Capture
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile (next figure). An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed as
appropriate.
490
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vertical Path
Tracking Active
VNV Target Altitude
Capture Armed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
VNV Target
Altitude
EIS
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-15 Vertical Path Tracking Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the altimeter barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path
(without commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV
vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV
Target Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode
AFCS
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director
to revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity that both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in
the vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by
flight plan changes that affect the vertical profile.
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).
APPENDICES
• A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active vertical direct-to).
Unless VNV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
491
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Non-Path Descents
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNV flight control is selected. If the VS or FLC Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is
selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode
to allow profile re-capture.
EIS
Figure 7-16 Flight Level Change VNV Non-Path Descent
To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
• At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode (ALTV)
NOTE: Armed VNV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually exclusive. However,
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed implicitly (not annunciated) whenever VNV Target Altitude Capture
Mode is armed.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VNV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected
Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNV Target
Altitudes are shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be entered manually or loaded
from a database (see the GPS Navigation Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1 minute”
is annunciated in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNV Target Altitude is displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation.
The VNV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’ annunciation and remains
displayed above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed Indication (RSVI) is removed
once VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
INDEX
APPENDICES
At 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNV Target
Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active,
the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to
indicate the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing
upcoming descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.
492
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altitude Reference (In This Case,
Equal To VNV Altitude Target)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
Figure 7-17 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
EIS
Changing the VNV Target Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the current VNV Target Altitude while VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes
the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude
capture mode are armed in preparation to capture the new VNV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude,
depending on which altitude is to be intercepted first.
VNV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the GPS Navigation Section
for details).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
APPROACH MODES (GPS, VAPP, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
flight director to enter Approach Mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the
selected navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected
navigation receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when the
CDI is greater than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the active
lateral mode). If the CDI is less the 1 dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key is pressed.
AFCS
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode.
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
APPENDICES
When GPS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
Selecting GPS Approach Mode without a Glidepath:
1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
INDEX
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
493
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GLIDEPATH MODE (GP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Glidepath Mode is used to track the SBAS-based glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is
annunciated in white in the AFCS Status Box.
Selecting Glidepath Mode:
1) Ensure a GPS approach with vertical guidance is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be
part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
EIS
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
NOTE: Some RNAV (GPS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an aid in flying a stabilized
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
approach. These approaches are NOT considered Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches
that are annunciated on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V should be flown to an MDA, until visual with the
landing surface, even though vertical glidepath (GP) information may be provided.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical descent angle) with the autopilot coupled, the
aircraft will not level off at the MDA even if the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
track the glidepath.
Figure 7-18 Glidepath Mode Armed
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
AFCS
• A GPS approach with vertical guidance (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V) is loaded into the active flight plan.
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF).
• Vertical deviation is valid.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The CDI is at less than full-scale deviation
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI)
494
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS Approach
Mode Active
Glidepath
Mode Active
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
LPV Approach
Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Glidepath
Indicator
Figure 7-19 Glidepath Mode
Figure 7-20 GPS Approach Mode Armed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LOC Approach Mode allows the autopilot to fly a LOC/ILS approach with a glideslope. When LOC
Approach Mode is armed, Glideslope Mode is also armed automatically. LOC captures are inhibited if the
difference between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105°.
Selecting LOC Approach Mode without a Glideslope:
AFCS
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the NAV Key.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the NAV Key.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
495
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When Glideslope
Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director
mode.
Selecting LOC with Glideslope Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
EIS
3) Press the APR Key.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the APR Key.
Figure 7-21 Glideslope Mode Armed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the
glideslope, the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to capture and track the glideslope.
Approach
Mode Active
Glideslope
Mode Active
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Active ILS
Frequency Tuned
INDEX
LOC1 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source
Glideslope
Indicator
Figure 7-22 Glideslope Mode
496
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Approach Mode is active and a Vectors-To-Final is activated
• Approach Mode is active and Navigation source is manually switched
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• During a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
Changing the Selected Course
EIS
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob corresponding to the selected flight director (CRS1 for the pilot
side, CRS2 for the copilot side).
BACKCOURSE MODE (BC)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Backcourse Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The mode may be
selected by pressing the NAV Key. Backcourse Mode is armed if the CDI is greater than one dot when the
mode is selected. If the CDI is less than one dot, Backcourse Mode is automatically captured when the NAV
Key is pressed. The flight director creates roll steering commands from the Selected Course and deviation
when in Backcourse Mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Backcourse Navigation Mode is selected when the localizer front course is greater than 105° from the aircraft
heading. Backcourse Navigation Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The
annunciation ‘BC’ in the AFCS Status Box indicates Backcourse Navigation Mode.
Backcourse
Mode Active
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
LOC2 is Selected Navigation Source
INDEX
Figure 7-23 Backcourse Mode
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
497
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Changing the Selected Course
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
EIS
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan provided that GPS
Navigation Mode is engaged, GPS is the active navigation source on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is
the active flight plan leg. It is important to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on GPS.
Thus, even if the APR key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial
Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
INTERCEPTING AND FLYING A DME ARC
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e. ATC provides vectors
to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or Roll Mode, the AFCS will not automatically
intercept or track the arc unless the pilot activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms GPS Navigation
Mode. The AFCS will not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the beginning of the
arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot deselects GPS Navigation
Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAKEOFF (TO) AND GO AROUND (GA) MODES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Go Around and Takeoff modes are coupled pitch and roll modes and are annunciated as both the vertical
and lateral modes when active. In these modes, the flight director commands a constant set pitch attitude and
wings level. The GA Button is used to select both modes. The mode entered by the flight director depends
on whether the aircraft is on the ground.
Takeoff Mode provides an attitude reference during rotation and takeoff. This mode can be selected only
while on the ground by pushing the GA Button. The flight director Command Bars assume a wings-level,
pitch-up attitude.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pressing the GA Button while in the air activates the flight director in wings level, pitch-up attitudes,
allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go around.
498
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Go Around
Mode Active
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Command Bars Indicate Climb
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Takeoff Mode Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-24 Takeoff and Go Around Modes
LEVEL MODE (LVL)
AFCS
Level Mode is coupled pitch and roll modes and is annunciated as both the vertical and lateral modes when
active. Pressing the LVL Key engages the autopilot (if the autopilot is disengaged) in level vertical and lateral
modes. Level Mode does not track altitude or heading. When the LVL Key is pressed all armed and active
modes are cancelled and the autopilot and flight director revert to LVL mode for pitch and roll. While in level
mode, all other modes are available by pressing the corresponding button.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
499
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.3 AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the POH/AFM for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.
The autopilot and yaw damper operate the flight control surface servos to provide automatic flight control. The
autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands received from the flight director. Pitch
autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim servo to relieve any sustained effort required by the pitch
servo. Autopilot operation is independent of the yaw damper.
EIS
The yaw damper reduces Dutch roll tendencies and coordinates turns. It can operate independently of the
autopilot and may be used during normal hand-flight maneuvers. Yaw rate commands are limited to 6 deg/sec
by the yaw damper.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT CONTROL
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos based on the active flight director modes. Yaw damping
is provided by the yaw servo. Servo motor control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo
gearboxes are equipped with slip-clutches set to certain values. This allows the servos to be overridden in case
of an emergency.
PITCH AXIS AND TRIM
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during flight director maneuvers.
Flight director pitch commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with pitch damper control, and sent
to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and provides this signal to the
pitch trim servo. The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average pitch servo effort.
AFCS
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim servo may be used to provide manual electric pitch
trim (MEPT). This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control wheel switch rather than the trim
wheel. Manual trim commands are generated only when both halves of the MEPT Switch are operated
simultaneously. Trim speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.
The pilot side MEPT Switch has priority over the copilot side MEPT Switch.
ROLL AXIS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during flight director maneuvers. The
flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper control, and sent to
the roll servo motor.
APPENDICES
YAW AXIS
INDEX
The yaw damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to dampen the aircraft’s natural Dutch roll response. It also
uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns.
500
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGAGEMENT
NOTE: Autopilot engagement/disengagement is not equivalent to servo engagement/disengagement.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director (if not already active) are activated
and the annunciator lights on the AFCS controller for the autopilot and yaw damper are illuminated. The flight
director engages in Pitch and Roll Hold Modes when initially activated.
Autopilot
Engaged
Yaw Damper
Engaged
EIS
Figure 7-25 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Engaged
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The YD will engage automatically when the aircraft climbs through 200’ AGL and disengages when the
aircraft descends through 200’ AGL. The YD will always engage when AP is engaged. Disabling ESP on the
Aux - System Setup 2 page will disable the automatic YD engagement.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Autopilot and yaw damper status are displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is indicated
by green ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciations, respectively.
DISENGAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The autopilot is manually disengaged by pushing the AP Key on the AFCS Control Unit Manual autopilot
disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’ annunciation and a three-second autopilot
disconnect aural alert.
Figure 7-26 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
AFCS
Pushing the AP DISC Switch disengages both the yaw damper and the autopilot. When the yaw damper and
autopilot are manually disengaged, both the ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciation turn yellow and flash for 5 seconds and
a three-second autopilot disconnect aural alert is generated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Yaw damper will reengage when aircraft is above 200 feet AGL.
APPENDICES
Figure 7-27 Yaw Damper Disengagement
After manual disengagement, the autopilot disconnect aural alert may be cancelled by pushing the MEPT ARM
or AP DISC Switch (AP DISC Switch also cancels the flashing ‘AP’ annunciation).
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
501
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red and white ‘AP’ annunciation and by the
autopilot disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC or MEPT ARM
Switch. Automatic autopilot disengagement occurs due to:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• System failure
• Invalid sensor data
• Inability to compute default flight director modes (FD also disengages automatically)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Yaw damper disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘YD’ annunciation. Automatic yaw
damper disengagement occurs when autopilot disengagement is caused by failure in a parameter also affecting
the yaw damper. This means the yaw damper can remain operational in some cases where the autopilot
automatically disengages. A localized failure in the yaw damper system or invalid sensor data also cause yaw
damper disengagement.
Figure 7-28 Automatic Autopilot and Yaw Damper Disengagement
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
UNDERSPEED PROTECTION
Underspeed Protection is designed to discourage aircraft operation below minimum established airspeeds.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the aircraft reaches a predetermined airspeed (specific to each flap setting), a yellow MINSPD
annunciation will appear above the airspeed indicator. When aircraft angle of attack is within four degrees of
stall warning, the aircraft and pitch attitude indicator will move downward until coincident with the aircraft
symbol at stall warning angle of attack.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airspeed
Indicator
Figure 7-29 MINSPD Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
If the aircraft continues to decelerate, Underspeed Protection functionality depends on which vertical flight
director mode is selected. For the purpose of this discussion, the vertical flight director modes can be divided
into two categories: Those in which it is important to maintain altitude for as long as possible (altitude-critical
modes), and those in which maintaining altitude is less crucial (non-altitude critical modes).
502
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TKS FIKI *
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flaps MINSPD Annunciation Aural AIRSPEED Alert
0%
80 kt
85 kt
OFF
50%
76 kt
80 kt
100%
70 kt
80 kt
0%
85 kt
90 kt
ON
50%
81 kt
85 kt
* The optional TKS Flight Into Known Icing (FIKI) Anti-Ice System is only
available on SR22 Models
EIS
Table 7-6 MINSPD Annunciation and AIRSPEED Alert
ALTITUDE-CRITICAL MODES (ALT, GS, GP, TO, GA, FLC)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the aircraft decelerates to stall warning, the lateral and vertical flight director modes will change from
active to armed, and the autopilot will provide input causing the aircraft to pitch down and the wings to level.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Lateral and
Vertical FD
Modes Armed
Figure 7-30 Lateral and Vertical Flight Director Modes Armed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
An aural “AIRSPEED” alert will sound every five seconds and a red “UNDERSPEED PROTECT ACTIVE”
annunciation (next figure) will appear gto the right of the vertical speed indicator. The pitch down force will
continue until the aircraft reaches a pitch attitude at which IAS equals the IAS at which stall warning turns
off, plus two knots. The autopilot will cause the aircraft to pitch up, recapturing the vertical reference and the
vertical and lateral flight director modes will change from armed to active.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 7-31 Underspeed Protect Active Annunciation
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
503
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NON-ALTITUDE CRITICAL MODES (VS, VNAV)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the aircraft reaches a predetermined airspeed, a yellow MINSPD annunciation will appear above the
airspeed indicator. When the airspeed trend vector reaches a predetermined airspeed, a single aural “AIRSPEED”
will sound, alerting the pilot to the impending underspeed condition.
Vertical FD
Mode Armed
EIS
Figure 7-32 Vertical Flight Director Mode Armed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When airspeed increases (as a result of adding power/thrust) to an IAS above the minimum commandable
autopilot airspeed, the autopilot will cause the aircraft to pitch up until recapturing the vertical reference.
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Overspeed protection is not active in ALT, GS or GP modes.
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight Level Change, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director. Overspeed protection is provided to limit the flight director’s
pitch command in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and maintain the mode reference for the
selected vertical mode without exceeding maximum autopilot airspeed.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When Overspeed Protection is active, the Airspeed Reference appears in a box above the Airspeed Indicator,
flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference adjusted
to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.
INDEX
Figure 7-33 Overspeed Annunciation
504
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.4 EXAMPLE FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The following example flight plan and diagrams (not to be used for navigation) in this section are
for instructional purposes only and should be considered not current. Numbered portions of accompanying
diagrams correspond to numbered procedure steps.
EIS
This scenario-based set of procedures (based on the example flight plan found in the Flight Management
Section) shows various Garmin AFCS modes used during a flight. In this scenario, the aircraft departs Charles B.
Wheeler Downtown Airport (KMKC), enroute to Colorado Springs Airport (KCOS). After departure, the aircraft
climbs to 12,000 ft and airway V4 is intercepted, following ATC vectors.
0
33
30
3
27
30
30
27
24
24
21
30
24
27
15
27
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
12
21
18
15
18
9
24
21
12
6
Lamar
VOR
(LAA)
Topeka
VOR
(TOP)
12
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
9
V 244
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
9
3
V4
18
V 244
9
6
0
33
KMKC
15
6
KCOS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
3
6
0
33
0
33
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway V4 is flown to Salina VOR (SLN) using VOR navigation, then airway V244 is flown using GPS Navigation.
The ILS approach for runway 35L and LPV (WAAS) approach for runway 35R are shown and a missed approach
is executed.
12
21
15
18
Figure 7-34 Flight Plan Overview
AFCS
DEPARTURE
Climbing to the Selected Altitude and flying an assigned heading:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Before takeoff:
a) Use the ALT SEL Knob to set the Selected Altitude to 12,000 feet.
APPENDICES
b) Push the GA Button to activate Takeoff Mode. The flight director Command Bars establish a pitch up
attitude to follow.
c) Press the AP Key to engage the autopilot in a climb, holding the pitch angle commanded in Takeoff Mode
and wings level.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
505
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
2) In this example, Vertical Speed Mode is used to capture the Selected Altitude (Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or
Flight Level Change Mode may be used).
Press the VS Key to activate Vertical Speed Mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Vertical Speed Reference may be adjusted after Vertical Speed Mode is selected using the NOSE UP/
DN Wheel to establish a new Vertical Speed Reference.
3) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading, complying with ATC vectors to intercept Airway V4.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds; the autopilot
transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EIS
Press the HDG Key to activate Heading Select Mode while the autopilot is engaged in the climb. The autopilot
follows the Selected Heading Bug on the HSI and turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
HD
GM
od
AFCS
e
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TO M
o
de
3
Selected Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
4
APPENDICES
KMKC
1
2
VS
e
Mod
ode
M
TO
INDEX
Figure 7-35 Departure
506
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERCEPTING A VOR RADIAL
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During climb-out, the autopilot continues to fly the aircraft in Heading Select Mode. Airway V4 to Salina
VOR (SLN) should now be intercepted. Since the enroute flight plan waypoints correspond to VORs, flight
director Navigation Mode using either VOR or GPS as the navigation source may be used. In this scenario, VOR
Navigation Mode is used for navigation to the first VOR waypoint in the flight plan.
Intercepting a VOR radial:
1) Arm VOR Navigation Mode:
a) Tune the VOR frequency.
EIS
b) Press the CDI Softkey to set the navigation source to VOR.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Use the CRS1 Knob to set the Selected Course to the desired value, 255°. Note that at this point, the flight
director is still in Heading Select Mode and the autopilot continues to fly the Selected Heading, 290°.
d) Press the NAV Key. This arms VOR Navigation Mode and the white ‘VOR’ annunciation appears to the left
of the active lateral mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) As the aircraft nears the Selected Course, the flight director transitions from Heading Select to VOR Navigation
Mode and the ‘VOR’ annunciation flashes green. The autopilot begins turning to intercept the Selected Course.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) The autopilot continues the turn until the aircraft is established on the Selected Course.
0
33
3
Hd
29 g
0
V4
6
AFCS
30
o
27
3
255
9
o
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
NA
V
Mo
de
2
HD
G
12
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
24
VO
R
M
od
e,
VO
R
Ar
m
ed
15
1
21
18
APPENDICES
Figure 7-36 Intercepting a VOR Radial
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
507
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLYING A FLIGHT PLAN/GPS COURSE
NOTE: Changing the navigation source cancels Navigation Mode and causes the flight director to revert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
back to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level).
As the aircraft closes on Salina VOR, GPS is used to navigate the next leg, airway V244. The aircraft is
currently tracking inbound on Airway V4.
Flying a GPS flight plan:
EIS
1) Transition from VOR to GPS Navigation Mode:
a) Press the CDI Softkey until GPS is the selected navigation source.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the NAV Key to activate GPS Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft along the active
flight plan leg.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Following the flight plan, the autopilot continues to steer the aircraft under GPS guidance. Note that in GPS
Navigation Mode, course changes defined by the flight plan are automatically made without pilot action
required.
0
33
3
30
0
3
V4
6
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
33
o
075
30
e
V Mod
PS NA
6
27
G
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
2
24
V 244
1
12
21
18
12
15
24
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
9
AFCS
27
076
e
9
o
260
o
d
AV Mo
VOR N
15
21
18
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-37 Transition to GPS Flight Plan
508
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DESCENT
While flying the arrival procedure, the aircraft is cleared for descent in preparation for the approach to KCOS.
Three methods are presented for descent:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Flight Level Change descent – Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the Selected Altitude at a
constant airspeed. This descent method does not account for flight plan waypoint altitude constraints.
• Vertical Path Tracking descent – Vertical Path Tracking Mode is used to follow the vertical descent path
defined in the GPS flight plan. Altitude constraints correspond to waypoints in the flight plan. Before VNV
flight control can provide vertical profile guidance, a VNV flight plan must be entered and enabled.
EIS
• Non-path descent in a VNV scenario – A VNV flight plan is entered and enabled, however Pitch Hold, Vertical
Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the VNV Target Altitude prior to reaching the
planned TOD. Flight Level Change Mode is used in the example.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Level Change descent:
1) Select Flight Level Change Mode:
a) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude to 10,000 feet.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Press the FLC Key to activate Flight Level Change Mode. The annunciation ‘FLC’ appears next to the
Airspeed Reference, which defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is
armed automatically.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Use the NOSE UP/DN Wheel to adjust the commanded airspeed while maintaining the same power, or reduce
power to allow descent in Flight Level Change Mode while the autopilot maintains the current airspeed.
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
AFCS
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
2
Mod
e
APPENDICES
FLC
3
Selected Altitude of 10,000 MSL
ALT Mode
Figure 7-38 FLC Descent
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
509
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Vertical Path Tracking descent to VNV Target Altitude:
1) Select VNV flight control:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Press the VNV Key to arm Vertical Path Tracking Mode. The white annunciation ‘VPTH’ appears.
b) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the flight plan’s VNV Target Altitude of 10,000
feet.
EIS
If the Selected Altitude is not at least 75 ft below the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director captures the
Selected Altitude rather than the VNV Target Altitude once Vertical Path Tracking Mode becomes active
(ALTS is armed rather than ALTV).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) If Vertical Path Tracking Mode is armed more than 5 minutes prior to descent path capture, acknowledgment
is required for the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode. To proceed
with descent path capture if the white ‘VPTH’ annunciation begins flashing, do one of the following
• Press the VNV Key
• Turn the ALT SEL Knob to adjust the Selected Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) When the top of descent (TOD) is reached, the flight director transitions to Vertical Path Tracking Mode and
begins the descent to the VNV Target Altitude. Intention to capture the VNV Target Altitude is indicated by the
white ‘ALTV’ annunciation.
AFCS
3) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
APPENDICES
1
ALT Mode
TOD
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
2
VPT
HM
ode
3
INDEX
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
BOD
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude (set below VNAV Target Altitude)
Along-track Offset, 3 nm before OPSHN
3 nm
Figure 7-39 VPTH Descent
510
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Non-path descent using Flight Level Change Mode:
1) Using Flight Level Change Mode, command a non-path descent to an intermediate altitude above the next VNV
flight plan altitude.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the current aircraft altitude to an altitude (in this
case, 9,400 feet) at which to level off between VNV flight plan altitudes.
b) Press the FLC Key before the planned TOD during an altitude hold while VPTH is armed. The Airspeed
Reference defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Vertical Path Tracking and Selected Altitude Capture
Mode are armed automatically.
EIS
2) Reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level Change Mode. The autopilot maintains the Airspeed Reference.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft. After leveling off reset Selected Altitude at
or below 9,000 ft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) When the next TOD is reached, Vertical Path Tracking becomes active (may require acknowledgment to allow
descent path capture).
AFCS
5) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
511
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VP
TH
M
od
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
e
Planned
TOD
2
BOD
ALT Mode
1
FL
C
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
Pla
nn
M
od
e
Selected Altitude of 9,400 MSL
3
ed
De
sce
nt
Pa
th
ALT Mode
TOD
4
VP
TH
Mo
de
EIS
VNAV Target Altitude of 9,000 MSL
5
BOD
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3 nm
OPSHN
HABUK
Figure 7-40 Non-path Descent
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
APPROACH
NOTE: If an approach contains a DME arc, the arc must be flown in Navigation Mode with the Garmin AFCS.
When receiving vectors from ATC, Navigation Mode must be selected prior to intercepting the ARC.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flying an ILS approach:
1) Transition from GPS Navigation Mode to Heading Select Mode.
a) Select the Runway 35L ILS approach for KCOS and select ‘VECTORS’ for the transition. Load and activate
the approach into the flight plan.
AFCS
b) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading after getting vectors from ATC.
c) Press the HDG Key. The autopilot turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
d) Use Heading Select Mode to comply with ATC vectors as requested.
2) Arm LOC Approach and Glideslope modes.
a) Ensure the appropriate localizer frequency is tuned.
APPENDICES
b) Press the APR Key when cleared for approach to arm Approach and Glideslope modes. ‘LOC’ and ‘GS’
appear in white as armed mode annunciations.
INDEX
c) T he navigation source automatically switches to LOC. After this switch occurs, the localizer signal can be
captured and the flight director determines when to begin the turn to intercept the final approach course.
The flight director now provides guidance to the missed approach point.
512
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the ILS approach:
•
Push the AP DISC Switch at the decision height and land the aircraft.
•
Use the GA Button to execute a missed approach.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
KCOS
EIS
LOC APR/
GS Mode
3
PETEY
G
HD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
e
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
od
M
PYNON
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS NAV Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-41 ILS Approach to KCOS
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
513
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Flying a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical guidance) with the autopilot coupled, the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
will not level off at the MDA even if the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.
1) Arm flight director modes for a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
a) Make sure the navigation source is set to GPS (use CDI Softkey to change navigation source).
b) Select the Runway 35R LPV approach for KCOS. Load and activate the approach into the flight plan.
EIS
2) Press the APR Key once clearance for approach has been received. GPS Approach Mode is activated and
Glidepath Mode is armed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Once the glidepath is captured, Glidepath Mode becomes active. The flight director now provides guidance to
the missed approach point.
•
Push the AP DISC Switch at the decision height and land the aircraft.
•
Use the GA Button to execute a missed approach.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the approach:
514
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
KCOS
EIS
3
GPS APR/
GP Mode
CEGIX
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
FALUR
HABUK
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PYNON
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS NAV Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-42 LPV Approach to KCOS
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
515
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GO AROUND/MISSED APPROACH
NOTE: As a result of calculations performed by the system while flying the holding pattern, the display may
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
re-size automatically and the aircraft may not precisely track the holding pattern as depicted on the PFD and
MFD.
Flying a missed approach:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Start the climb to the prescribed altitude in the published Missed Approach Procedure (in this case, 10,000 ft).
Upon reaching the appropriate altitude, press the NAV Key climb to have the autopilot fly to the hold.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EIS
1) Push the GA Button at the Decision height and apply go-around power to execute a missed approach. If a
compatible lift computer is installed, the autopilot will remain engaged and the flight director will indicate
nose-up and wings level attitudes. If flying an ILS or LOC approach the CDI will switch to GPS as the navigation
source.
3) Use the ALT SEL Knob to set a Selected Altitude to hold.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To hold the current airspeed during the climb, press the FLC Key.
AFCS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) The autopilot flies the holding pattern after the missed approach is activated. Annunciations are displayed in
the Navigation Status Box, above the AFCS Status Box.
516
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MOGAL
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS NAV Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GA Mode
KCOS
1
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-43 Go Around/Missed Approach
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
517
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.5 AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AFCS CAS MESSAGES
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
See Appendix A for Crew Alerting System (CAS) messages related to the AFCS.
518
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.6 ABNORMAL OPERATION
SUSPECTED AUTOPILOT MALFUNCTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Consult the aircraft documentation for the location of circuit breakers as well as specifics that may
supplement or amplify this procedure.
If an autopilot failure or trim failure is suspected to have occurred, perform the following steps:
EIS
1) Firmly grasp the control wheel.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press and hold the AP DISC Switch. The autopilot will disconnect and power is removed from the trim motor.
Power is also removed from all primary servo motors and engaged solenoids. Note the visual and aural alerting
indicating autopilot disconnect.
3) Retrim the aircraft as needed. Substantial trim adjustment may be needed.
4) Pull the appropriate circuit breaker(s) to electrically isolate the servo and solenoid components.
5) Release the AP DISC Switch.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
OVERPOWERING AUTOPILOT SERVOS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In the context of this discussion, “overpowering” refers to any pressure or force applied to the pitch controls
when the autopilot is engaged. A small amount of pressure or force on the pitch controls can cause the autopilot
automatic trim to run to an out-of-trim condition. Therefore, any application of pressure or force to the
controls should be avoided when the autopilot is engaged.
Overpowering the autopilot during flight will cause the autopilot’s automatic trim to run, resulting in an outof-trim condition or cause the trim to hit the stop if the action is prolonged. In this case, larger than anticipated
control forces are required after the autopilot is disengaged.
AFCS
The following steps should be added to the preflight check:
1) Check for proper autopilot operation and ensure the autopilot can be overpowered.
2) Note the forces required to overpower the autopilot servo clutches.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
REVERSIONARY MODE
In the event of a PFD failure, the MFD goes into reversionary mode. The autopilot remains engaged but
reverts to pitch hold and roll hold modes; all other modes are available for selection. If the MFD fails, the PFD
goes into reversionary mode and the autopilot continues to function.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
519
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
520
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi®, ChartView, or FliteCharts®, it may be necessary to carry another
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Additional features of the system include the following:
• SurfaceWatch™
• Satellite telephone and SMS messaging services
• Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) System
• Hypoxia Recognition with Automatic Descent Mode
• Electronic Checklists
• Auxiliary Video/EVS (Optional)
• Position Reporting
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
• FliteCharts®/ChartView electronic charts
• Wi-Fi connections
• AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory
• SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
• Scheduler
• Flight Data Logging
• Connext
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic
charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The AOPA and AC-U-KWIK Airport Directories offer detailed information for a selected airport, such as available
services, hours of operation, and lodging options.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A SXM Data Link Receiver
handles more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment
choices and longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
AFCS
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as
Switch fuel tanks, Change oil, or Altimeter-Transponder Check in the Messages Window on the PFD.
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card.
Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Connext allows for setting up the installed optional Flight Stream device for a Bluetooth connection between
the system and a mobile device running the Garmin Pilot™ application.
APPENDICES
The optional SurfaceWatch™ feature provides voice and visual annunciations to aid in maintaining situational
awareness and avoid potential runway incursions and excursions during ground and air operations in the airport
environment.
Iridium Telephone Services and SMS messaging is an optional subscription service offered through Garmin
®
Connext and Iridium Satellite LLC. Voice and SMS messaging communications are through the Iridium Satellite
Network. Data communications are through Iridium Data Services, or a wireless network (Wi-Fi) when the
aircraft is on the ground.
INDEX
The Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) system discourages aircraft operation outside the normal flight
envelope.
The system provides a control and display interface to an optional EVS/auxiliary video system.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
521
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8.1 SAFETAXI
EIS
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page
• VOR Information Page
• Inset Map (PFD)
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Airport Information Page
• Nearest Pages
• Intersection Information Page
• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
• NDB Information Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
522
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airport
Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Taxiway
Identification
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Aircraft
Position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Detail Softkey
Removes
Taxiway
Markings
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-1 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
AFCS
The Detail Softkey (declutter) label advances to Detail All, Detail 3, Detail 2 and Detail 1 each time the softkey
is selected for easy recognition of decluttering level. Selecting the Detail All Softkey removes the taxiway
markings and airport feature labels. Selecting the Detail 3 Softkey removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol,
and intersection names if within the airport plan view. Selecting the Detail 2 Softkey removes the airport runway
layout, unless the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Selecting the Detail 1 Softkey cycles back
to the original map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
523
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Map Settings Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-2 Navigation Map Page Menu, Map Settings Option
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SafeTaxi.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
SAFETAXI
Option
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SafeTaxi
Range
Options
INDEX
Figure 8-3 Map Settings Menu, Aviation Group, SafeTaxi Range Options
524
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SAFETAXI CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
EIS
SafeTaxi Database
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-4 Power-up, SafeTaxi Database
Power-up Page Display
Definition
AFCS
Normal operation. SafeTaxi database is valid and within current cycle.
SafeTaxi database has expired.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Database card contains no SafeTaxi data.
Table 8-1 SafeTaxi Annunciation Definitions
APPENDICES
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be found
on the Aux - System Status page.
Press the FMS Knob Softkey to place the cursor in the Database window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob, Press the Details Softkey to show additional SafeTaxi database information.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
525
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The SafeTaxi database cycle number 16S3, is deciphered as follows:
16 – Indicates the year 2016
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
S – Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi
3 – Indicates the third issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The SafeTaxi Effective date 26–MAY–16 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. SafeTaxi Expires
date 21–JUL–16 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SafeTaxi Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-5 Aux - System Status Page, SafeTaxi Current Information
AFCS
SafeTaxi information appears in blue and yellow text. The Effective date appears in blue when data is current
and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The Expires date appears in blue when data
is current and in yellow when expired. Not Available appears in blue in the Region field if SafeTaxi data is
not available on the database card. An expired SafeTaxi database is not disabled and will continue to function
indefinitely.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey a second time. The softkey label will change to PFD1 DB. The Database
window will now be displaying database information for PFD1. As before, scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Effective date is the beginning date for this database cycle. If the present date is before the effective date,
the Effective date appears in yellow and the Expires date appears in blue. The Expires date is the revision date
for the next database cycle. Not Available indicates that SafeTaxi is not available on the database card or no
database card is inserted.
526
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Current Date is before Effective Date
SafeTaxi Database has Expired
SafeTaxi Database Not Installed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-6 Aux – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Database Status
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
527
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.2 CHARTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The preferred charts source can be selected within the system. The active chart source for a particular procedure
is shown on the information pane under Source.
Selecting preferred charts source:
1) While viewing a chart select the MENU Softkey to display the Page Menu options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup menu option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the Preferred Charts Source option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the available options (FliteCharts, ChartView).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Preferred Charts Source Option
Chart Setup Option
AFCS
Figure 8-7 Preferred Charts Source
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Chart Source
Figure 8-8 Chart Source
528
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLITECHARTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed
with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Not all charts are geo-referenced. These charts will display an
Aircraft Not Shown Icon in the lower right corner of the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Departure Procedures (DP)
EIS
An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area depicted on some charts. Off-scale areas are
indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on the published chart. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of this
information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft
symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to
the off-scale area.
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Off-Scale
Areas
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Area
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Off-Scale
Areas
Off-Scale
Area
INDEX
Figure 8-9 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
529
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, selecting the Charts Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT Opt, Chart, Info, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and Go
Back. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
EIS
Selecting the Go Back Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Selecting the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: All, Fit WDTH, Full SCN, and Back.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While viewing the CHRT Opt Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
AFCS
Figure 8-10 MFD Navigation Map Page Softkeys
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, select the Charts Softkey.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Options Menu to Charts.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
530
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu
Figure 8-11 Option Menus
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
On the Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu, select the desired chart and press the ENT Key
to display the chart.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner NO AVAILABLE CHARTS appears on the screen.
The NO AVAILABLE CHARTS banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
Figure 8-12 No Available Charts Banner
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
AFCS
Figure 8-13 Unable To Display Chart Banner
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When a chart is not available by selecting the Charts Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts may
be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, selecting the
Charts Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
APPENDICES
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
531
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting a chart:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, select the Charts Softkey.
The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Select the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
EIS
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
While the Approach Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the system softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, and
the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting the Chart Softkey switches between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the Chart Softkey switches between the Gainesville, FL (KGNV) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
Selecting the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart. If
the displayed chart is the airport diagram, the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey has no effect.
AFCS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart or to the right of the
chart for certain airports. This information source is not related to the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey. When the INFO
Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the system softkeys are blank.
Pressing the ENT Key displays the IFR Alternate Minimums Chart.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Selecting the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
532
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data such as METAR and TAF from the SiriusXM Data Link Receiver. Weather information is available
only when a SiriusXM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Weather subscription is current.
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, select the WX Softkey to display the information windows (AIRPORT,
INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the INFO Box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. When the INFO Box is selected the system softkeys
are blank. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the
ENT Key to complete the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
Selecting the Go Back Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CHART OPTIONS
Selecting the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level.
Selecting the All Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting the Fit WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
Selecting the Full SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Selecting the Back Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
AFCS
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Options.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the Full Screen and Color Scheme Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
533
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the Chart Setup Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the Color Scheme Option.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
FLITECHARTS CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the cycle
expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts is disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no longer
available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays
the current status of the FliteCharts database. See the table below for the various FliteCharts Power-up Page
displays and the definition of each.
534
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FliteCharts Database
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-14 Power-up Page, FliteCharts Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Blank Line. System is not configured for FliteCharts. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
AFCS
System is configured for FliteCharts but no chart database is installed.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for the FliteCharts
database
Normal operation. FliteCharts database is valid and within current
cycle.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date, but still within the
180 day viewing period.
APPENDICES
FliteCharts database has timed out. Database is beyond 180 days
after expiration date. FliteCharts database is no longer available for
viewing.
Table 8-2 FliteCharts Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
‘FliteCharts Expires’ plus a date in white, indicates the chart database is current. ‘Chart data is out of date!’
in yellow, indicates charts are still viewable, but approaching the disable date.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
When the 180 day grace period has expired, ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow indicates that the FliteCharts
database has expired and is no longer viewable. ‘Chart Data: N/A’ appears in white if no FliteCharts data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
535
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FliteCharts time critical information can also be found on the Aux - System Status page. The FliteCharts database
Region, Cycle number, Effective, Expires, and Disables dates of the subscription appear in either blue or yellow text. Dates
shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not within the current subscription period.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts becomes inoperative 180 days after the FliteCharts Expires date is reached, and is no longer
available for viewing. This date is shown as the Disables date. After the disable date the Charts Softkey label
appears subdued and is unavailable until a revised issue of FliteCharts is installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
EIS
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the Database window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the FliteCharts database information is shown.
The FliteCharts database cycle number such as 1505, is deciphered as follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
15 – Indicates the year 2015
05 – Indicates the fifth issue of the FliteCharts database for the year
The FliteCharts Effective date 07–MAY–15 is the first date that this database is current.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The FliteCharts Expires date 04–JUN–15 is the last date that this database is current.
The Disabled date 01–DEC–15 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
The FliteCharts database is provided from Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the FliteCharts database.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The other three possible Aux - System Status page conditions are shown here. The Expires date, in yellow, is the revision date
for the next database cycle. The Disables date, in yellow, is the date that this database cycle is no longer viewable. Region and
Cycle Not Available in blue, indicate that FliteCharts database is not available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
FliteCharts Database is Not Available
INDEX
Figure 8-15 Aux – System Status Page, FliteCharts Database Status
536
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHARTVIEW (OPTIONAL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in full
color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the planview
of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes are not considered within the chart boundaries.
Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol is removed
from the display.
EIS
Grey shading is for illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or MFD display. These
off-scale areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical
position of this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore,
when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart
planview, not to the off-scale area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Inset Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Off-Scale
Area
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Areas
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-16 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
APPENDICES
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• NOTAMs
• Approaches
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
537
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHARTVIEW SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, selecting the Charts Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT Opt, Chart, Info, DP, STAR, APR, WX, NOTAM,
and Go Back. The chart selection softkeys shown below appear on the Airport Information Page.
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Selecting the CHRT Opt Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: All, Header, Plan, Profile,
Minimums, Fit WDTH, Full SCN, and BACK.
EIS
While viewing the CHRT Opt Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, select the Charts Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Options Menu to Show Chart.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-17 Option Menus
APPENDICES
On the Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu, select the desired chart and press the ENT Key
to display the chart.
INDEX
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen.
The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
538
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 8-18 Chart Not Available Banner
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
EIS
Figure 8-19 Unable To Display Chart Banner
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When a chart is not available by selecting the Charts Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts may
be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, selecting the
Charts Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, select the Charts Softkey.
The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Select the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
APPENDICES
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
539
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Scroll Through
Chart With
the Joystick
Figure 8-20 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
While the Approaches Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the system softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing
the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within the
boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears. If the
Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The Aircraft Not Shown
Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
AFCS
Selecting the Chart Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart. If
the displayed chart is the airport diagram, the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey has no effect.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The aircraft position is shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is
within the chart boundaries.
540
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Another source for additional airport information is from the Info Box above the chart for certain airports.
This information source is not related to the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey. When the Info Box is selected using the
FMS Knob, the system softkeys are blank.
Selecting the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
Selecting the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-21 Approach Information Page
AFCS
Selecting the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such
as METAR and TAF from the SiriusXM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available
only when a SiriusXM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Weather subscription is current.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
APPENDICES
Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Selecting
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When NOTAMS
are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled. The NOTAM Softkey may appear
on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections.
Selecting the NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
Selecting the Go Back Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page, Nearest Pages, or Flight
Plan Page).
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
541
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHART OPTIONS
Selecting the CHRT Opt Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the All Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Selecting the Header Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approach
Chart
Briefing Strip
Figure 8-22 Approach Information Page, Header View
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selecting the Plan Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Approach
Chart Plan
View
Figure 8-23 Approach Information Page, Plan View
542
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting the Profile Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Approach
Chart Descent
Profile Strip
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-24 Approach Information Page, Profile View, Full Screen Width
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting the Minimums Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Minimum
Descent
Altitude/
Visibility Strip
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-25 Approach Information Page, Minimums View, Full Screen Width
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
543
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, selecting the Fit WIDTH Softkey changes
the chart size to fit the available screen width.
Selecting the Full SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, select the FULL SCN Softkey to display the information windows
(Airport, Info).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Airport, Info, Runways, or Frequencies Box (Info Box shown).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Info Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
Selecting the Back Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the Full Screen and Color Scheme Options.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
AFCS
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the Chart Setup Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the Color Scheme Option.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
APPENDICES
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
INDEX
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
544
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHARTVIEW CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
Power-up Page Display
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no
longer available for viewing. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays the current status of the
ChartView database. See the table below for the various ChartView Power-up Page displays and the definition
of each.
EIS
Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for ChartView. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for ChartView but no chart database is installed.
Contact Jeppesen for a ChartView database.
Normal operation. ChartView database is valid and within current
cycle.
ChartView database is within 1 week after expiration date. A new cycle
is available for update.
ChartView database is beyond 1 week after expiration date, but still
within the 70 day viewing period.
ChartView database has timed out. Database is beyond 70 days after
expiration date. ChartView database is no longer available for viewing.
System time is not available. GPS satellite data is unknown or the
system has not yet locked onto satellites. Check database cycle number
for effectivity.
System is verifying chart database when new cycle is installed for the
first time.
After verifying, chart database is found to be corrupt. ChartView is not
available.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Table 8-3 ChartView Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The ChartView time critical information can also be found on the Aux - System Status page. The database
Cycle number, Active (Expires), and Standby (Effective) dates of the ChartView subscription appear in either
blue or yellow text. When the ChartView Expires date is reached, ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days
later. This is shown as the Disables date. When the Disables date is reached, charts are no longer available for
viewing. The Charts Softkey label then appears subdued and is disabled until a revised issue of ChartView is
installed.
APPENDICES
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
545
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the ChartView database information is
shown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ChartView database cycle number, 1604, is deciphered as follows:
16 – Indicates the year 2016
04 – Indicates the fourth issue of the ChartView database for the year
The ChartView database is obtained directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Updating Jeppesen Databases in
Appendix B for instructions on revising the ChartView database.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Expires date, in yellow, is the revision date for the next database cycle. The Disables date, in yellow, is
the date that this database cycle is no longer viewable. Cycle Not Available in blue, indicates no ChartView data
is available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
546
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.3 AIRPORT DIRECTORY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases
offer detailed information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information is
viewed on the Airport Information Page by selecting the Info Softkey until Info 2 is displayed.
Both Airport Directories are available for downloading at flygarmin.com. However, copy only one of the
databases to the Supplemental Data Card. The system cannot recognize both databases simultaneously.
Selecting the Airport Directory Page:
EIS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Airport Information Page. Initially, information for the airport closest to
the aircraft’s present position is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) If necessary, select the Info softkey until Info 2 is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-26 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page
AIRPORT DIRECTORY DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
APPENDICES
The Airport Directory databases are revised every 56 days and offered on a subscription basis. Check fly.
garmin.com for the current database. The Airport Directory is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
547
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airport Directory Database
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-27 Power-up, Airport Directory Database
Power-up Page Display
Definition
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Normal operation. Airport Directory database is valid and within
current cycle.
AFCS
Airport Directory database has expired.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Database card contains no Airport Directory data.
Table 8-4 Airport Directory Annunciation Definitions
The Airport Directory Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be
found on the Aux - System Status page.
APPENDICES
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the Database window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the Airport Directory database information is shown.
The Airport Directory database cycle number 16D3, is deciphered as follows:
16 – Indicates the year 2016
INDEX
D – Indicates the data is for Airport Directory
3 – Indicates the second issue of the Airport Directory database for the year
548
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Airport Directory Effective date 26–May–16 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The
Airport Directory Expires date 21–JUL–16 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airport Directory
Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-28 Aux – System Status Page, Airport Directory Current Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Directory information appears in blue and yellow text. The Effective date appears in blue when data
is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The Expires date appears in blue
when data is current and in yellow when expired. Not Available appears in blue in the Region field if Airport
Directory data is not available on the database card. An expired Airport Directory database is not disabled and
will continue to function indefinitely.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
549
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.4 WIFI CONNECTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The system is capable of WEP64, WEP128,WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK encryption formats. WPA-Enterprise
and WPA2-Enterprise are not supported. Connections that require web proxies, captive portals, or other elements
that require user credentials, including a user name and password or a redemption or access code; or require
action such as accepting a user agreement, are not supported.
The optional GDL 59 Data Link provides a high speed IEEE 802.11g WiFi data link between the aircraft and a
ground computer network while the aircraft is on the ground and located within range of the network.
Control and monitoring of Wi-Fi functions are accomplished through the Aux-Maintenance Wi-Fi Setup Page.
EIS
Viewing the WiFi Setup Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aux-Maintenance WiFi Setup Page.
Setting up a new WiFi connection:
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the Avail Softkey on the MFD. A list of available networks will be displayed in the Available Networks
window. Signal strength is shown for each network, as well as security requirements and whether the network
has been saved in the system’s memory.
Figure 8-29 Available Wi-Fi Networks
2) If necessary, select the Rescan Softkey to have the system scan again for available networks.
INDEX
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Rescan Available Networks’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
550
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press the FMS Knob to place the cursor in the list of networks.
4) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired network.
5) Select the Connect Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Connect to Selected Network’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) If the network is secured, a window will be displayed in order to enter the necessary passcode. Use the FMS
Knobs to enter the desired alpha numeric characters. Select the CapsLock Softkey to enter upper case letters.
If there is no security associated with the network, proceed to step 9.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ will be highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key again.
9) The Save Settings window is now displayed with the cursor highlighting ‘Save Connection’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10) The selected network can be saved to system memory to make re-connection easier at a later time.
Connecting the selected network without saving:
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to highlight ‘Connect’.
b) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Saving and connect the selected network:
a) Press the ENT Key. A checkmark is placed in the checkbox and the cursor moves to the airport field.
b) Using the FMS Knobs, enter an airport identifier to be associated with the saved network. This aids in
identifying the network later in the event of duplicate network names.
AFCS
c) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to ‘Connect’.
d) Press the ENT Key again to connect to the selected network.
Editing a saved network:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) While viewing list of saved networks, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the network to be edited.
APPENDICES
3) Pressing the ENT Key at this point will check or uncheck the Auto Connect checkbox. When a checkmark is
present, the system will automatically connect to the network when within range.
4) Select the Edit Softkey. The cursor now appears in the Connection Settings window.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the network attribute to be edited.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin editing the field.
INDEX
7) When the entry is complete, press the ENT Key.
8) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key until ‘Save’ is highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
551
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Disconnecting a Wi-Fi network:
Select the DISCNCT Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disconnect From Network’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Deleting a saved Wi-Fi network:
EIS
1) While viewing the list of saved networks, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the network to be deleted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select the Delete Softkey. The selected network is removed from the list.
552
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.5 SIRIUSXM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about SiriusXM Weather products.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A SXM Data Link Receiver is available
for the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A SXM can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
services at any altitude throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is available only on the GDL 69A
SXMData Link Receiver, not the GDL 69.
EIS
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on
the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A SXM.
Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send
an activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A SXM, allows it to play entertainment programming.
These IDs are located:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
AFCS
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
Activating the SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services.
2) Select the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Select the Aux - XM Radio page.
4) Select the Info Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
APPENDICES
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
6) Select the Lock Softkey.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight YES.
8) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
553
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Audio
Radio ID
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Data
Radio ID
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Weather
Products
Window
Figure 8-30 XM Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If SiriusXM Weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on the XM
Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data
Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for
subscription.
USING SIRIUSXM RADIO
AFCS
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed Aux - XM Information Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) Select the Radio Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
554
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Active
Channels
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Channel
List
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Categories
Field
Volume
Field
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-31 XM Radio Page
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the SiriusXM
Radio is using.
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
AFCS
1) While on the XM Radio Page, select the Channel Softkey.
2) Select the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel Box, or move down the list with the CH – Softkey.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
Selecting a channel directly:
APPENDICES
1) While on the XM Radio Page, select the Channel Softkey.
2) Select the Direct CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel Box is highlighted.
3) Select the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel number.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
555
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CATEGORY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is Presets to view channels that have been programmed.
Selecting a category:
1) Select the Category Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Select the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
EIS
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
AFCS
Figure 8-32 Categories List
PRESETS
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
selecting the Presets and More Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to the
channel list for the Presets category.
556
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Setting a preset channel number:
1) On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, select the Presets
Softkey to access the first five preset channels (Preset 1 - Preset 5).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the More Softkey to access the next five channels (Preset 6 – Preset 10), and again to access the
last five channels (Preset 11 – Preset 15). Selecting the More Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset
channels.
3) Select any one of the (Preset 1 - Preset 15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
4) Select the Set Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select Presets to
Access the Preset
Channels Softkeys
Select More to Cycle
Through the Preset
Channels
Select Set to
Save Each
Preset Channel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-33 Accessing and Selecting SiriusXM Preset Channels
Selecting the Back Softkey, or 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top level softkeys.
VOLUME
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by selecting the Volume Softkey, which
brings up the Mute Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
Adjusting the volume:
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, select the Volume Softkey.
AFCS
2) Select the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or select the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is selected, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-34 Volume Control
SiriusXM Radio volume may also be adjusted on each passenger headset.
Mute SiriusXM audio:
1) Select the XM Radio Page or XM Information Page.
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
2) Select the Mute Softkey to mute the audio. Select the Mute Softkey again to unmute the audio.
557
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.6 SCHEDULER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., Change oil, Switch fuel tanks,
or Altimeter-Transponder Check) in the Alerts Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on
a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset
to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, all messages are retained until
deleted, and message timer countdown is resumed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-35 Scheduler (Utility Page)
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the Aux - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Messages Window and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to Type.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the message type:
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
• One time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
APPENDICES
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
INDEX
8) For periodic and one-time messages, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
558
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MM-YY) and press the ENT Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the Aux - Utility Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key while the message line is cleared to clear the message time.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Scheduler messages appear in the Messages Window on the PFD. When a scheduler message is waiting,
the Messages Softkey label changes to Advisory. Pressing the Messages Softkey opens the Messages Window
and acknowledges the scheduler message. The softkey label reverts to Messages when pressed. Pressing the
Messages Softkey again removes the Messages Window from the display, and the scheduler message is deleted
from the message queue.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-36 PFD Alerts Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
559
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.7 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.
EIS
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport identifier. The
file is created automatically each time the system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the Aux-Utility Page. If no SD card has been
inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA” is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the system is capable of logging.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Date
• Time
• GPS altitude (MSL)
• GPS altitude (WGS84 datum)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Baro-Corrected altitude (feet)
• Baro Correction (in/Hg)
• Indicated airspeed (kts)
• Vertical speed (fpm)
AFCS
• GPS vertical speed (fpm)
• OAT (degrees C)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• True airspeed (knots)
• Pitch Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Roll Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Lateral and Vertical G Force (g)
APPENDICES
• Ground Speed (kts)
• Ground Track (degrees
magnetic)
• Latitude (degrees; geodetic;
+North)
• Autopilot On/Off
• Longitude (degrees; geodetic;
+East)
• AFCS roll/pitch commands
• Magnetic Heading (degrees)
• HSI source
• Selected course
• Com1/Com2 frequency
• Nav1/Nav2 frequency
• AFCS roll/pitch modes
• GPS fix
• GPS horizontal alert limit
• GPS vertical alert limit
• SBAS GPS horizontal protection
level
• CDI deflection
• SBAS GPS vertical protection
level
• VDI/GP/GS deflection
• Fuel Qty (right & left)(gals)
• Wind Direction (degrees)
• Fuel Flow (gph)
• Wind Speed (knots)
• Turbine RPM
• Active Waypoint Identifier
• Oil Pressure (psi)
• Distance to next waypoint (nm)
• Oil Temperature (deg. F)
• Bearing to next waypoint
(degrees)
• Torque
• Magnetic variation (degrees)
INDEX
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in the following figure. This file can be
imported into most computer spreadsheet applications.
560
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Local Date
YYMMDD
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
log_130210_104506_KIXD.csv
Figure 8-37 Log File Format
EIS
Data logging status can be monitored on the Aux - Utility Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
561
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.8 CONNEXT SETUP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The mobile device must be ‘paired’ with the system in order to use the various functions. Pairing is accomplished
by first placing the system in pairing mode by displaying the Connext Setup Page. The system is ‘discoverable’
whenever this page is displayed. The pairing operation is completed from the mobile device and the Garmin Pilot
application. See the device Bluetooth pairing instructions and the connection instructions in the Garmin Pilot
application.
The Connext Setup Page allows for setting up the installed optional Flight Stream device for a Bluetooth
connection between the system and a mobile device running the Garmin Pilot™ application.
EIS
Viewing the Connext Setup Page
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aux - Connext Setup page.
Changing the Bluetooth Name
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Bluetooth Name’ field.
3) Enter the desired name by using the alphanumeric keypad or the large FMS Knob to select the character field,
and the small FMS Knob select the desired alphanumeric character for that field.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is removed and the new name is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling Flight Plan Importing from Garmin Pilot
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Flight Plan Import’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
AFCS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Enabling/Disabling WiFi Database Importing from Garmin Pilot
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘WiFi Database Import’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
562
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/Disabling Automatic Reconnection of a Specific Paired Device
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired paired device.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’. Selecting ‘Enabled’ allows the system to automatically
connect to a previously paired device when detected.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Remove a Specific Paired Device from the List of Paired Devices:
EIS
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired paired device.
3) Press the Remove Softkey. A confirmation screen is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Yes’.
5) Press the ENT Key to remove the device from the list of paired devices.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
563
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.9 SURFACEWATCH
NOTE: The SafeTaxi database must be available to provide information regarding taxiways, aprons and
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
other objects in the airport environment.
The SurfaceWatch™ feature provides visual annunciations to help the flight crew maintain situational awareness
and avoid potential runway incursions and excursions during ground and air operations in the airport environment.
The SurfaceWatch feature is comprised of the following key components:
EIS
• Alert Annunciations
Taxiway Takeoff
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Runway Too Short (during takeoff or landing)
Check Runway (during takeoff or landing)
Taxiway Landing
• Runway distance remaining
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Provides information on the Primary Flight Display (PFD) that contains runway and taxiway information that
changes as the aircraft moves through the airport environment.
The SurfaceWatch feature is not available in Reversionary Mode.
Inhibit/uninhibit SurfaceWatch:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the Aux - System Setup 1 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor..
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the SurfaceWatch field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to toggle the SurfaceWatch alerts on or off.
AFCS
INFORMATION BOX
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The SurfaceWatch™ Information Box is displayed on the PFD. It contains runway and taxiway information
that dynamically changes as the aircraft moves through the airport environment. The information that is
displayed in the Information Box is the aircraft’s relative position to nearby aprons, taxiways, and runways.
There are three components to the SurfaceWatch™ Information Box. These components are Currently
Occupied, Approaching, and Crossing Runways.
APPENDICES
Crossing Runways
Currently Occupied
Approaching
INDEX
Figure 8-38 Information Types Displayed in the Information Box
564
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CURRENTLY OCCUPIED
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This component indicates the aircraft is ‘ON’ the indicated apron, taxiway, or runway. The aircraft is
currently ‘ON’ runway 04 right (RWY 04R). The remaining runway distance is also shown when the aircraft
is situated on and aligned with a runway.
If the aircraft is airborne and approaching an airport, ‘AIRBORNE TO’ and the destination airport identifier
will be displayed.
Information regarding non-manuevering areas not labeled on the SafeTaxi diagram will not be displayed.
APPROACHING COMPONENT
EIS
This component indicates the aircraft is ‘APPROACHING’ the indicated apron, taxiway, or runway.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the aircraft is taxiing and approaching an intersection of multiple taxiways, the taxiway identifiers
will be listed in order of proximity and the distance to the nearest is displayed.
When the aircraft is taxiing and crossing an intersection of multiple taxiways, ‘CROSSING’ will be displayed
and no distance will be shown.
CROSSING RUNWAYS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
This component lists the runways, from closest to furthest, that are ‘CROSSING’ the runway the aircraft
currently occupies. The distance to each runway is also shown in order of closest distance. Runways behind
the aircraft are not depicted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Crossing Runways component is shown in conjunction with the Currently Occupied component of
the Information Box.
ALERTS
The SurfaceWatch alert annunciations are displayed on the PFD. The alert annunciations are accompanied
by a corresponding voice alert.
AFCS
SurfaceWatch Alert
Annunciation
Associated Voice
Description
Alert
“Runway too short”
“Check runway”
Issued when the aircraft is taking off from, or landing on, a runway with a length
less than needed as entered.
Issued when the aircraft is taking off from, or landing on, a runway different than
that entered in the Takeoff Data or Landing Data screen.
APPENDICES
“Taxiway”
Issued when the aircraft is taking off from a non-runway (e.g. a taxiway)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
“Taxiway”
Issued when the aircraft is landing on a non-runway (e.g. a taxiway).
Table 8-5 SurfaceWatch Alert Annunciations
INDEX
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
565
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAKEOFF ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Taxiway Takeoff
The Takeoff phase-of-flight, as determined by the system, must be valid in order for the system to issue
Takeoff Alerts.
The Taxiway Takeoff alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to takeoff from a non-runway (e.g. a
taxiway) or the aircraft is not aligned with a runway.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
In addition to the visual and voice alerts, the Information Box contains a textual description of the currently
occupied taxiway (or other maneuvering area) and potentially the next area (apron or maneuvering area) to
be occupied (based on aircraft heading and the airport geometry) and the distance to that area.
Figure 8-39 Typical Taxiway Information Displayed in the Information Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Runway Too Short
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Runway Too Short (during takeoff) alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to takeoff from a runway
and the remaining runway length is less than the required length. The insufficient runway length condition
is determined based on aircraft current position during the takeoff roll and the required takeoff distance
information entered on the Takeoff Data Screen.
Note that while the Runway Too Short alert may be issued for any runway from which the aircraft is
taking off, the system will always calculate the runway length for the specific runway entered in the Takeoff
Data.
AFCS
In addition to the visual and voice alert, the Information Box will contain a textual description of the
currently occupied runway and the remaining runway length.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-40 Typical Runway Information Displayed in the Information Box
Check Runway
APPENDICES
The Check Runway alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to takeoff from a runway that does not
match the departure runway entered in the Takeoff Data Screen.
INDEX
In addition to the visual and voice alert, the Information Box contains a textual description of the currently
occupied runway.
566
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
LANDING ALERTS
The On-Final phase-of-flight, as determined by the system, must be valid in order for the system to issue
Landing Alerts.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Taxiway Landing
The Taxiway Landing alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to land on a non-runway (e.g. a taxiway)
or the aircraft is not aligned with a runway.
In addition to the visual and voice alert, the Information Box will display the destination airport identifier
and the text “APPROACHING TWY” to indicate a non-runway landing is being attempted.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-41 Typical Information Displayed During a Taxiway Landing Alert
Runway Too Short
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Runway Too Short alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to land on a runway where the remaining
runway length is less than the required landing runway length entered in the Landing Data Screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Note that while the Runway Too Short alert may be issued for any runway with which aircraft is aligned,
the system will always calculate the runway length for the specific runway entered in entered in the Landing
Data Screen.
In addition to the visual and voice alert, the Information Box will display the destination airport identifier
and the text “APPROACHING REMAINING” to indicate a the remaining runway length.
AFCS
Figure 8-42 Typical Information Displayed During a Runway Too Short Alert
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Check Runway
The Check Runway alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to land on a runway that does not match the
arrival runway specified in the Landing Data.
APPENDICES
Additionally, the Information Box will display the destination airport identifier, the runway with which
the aircraft is aligned, and the distance to the runway.
INDEX
Figure 8-43 Typical Information Displayed During a Check Runway Alert
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
567
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.10 SATELLITE TELEPHONE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver provides an airborne low speed data link, Iridium Satellite Telephone service,
and Short Message Service (SMS). The GSR 56 can also be paired with the optional GDL 59 Data Link, providing
a high speed (IEEE 802.11g) Wi-Fi data link between the aircraft and a ground computer network while the
aircraft is on the ground.
NOTE: An account must be established to access the Iridium satellite network for voice/SMS.
The telephone is available to the flight crew through the audio panel and headsets.
EIS
Operation of these features in the cockpit is accomplished through the Aux-Telephone, Aux-Text Messaging,
and Aux-Maintenance Wi-Fi Setup Pages.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
REGISTERING WITH GARMIN CONNEXT®
A subscriber account must be established prior to using the Iridium Satellite System. Before setting up an
Iridium account, obtain the serial number of the Iridium Transceiver (GSR1) and the System ID by selecting the
Aux- System Status Page. Contact Garmin at 1-866-739-5687 in the United States or 913-397-8200, ext. 1135.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DISABLE/ENABLE IRIDIUM TRANSCEIVER
Iridium telephone and data communications may be turned on or off by performing these simple steps.
Disabling/enabling telephone and low speed data services:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aux-Telephone Page.
3) Press the MENU Key. The Page Menu window is now displayed.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Disable Iridium Transmission’ in the menu list.
Figure 8-44 Select Disable Iridium Transmission
INDEX
5) Press the ENT Key. The Iridium transceiver is now disabled.
6) To enable the Iridium transceiver, repeat steps 1 through 3, then select ‘Enable Iridium Transceiver’.
568
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION
The pilot or copilot can place and answer calls on the Iridium satellite network. Control and monitoring of
telephone functions are accomplished through the Aux-Telephone Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Viewing the Telephone Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aux - Telephone or Aux - Text Messaging Page.
3) If necessary, select the Phone Softkey to display the Aux - Telephone Page.
External Phone
Description
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Internal Phone
EIS
The phone status display gives a graphical representation of the current disposition of voice and/or data
transmissions.
Phone is Idle
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Phone is ringing
Phone has a dial tone (off hook) or connected to another phone
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Phone dialed is busy
Phone is dialing another phone
AFCS
Phone has failed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Phone status not known
Phone is disabled
APPENDICES
Phone is reserved for data transmission
Calling other phone or incoming call from other phone
INDEX
Other phone is on hold
Phones are connected
Table 8-6 Telephone Symbols
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
569
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
INCOMING CALLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When viewing MFD pages other than the Aux-Telephone Page, a pop-up alert will be displayed and an aural
alert “Incoming Call” will be heard. If the incoming call is an Iridium network call, Iridium will be displayed.
The pop-up alert may be inhibited at times, such as during takeoff. In addition to the pop-up alert, a ringing
phone symbol will be displayed to the right of the MFD page title. Also, the voice alert “Incoming Call” will
be heard on the selected cockpit audio.
Answering an incoming call in the cockpit:
1) Press the Phone Key on the appropriate audio panel.
EIS
2) Select the Answer Softkey on the MFD.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While viewing the Aux-Telephone Page
NOTE: The Push-to-Talk switch is not utilized for telephone communication. The microphone is active after
selecting the Answer Softkey, and stays active until the call is terminated.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the Phone Key on the appropriate audio panel.
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
3) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Answer Incoming Call’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting the Ignore Softkey will extinguish the pop-up window and leave the call unanswered. Selecting
the Phone Softkey will display the Aux-Telephone Page allowing additional call information to be viewed
before answering.
Muting incoming call alerts:
AFCS
1) With the Aux-Telephone Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable Incoming Call Alerts’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The voice and pop-up alert will not be displayed now when an incoming call is received.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
OUTGOING CALLS
Voice calls can be made from the cockpit to an external phone through the Iridium Satellite Network.
Making an external call from the cockpit using the Iridium satellite network:
APPENDICES
1) Press the Phone Key on the appropriate audio panel.
2) Select the Dial Softkey on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Iridium’.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor has now moved to the phone number entry field.
570
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-45 Enter Phone Number
5) Enter the desired telephone number (country code first) by selecting the number softkeys on the MFD or by
pressing the numeric keys on the MFD Control Unit.
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ is highlighted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-02183-00 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
INDEX
Figure 8-46 Make the Call
571
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) Press the ENT Key. The system will begin calling the number.
Figure 8-47 System is Making the Connection
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the phone is answered, the connection is established. To exit the call, select the Hangup Softkey.
INDEX
Figure 8-48 Phone is Answered, Connection Complete
572
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190-02183-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PLACING THE COCKPIT PHONE ON HOLD
Placing a call on hold:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Select the Hold Softkey on the MFD.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Put Current Call On Hold’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
The cockpit phone is now isolated from the call. This figure illustrates a call between the cockpit and an
external phone in which the cockpit phone has been put on hold. Select the Hold Softkey again to resume
the call.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-49 Cockpit Phone on Hold
TEXT MESSAGING (SMS)
APPENDICES
The pilot or copilot can send and receive text messages on the Iridium satellite network. Messages may be
sent to an e